Home

PG Music Band in a Box - 2010 (Macintosh) User Guide

Contents

1. a a nr Use the Folder bution to select another falder for example to select from RealTracks demo songs Folder Applications 8and in a Box RealTracks Demos The first ime that you select the Song bution Band in a Box automatically writes the song list for the folder up to 25 000 songs From then on the song list opens when the Song button is selected Play when selected automatically plays the song you pick Chaper Guided Tour of Banda Box C Rebuda Ust imi alt some new songs toa folder just ikon Rebuild List rebuild List and the SongPicker will add their titles to the C Fini RF CFindAgan C Ter ahos Find eure wo help you locate songs in the list Click on the Find bution and then type in the wond you want to search for and click on Find Find Again repeats your search Start song playback Almative methods are to double click on any bar in the carriage aor ending i dete sing ie Hay spaccbar M comm me Er T s d renin Pause Jump to any bar in the song Press the From button to choose which chorus and bar number to jump te From For even more fun play along with the band Once you have selected a song you ll See the chords in the Chordsheet so i s easy to read and play along CE
2. The Patches sening at the bottom allows you to assign a patch to the harmony If you set Na Patch change the harmony won t change the patch This is a useful setting for making a generic harmony that doesn t change the patch of the Melody or Thru channel for example For the Shearing Quintet harmony we will set the patches as follows Channel A Piano Chame B Vibes Channel C Guitar Coat When we have made changes o the harmony we will hear these changes on the harmony channel Important note You need to press the UPDATE button after you ve made any changes for the changes fo take effect Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions as Cen Cre You make Copy a Harmony to the ClipBoard and then move to a new harmony and PASTE the harmony to the new location For example if you want to make a harmony similar to the Shearing Quintet harmony choose Copy move to a new harmony and choose Paste Then rename that harmony Shearing modified and you can make changes to it such as using different instruments Cane Ge You should never have to press these Save buttons since the harmony is saved automatically for you All of the 256 harmonies are saved in a single hr file called default har If you have run out of harmonies you can start a new harmonies file by pressing the SaveAs For example if you want to make a disk of add on harmonies You can make
3. Presets for Chord Options Now ale loading inthe MIDI files you d normally have a look at these settings to soe if they cem reasonable for your MIDI file If they are not you can change the settings For example if you know that they key signature of he ong is not F but s C then you would set that Similarly if you knew that the Melody channel was on channel 3 you cold set that to override the Chord Wizard setings Once you ve done that choose ane ofthe Presets to quickly enter the settings to the type of song that you are uying to interpret Preset choices are Jazz Standard Jazz Modern Pop with seventh chords Pop it no seventh chords Rock Pop Ballad Solo Piano and Solo Piano Jazz Presets Preseis Defaults Pop w 7ths Jazz Standard tock Pop ino nh Jazz Modern Pop Ballad Solo Pia Pop SolPa Jazz Chord Options When you choose a preset it automatically makes a numberof settings in the Chord Options section ofthe dialog but you can override them in this dialog These include Chord Resolu Z beats Md Chapter 12 Wizards Tutors and liie 2 Chord Resolution Range from I beat to 4 bars default 2 eats This isthe minimum number of beats for a chord For example if you set o 2 beats then the Chori Wizard will never attempt to come up with diferent chords that are only a beat part
4. Guitar Box songs MGU Chapter Band ios Povertiuide ResiChars ane optional and are show notation for Realracis in stes NsslChats re toa nd I Show Notation for Soloists Settings dialog S Save RealChart in MIDI file F Save RealChart in BB songs MGU Show notation for RealChars in styles w generated from styles with ReafTracks show RealChars that have been EL Show Notation foe Soloists will show RealChars that have been generated from the Select Soloist dito EL Save RealChart in MIDI file will save the RealChart to a MIDI tack so you can analyze it in other programs EL Save RealCharts in BB Songs MGU will ave the RealChart MIDI information tothe MGU file ITracks Folder The RealTracks styles are stored in Applications Band in BowReafTracks by default You can choose an alterate folder location in the RealTraeke Folder settings dialog by checking Use a custom folder location far the RealTracks and then clicking on the folder button and picking an altemate folder Then slick on the Update button to confirm the new location Custom RearTracis folder instead of Applications Band a a Bo rea racs F Use a custom folder location for the RealTracks TMyMusic ReaTracks 2 Coder You don t need to visit this folder when using RealTracks itis used internally by Band in a Box so you shoul
5. Once we ve presse the INTERPRET CHORDS NOW button we con se the results by looking at the chordsheet Here are the chords that were interpreted re wo og nap ow wo mar e me Em lon ome mar E Sw me Mm lon ose 3 wow om ow l9 Fw ow mar E zw So that we can see how well the Chord Wizard did we can compare 1t to the core choris of the sang input by a musician listening to the song You can se these by loading in the song Violet Song MGU E E Sore n 28 soar x Dew og A a As you can se by comparing the two sets of chords the Chord Wizard got almost all of the chords correct in this example The Chord Wizard purposely avoids chords ike CIS it wil put a simpler CT instead since this is more like a typical lead sheet Chapter 12 Wizards Tutors and Les ES you ve red in the entire MIDI file you have 103 bars af chords on the Chondsheet This actually contains 3 choruses of the song You might want to reduce that toa single chorus by senting the chorus end of the song to bar 36 and then erasing the excess bars after bar 36 by choosing Edi Erase Examining the song that has been interpreted by the Chord Wizard You ll notice thatthe title Violet Song key F and tempo 120 have been set to the values found in the file Part markers are not set the Chord Wizard doesn y t0 guess where part markers might be occurring You need to put the part markers in yoursel
6. Use Har Ending for RealTracks Deka Start the 2 bar ending early Default The usual Band in a Box ending is 2 bars appended tote end ofthe song This option gives you an alternative to end the song on the last har of the song Band in a Box will Stil play an ending on the chord that you specify and the ending will occur as a 2 bar phrase beginning 2 bars before the end of the form This results in more natural endings for many songs For example th song Old Folks At Home is a 32 bar chorus song from bar 1 to bar 32 It ends with the last melody note on bar 31 with the word hom but Band in a Box normally plays a 2 ar ending starting at the end of bar 32 and poing for 2 bars more Fora song like this iti more natural to end the song at the end of bar 32 To set this in Band in a Box choose the Song Additional Song Setns item and set Start the ending 2 bars early to wue IV Start the 2 bar ending early Fote Auto Endings 1f you ve made a siyle and haven t included an ending a 2 bar ending can be generated aulomatealy based on the style Fadeout ending bars Fadeout ending bars 9 Fade You can quickly choose a fadeout ending Just pres the Fade button and Band in a Box ill ade out the lst X bans of the song you can specify how many bars Or customize the fadeout with precise values for each ar Solos should have a bluesy feel
7. jr hal costes Lary earn your Real Track Te oh oie Relaciones wher ie TAA resrrisck sites supports Shots olds and Pushes TF the column is Fn fe ceed Reta Seas Holde Sho a Paes available If there is an n holds are available from PG Musie but not n PPI installed ties is 7 no holds are available for his styl The Holds he es are a fee upgrade so you can download them from our web site th nemisiccom Assuming that you have the Holds files Tor the Real Tracks ha you are generating then you just use Band in a Box as you would normally and type chords with shots c2 C halds C or pushes C or C for R or 16 not pushi or combinations of push and hald C Chapter 3 Band in a Box 2010 for Macintoshi 1 tbar Endings RealTracks endings have been enhanced and are now 4 bar endings instead of 2 bar allowing time fora natural decay of the instruments By 4 bar endings we are referring to a 2 bar ending that has additional two bars to allow for the natural decay of the sudio instrament instead f ing quickly faded out To aid the 4 bar ending support you need to have updated ST2 and XT2 files for the RealTracks We are releasing many of these updates files with 2010 release and will have free patches for the older Real racks as they become available baccndings are on by defuit So ifany of the RealTracks have 4 bar endings then the arrangement will play as a 4 bar endin
8. na Chapter Bandi Hot Povertiuide MIDI Setup Connecting to MIDI mA river intertace synthesizer bo ee The Band in a Box program running on your computer sends a srcam of MIDI data via she MIDI Driver to your MIDI interface The MIDI interface transmits information between the computer and your synthesizer The Synthesizer or Sound Module c g Roland Sound Canvas produces the musical instrument sounds Band in a Box tells it what notes t play and how to play them Stereo Speakers or Headphones are connected to your synthesizer so that you may hear the musie Your MIDI setup could also be configured to use the built in sounds of QuickTime Musical Instruments ora virtual software synthesizer such as the Apple DLS There are also MIDI systems such as OMS and FrecMIDI that can be configured by the user FreeMIDI and OMS sre supported only in Band In A Box 059 booted from Mac Classic If they are present on your system they will appear n the Band in a Bax MIDI Drivers dialog Selecting a MIDI Driver Band in a Box automatically detects the MIDI drivers installed in your system The MIDI Seleet MIDI Driver or Apple DLS Synth menu command opens the MIDI Drivers dialog which lists the drivers that have been detected Band In A Box has detected the following MIDI Drivers Please choose which you would prefer to use Q Apple DLS Synth
9. IC tamaan amon 7 ca Tna T Paasa E banum soagn imt T Ct reyes Gene Geers Gaines eo TI E ERE mac e Gevsecsdam ER unicam penne ere ce FEUDUM FUoy eo T ERE Nissen sea 5 ens 4 Chapter 2 QuickStart Tutorial Choose File Inport Chords from MIDI File on the File menu or use the keystrokes Ctri Option l to open the Chord Wizard dialog When the Chord Wizard dialog opens press the Open Change button to choose the MIDI file that you want Band in a Box to interpret the chonds from To help Band in a Box interpret the chords better you can choose a pr Choose from among such genres as Pop Rock Jazz Standard Loading an existing Band in a Box format song p Tc tec ew astm Bete Box will offer to build a song list for you We ve included many demo songs fr you to use and they are ited in the song lis You could also load a pre existing song by using the File Open song menu item or by pressing the F3 function key which will launch the familiar Macintosh file dialog Note hat most songs will automatically load a Style which well eam about in the next set forthe song Going to the next step Now that you have chords an your chordsheet you are ready to move on to step number Step 2 Choose a Style Band in a Box creates backing arrangements based on the chords you type in applied to a particular Style What s a Style A style i
10. Overall Harmony Octave This is very useful setting It sets the overall octave of the harmony For example when Wwe made the 5 part Trumpets harmony we wanted he harmony to always be played an octave higher than the reconded melody This is because the 5 part harmony is spread over 2 octaves and needs a high Volume Adjust of Entire Harmony You can set an overall adjust to the entire harmony so it will be quieter No harmony if duration less than I harmonies such as Gamer Piano harmonize every note they produce unrealistic harmonies since a piano player like Garner wouldnt harmonize notes of a short duration You can specify a harmony to only occur for notes longer than a cerin Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions a duration In the example of Gamer we set the threshold to 200ms notes shorter than that sll not be harmonized OK to make new harmony with chord This option is for how the program fixes the harmony when chord changes occur during a sustained note harmony Most harmonies have a feature that changes the pitch ofthe harmony voices under the Melody note when the chond changes if the underlying voice wouldn t be a chord tone This sounds unrealistic for certain types of harmonies like Gamer or Guitar harmonies since it would be unrealistic for those instruments to change the inner voicings in this manner I you de select the option to Make new harmony with new chord the voices that would
11. Resi Open the Applications Band in Box Drums Demos folder and you ll see folders of demo tunes These will demonstrate the RealDrums Let s load in lazzBrushes 145 Demo MGU from the Applications Bandin a BoviDrums Demos folder Press Play Ifyou have the RealDrums style installed for JazzBrushes i e you have a folder called Band in a Box Drums JazaBrushes then you should now be hearing RealDrums You can tell right away because the countin Sound is different itis not the usual MIDI countin hut is a side stck or snare live drum Sound As the ReslDrums are playing Change the tempo of the music as itis playing Use the standard tempo controls the square bracket keys and to change the tempo and the RealDrums will change immediately to the new tempo The and keys change tempo by 5 bpm Press STOP and then change the tempo to a far slower tempo ike 60 bpm Now press PLAY Notice that the RealDaums are not just playing slower they are Playing differently with appropriate patterns and fills for a slower tempo This is because we have recorded the drummers playing at different tempos and include a wide variety of tempos inside the RealDrums folder ytes with Realrus Open up the StylePicker and notice the category alle Ses with RealDrums This lists many Real Drums styles Style that we ve made We always name the RealDrums style beginning with a minus sign so hat ZZIAZZ Style w
12. Chapter S Guide Tour of unda o Record a Melody Band in a Box has 2 built in MIDI sequencer tracks Melody and Soloist so you can record and edit your own melodies or solos These tacks are recorded from a MIDI Keyboard or other MIDI controller connected to Band in Box by your MIDI d Press the Record button to begin recording This launches the Reeard Track dialog box You can punch in overdub and record directly to the fecord ending or the tag Use the filier to choose which MIDI events are recorded Record Track Record From start of Song OFrom sare 1 Chorus T OTag CO End C Overdub Underlying Notes Filter CREE Gina Pressing the Record burton will start Band in a Box recording what you play on the Thru track An audible countin is played prior to recording Once you have completed 11O Melody Ports recorded recording your melody Band Box will ask you if you would like to keep the take and if you would like to copy the recorded chorus to the whole CJ Overdub Underlying Notes song Options C Copy 1st Chorus to Whole Song C Retain Past Last Recorded ip Looking for inspiration AT cick ofa buton ta Band ina Box Wald val wie complelaly new songs from scratch complete with Chords Into Melody Solo Ending and even an orginal Tiie Or you can enter your awn chard changes and let the Melodist reste anew melody over them There are mare than 1
13. Instruments with an N or Gt in the Nt notation column will display the RealTrack in notation The Artist column has the name of the musician playing on the RealTrack instrument See the Artist Bio box for information about the player Chapter 6 Band iB Powertiuide EI The letter t in the T column indicates RealTracks that are tempo swappable and can be substituted with other Real Tracks that are made at different tempos Ifthe H column is blank it means that Holds Shots and Pushes are available for the listed RealTracks The letter n in this column means that they are available but not installed A dash means that no Holds Shots and Pushes are available for the style M Show RealTracks that are NJA since RestTeacks are add on purchases for Bando your version muy ot conti al RelTracks Sein die Siow Roffrack that ar NA check vil show youll available Rara M Show RealTracks variations r available such as the Acoustic Jazz Bass which has variations that only or in 2 and 4 for Realracks Variations IM Show if tempo lay in 2 only in and V subsyls Normally you will want to Show Use this to show hide RealTracke at are out of compatible tempo range This will display RealTracks installation errors when you open the dialog Press the Rebuild button for more information rebua Pisgphanisteti rtr I also po
14. Quantize Start Times By default this option is set to Yes If you don t want the beginnings ofthe notes quantized set itto No Quantize Durations This quantizes the END of the notes By default this is set to on Humanize w straight fel Humanize w swing feet Band in a Box uses intelligent humanization routines which can humanize a melody from one fee to another from one tempo to another and vary the amount of swing in S notes but not randomly The results are very musical with natural sounding MIDI melodies Resolution o specify 1 or more brs Chapter 14 Reference m Humanize Melody Opens the Quantize to New Tempo or Feel dialog The humanize effect is broken down nto 5 main categories Tempo Latenes 8th Note Spacing Legato and Feel Transpose Melody Transpose the melody track without affecting the other tracks in the song Copy Ist chorus to all song This stretches the melody track out over the entire song all choruses Kill entire melody Erascs the melody track and any data that was contained therein Kill Melody Choruses Eliminates the Melody from the First Chorus Middle Choruses or Last Chorus as selected from a list box Adjust Level of Melody Allows you to increase or decrease the volume velocity of the Melody track without affecting the other tracks TimeShift Melody tieks Allows you to move the Melody forwards or backwards in small incremen
15. sett I almost all MIDI drums will be substituted by RealDrums If set 10 S only RealDrum styles that match the style perfectly will be substituted For RealDrums substitutions choose different variations with each PLAY This feature selects variations of RealDrums instruments with ach PLAY Eer kaaran wbstutons coos diferent rvaiators wi each PAY Most RealDrums styles contain many instrument variations brushes vs sticks hi hat vs ride cymbal percussion only tc Now by selecting choose different variations with cach PLAY you can hear a different variation each tme play is pressed so the Song sounds fresh cach time One time you ll hear it with brushes the next time with Sticks and ride cymbals ete Favor Brushes Stieks Fere Faar ahes E When selecting RealDrums styles to use fora style BB will use your preferences for brushes and sticks For example if you choose Favor Brushes Band in a Box will always choose from among variations that include brushes when available Favor Artists Favor Artists remes z We have arist support This allows you to choose among different drummers playing the same style For example we have multiple artists playing the JazaBrushes style You can set Band in a Box to choose a different artist with each play or always choose specific anis If RealDrums style n found use other RealDrums style Chapter 6 Hand ina owehi
16. Coonen E Cancel The Apple DLS Music Device Synth docs not require a Mac MIDI Interface or External synthesizer andl is the simplest way to quickly make Musie with Band in a Box Fint Tre Appie DLS Music Device ean Audi Unt soft which has properties very Similar to the QuickTime Musie Synthesizer CoreMIDI is the OS X standard MIDI driver method CoreMIDI facilitates communication with extemal MIDI devices and it also enables inter applieation piping of MIDI data between MIDI applications CoreMIDI requires some setup but is not terribly complicated CoreMIDI with a MIDI Interface and External Synthesizers you have not done so already follow the manufacturer s instructions to install your MIDI interface Installation details may vary depending on he manufacturer and the model of your MIDI Interface ES Chapter 13 CoreMIDL and Apple DLS Syuth Hint Tis Rap occasional check your manulacurers web sis and downbadinsnl MIDI interface driver updates which might become avaiable Apple Audio MIDI Setup Application Audio MIDI Setup is usually found in your Applications folder It can be helpfiil to locate Audio MIDI Setup n the Finder then drag its icon fo the Dock soit will be easy to launch the program from the Dock when necessary Audio MIDI Setup can also be launched from Band in a Box IN Gs Windows Help MIDI Settings 2M eMIDI Audio MIDI Setu CoreMID
17. Plano In this mode channels Rand 9 are treated as the left and ight hand ofa piano part Harmony Menu Melody Harmony 0 lt no harmo 38H Thru Harmony 0 lt no harmony 38T H ef Favorite Melody Harmonie Favorite Thru Harmonies Start a New Harmonies File Edit a Harmonies File Edit Current Harmonies File v OK to Load Harm w songs Save Harmony with this song v Change Harmony with new chord v Allow Melody Harmony XH v Allow Thru Harmony Sus v Allow Soloist Harmony on THRU Convert Harmony to Melody Track Convert Harmony to Soloist Track Use Passing harmonies for THRU Melody Harmony Shows the current Melody harmony selection Click to open the Select Me Harmony dialog Thru Harmony Shows the current Thru harmony selection Click to open the Select Thra Harmony dialog Favorite Melody Harmonies This option brings up your favorite 50 Harmony styles based on recent usage and allows you to choose one to use on the Melody trac Favorite Thru Harmonies This option brings up your favorite 50 Harmony styles based on recent usage and allows you to choose one to use on the Thru tack allows you to make and dit Harmony styles saved under Start a New Harmonies Fi the filename of your choice Edit a Harmonies Fil allows you to cdita Harmony file that is in your bb directory Chapter 14 Reference ES Edit Current Harmonies File allows you tn o
18. Time Shift Melody This will move slide the melody a certain number of ticks There are 120 ticks per quarter note For example to give the song a more laid back fes time shift it about 10 ticks ahead Intelligent Humanize of Melody and Soloist track Most quantize routines can leave the musie sounding stiff and unmusical Some attempt 1o humanize a part by adding randomization which rarely has the desired effect since humans dont randomly change timing or volume Band in a Box uses intelligent humanization routines that can humanize a melody from one fec to another from one tempo to another and vary the amount of swing to Bth motes The results are very musical with natural sounding melodies Lets look at some of the parameters found under the Humanize menu items Chapter 9 Recording Tracks 1w In this example Melody Humanize Melody was selected This opens the Quantize ta New Tempo or Fel dialog box Quantize to New Tempo or Feel Old Tempo 120 New Tempo 120 M Melody Track ie not a solo Change Lateness from 3 ef Change 8th note spacing from 5 to 65 Increase Legato by Current Feel Sesight mis Desired Feel Sram 7 Quantize to We have broken down the Humanize effect into 5 main categories L Tempo 2o Lateness 3 Sth note spacing A Legato s Feel The best way to learn how these parameters combine is to ry them You can always press Undo bu
19. Chord Reharmonist Dialog choose your awn shows you the curent bar in the song witha list of suggested chord progressions for the current melody based on the melody and genre that you choose Auto Generate Chord Reharmonization generates an entirely new chord progression Tor a complete song or a portion of a son ut this menu option opens the Reharmonist dialog ReslDrums Settings launches the dialog for enabling RealDrums substituting them in styles and songs ReslDrams Picker opens the list for choosing ReslDrums style for the current song Chapter 14 Reference w ResTracks Settings opens the dialog for enabling Real Tracks and showing notation and saving ReilCharis ReslTracks Picker opens the Assign RealTracks to Track dialog for assigning RealTracks to any BB par Run Audio Chord Wizard standalone launches the Audio Chord Wizard program Run Audio Chord Wizard with Audio file presents an Open Wave File window for the Audio Chord Wizard Read Chords from AudioChord Wizard enters the chords into Band ugin Mode for Sequencer DAW enters the plug in mode The Band in s Box window becomes smaller and you can use it with your DAW GarageBand et To export a Band in a Box track drag the radio button for the part you want to export into the blue drop station rectangle in the upper left comer of the main sereen When the rectangle tums green drag and drop it to your DAW or the Finder Box Help Menu V
20. Defaut Range o 10 Ab Gb7F7 Chord Display High Ab Gb7 F7 Chord Display Height 1 i F Show Key ignature cured off you won t have the key signature box displayed on the Notation sereen which will save some space on the sereen Usually set it to truc Show Bar Beats Lines Show Note Durations Show Velocity Lines These options are for the Staff Roll mode and determine which lines wi Normally youl want all of them displayed how up Use Chord Scale for Enharmonics Band in a Box will automatically use the chord tones 1 3 5 and 7 in choosing its enharmonic If Use Chord Seale fr Enharmonies is checked Band in a Box will also us the enharmonios for the passing tones of the chord scale E7 Wi chord context enharmo For example on an F 7 chord in the key of Eb he Ab not is part of the F 7 scale asa G the 2d of the scale bur is also part of the Eb key of the song Ifyou want to display based on the chond seale setting Use Chord Seale for Enharmonics will display e nole as a Gi instead of P F 7 P LE setto true t Fhamnics or sing tons ae based on the chord i we Use Chord Seale or Ear Seroll Ahead by The Scroll Ahead by option can be set to none 1 bar or 2 bars This is useful if you are reading the musie from the Notation as it is scrolling Since musicians read ahe
21. in the eracks which makes chord detection ess accurate It your chords lok reasonable there is no need to bother with fine tuning Most songs are recorded prety close to concert pich But if you see numerous chord errors it may help to adjust the FincTune control I you are playing along with a song on your keyboard you might decide to make an car estimate of how ar outoftune i the song For instance you could adjust the fine tuning control on your keyboard until your keyboard matches the song s pitch according to your ear Then you could look at your keyboard s tuning readout and adjust ACW s FineTune control to match Either click drag ACW s FineTune control like a slider control or Controleeliek the FineTune control then type in a number The FineTune contral currently docs not change the pitch of playback it only improves chond detection on mis tuned songs The FincTune control is calibrated in cents 1 100th o a semitone Therefore ifa song is perfectly in the key of C but if you set FincTune to 100 Cents ACW would display chords in the key of B Similarly if you set FineTune to 100 Cents it would display that Song s chords in the key of C That simple use of the FineTune control is just a backwards way to transpose the chords But it you set FineTune somewhere in the middle ACW looks for notes that are somewhere in the eracks between the piano keys For instance if your song SHOULD Bein the key of
22. vaio P Normalize Rendered Files r enste ttis in tne Render to Audio dialog set the Normalize Rendered Files option to tue Rendering songs to audio is now much faster for songs with no MIDI soch as ReslSyles StylePicker Enhancements Favorites and Recent styles now appear in this dialog as separate lists It now has the ability to add remove styles as favorites A Favorite Style indication F shows up for sach style You can filter any list hy only showing favorite styles You can build upa list of favorite styles and only show them when needed Chapter 3 Bind ios 2010 for Mac pm SSeS SE T REEESIGEERE EEGO arro cmd rH Se on el The favorite styles are the ones that you ve identified as favorites either by pressing the Ada Favorite button in the Favorite Styles dialog or the similar button in this StylePieker dialog Note that an F appears beside the name of any style that is a favorite Gece Favorite ECT E time by clicking the Ad Favorite burton If you want to remove it click the button again Only Show favorites will anly show the favorite styles in any ist that you have opened And much more Multiple Undo Support Up to 999 levels of undo is supported configurable peii i The default number of undas is 99 1f You neod ta change this use Number of Levels of Undo in Preferences dialog Range is 51099 You can also choose Edi Redo to
23. Check this setting for solos with more syncopation ttd thirds and seventh Allow ReatTracks substitution based on tempo Def When set the program will find the best Real Tracks to use at the current tempo low Rea racks Shots Holds and Pushes Deta When set this song wil support Shots Holds and Pushes for those RealTracks that have them as shown in the H column of the RealTracks Picker Chapter 6 Bund inox Powertiuide The Chordsheet The chordshet is a spreadsheet where the numbered cells represent bars of musi The chord changes for the song are shown inthe corresponding bars Bankina Bos charset aa As well as entering the chords for your song the chordshect is where you put in style variations fils and breaks The basie procedures fr entering information in the Chordsheet follow but be sure to see the right click contextual menu for the chondsheet foc alternate methods and additional features Typing Chords The basie way of entering a song in Band in a Box is by typing the chords for the song into the chordsheet The location of the black highlight cell determines where c chords will be entered Use either the mouse or the cursor arrow keys on the computer keyboard to move the chond highlight cell around the chordsheet Click on any bar to position the highlight eetl then type in the chords for that bar The highlight cell covers two bents or half a bar in 4 4
24. ES Chap 14 Referense MIDI Menu MIDI Settings CoreMIDI Audio MIDI Setup CoreMIDI choose ports Select MIDI Driver or Apple DLS Synth Make General MIDI Patch Map Set Favorite Patches Combos Edit Drum Kit Note values Save MIDI Setup Drum Kit Load MIDI Setup Drum Kit Send Sys Ex File Style Aliases Choose Patch from Higher Bank Insert current MIDI chord Output chords to external device Thru Transpose Settings Filter for Recording Return to Factory Settings What add ons do have eM A0K e AoA MIDI Settings CE This dialog box allows you to runo opiy os ML aa cane Cancer aen adn 87 Chapter 14 Reference setup settings for each part Bass DrumsPiano ec You tan also set the Harmony cls by pressing the ny buo inside tis Select MIDI Driver or Apple DLS Synth Opens the MIDI Drivers dialog where you can choose fom the installed drivers Band In A Box has detected the following MIDI Drivers Please choose which you would prefer to use Apple DLS Synth built in Mac sounds C MacOS X CoreMIDI Comen E Conc MacOS X CoreMIDI CoreMIDI is the OS X standard MIDI driver method CoreMIDI facilitates communication with extemal MIDI devices and it also enables inter application piping of MIDI data between MIDI applications This apens the Select Ports Instruments dialog wh
25. Melody Harmony menu item Select Melody Harmony T Country Guitar 3 part Memo 2Nashvile Sexes D 3 Rhodes in 3rds 4 Nashville Piano 3 5 Piano double octaves 6 Wes Montgomery 7 Jimmy Smith organ 8 Paul Shaffer 9 Nashville 3 voices 10 Singer s Unlimited Ct Cote off 11 trumpet trombone 12 Clarinet Sax Grds Cero 13 Trumpet Sax Grds Mine un E amp Piano only 4 part voicing Mute the Piano part 16 Shearing Piano Edit Harmonies Note Off shouldbe any This button opens the Harmony Maker where you can customize Ths button is to tum off any notes that are stuck on There Chapter Cie Tour of Buda ix E CoTos f ao oand press Go To Favorite Melody Harmony Enter the number of the harmony you want 10 This option brings up your favorite 50 Harmony styles based on recent usage and allows you to choose one o use onthe Melody track EM CF Beeren It opens from the Harmon the JF bution next to th Melody Harmony dialog Favs Favorite Melody Harmony O lt no harmony gt 1 Country Guitar 3 part 2 Nashville Saxes 3 3 Rhodes in 3rds 4 Nashville Piano 3Pt 5 Piano double octaves Wes Montgomery 7 Jimmy Smith organ 8 Paul Shaffer 9 Nashville 3 voices 10 Singer s Unlimited 11 Trumpet trombone 6ths 12 Clarinet Sax rds 13 Trumpet Sax Grds
26. Tike ox Option incide Songe without Melodie Aube lend in vary Melody instrument hide Song Name random Play O Alphabetical L change Harmony wreach song Harmony range m 00 Generate Solos F Auto Chonse Sollte change soloist w each chorus Jenter 9 bars ous CGH Cancel Ser Coe Tap Ont When you have chosen the options you want click PLAY JUKE BOX to play all the songs in the selected directory folder Use the Preview feature to automatically audition a complete directory of songs by playing a part of each song and then moving on to the next ane or use the lt and gt cursor buttons to navigate manually through the list of juke box songs Chapter S Guided Tour af Banda o Automatic Songs The Melodist Feel like composing a brand new song With Band in a Box you can compose a new song in the style of your choice complete with intro chords melody arrangement and improvisations all created by the program At you have to dois pick from one of the Melodists and press OK the program then automatically generates the intro chords melody and arrangement in the chosen style I even auto gencrates a title You can go from nothing t a completed song in les than 1 second Once the song is generated the chords and melody are part of the regular Band in Box tracks so may be edited printed and saved as with any other song You ean also auto regencrate any part
27. atos ilg Then choose how you want your songs to be selected and played Make your choices of options as described below and then click on the P Buon to start he Jukebox paying Juke Box Press the lana arrows onsereen or the 881 or 8 keys 1o select the Previous Juke Song ar the Next Juke Song respectively or choose these options from the Sang Jukebox Options include Songs without Melodies f Audible lead in If Vary Melody Instrument Hide Song Name Random play O Alphabetical CI Change Harmony w each song Harmony range 0 to 100 7 Generate Solas M Auto Choose Soloists Change Soloist w each chorus Preview Switch to next song after 16 Bars enter 99 bars for 1 chorus CRUS KE OX Cancel Iude Songs without Melodies If checked the program plays songs with and without melodies that is songs within the Songs folder If not checked the Jukebox wil include only songs with the MG extension w Chapter Bands Povetuide Audible lead in While listening to the Jukebox you might not want to hear the count in lic fnot checked you won t hear the count click Vary Melody Instrument Hearing a song after a song is played with the same melody instrument would get a little monotonous If you check this option the program will randomly change the melody instrument beween your favorites Use Tap in lick to start This option is used to control when the next s
28. buttons that set the size altar Width and Guitar Height setting or the preset m Chapter e Automatic Mosi Features 150 200 _ 300 Set to Defaults ution scs the Guitar window to factory defa C Set to Defaults Ths Update button will apply any change you have made to the fretboard size Update Editing Guitarists Edit Guitarist Maker 7 cars can be customized using the Guitarist Maker which ir described in detail elsewhere and is launched by the Edit Guitarist Maker uton in the Select Guitarist dialog L_L mmmum um Ligstem iren F Te Jazz Curar f Tura Caw plays WIN 5 Feo postion erbelaher he chori Ba chords on Gutar raten eame ngaca nde Festo 3 T C Faren apan porinan PU Cre zug Onn shod S as aM Mest Chor s itching ese D x tent S5 jas e Cedere s Sen o m js o rane Chanie mj bes 11D das mo e anal Chords os Passing Hote SO aas p xo tmetes DNI Tetopeioroe T00 ms Open Swings Haze F Tmemterernm BT Jm Dind era zl ires n o eroe 80 Spend of stramme chords ao ma votes 10018 Stes 300 Dey arti sf stun Grows 300 1 C e eenas rt mem mE Erbelkh how cr w Cu EED ue Uem CT Caper e Automais Mose Feats Chapter 9 Recording Tracks Overview Band in Hox haa bin seqencer along yo to econ and dip torvo MIDI Vds One dk he Med ck be es he ir ek an ey ar enc i Tinton Mot of meis re rod but te sequencer ck an
29. ly Inserted Notes the Play Inserted Notes checkbox is checked notes that you insert will sound briefly as they are inserted This lets you hear that the note you inserted sounds correct Entering Chords Using the Natation Window This is identical to the operation of the chordsheet You use the Current Time Indicator ime bar to see where you are in the bar Then type in the chords as you do in Band in Box This is the Current Time Indicator sj Click on this lino to change the me Ab Gb F7 Bb7 To type the Ab that you see here type Ab Then to move to the GbT that is on beat 3 press the RIGHT CURSOR Key To enteran Ab chord on beat 1 and a DBT bont 2 type Ab Db7 i e 2 chords separated by a comma Na You can sc use OptioneZ or selec Chord Sang option Wom the EdT menu to enter chords This pops up a dialog box hal ets you type inte chords and aiso sls options Ike pushes rests and shots Convert Harmony Part to Notation track Previously i you added a harmony the harmony pars wouldn t be seen on the notation you would only see the lead part Now you can write the harmony part directly to the notation track so you can see it and prit out just like any other part Nous These features are al described Tor the Melody Wack but apply Rusty o The Sait or THRU part To convert a melody or Solos rack to a Harmony do the following EM CF rowers Gen yo
30. within a few cents you have good confidence that the results are actually meaningful not being randomly affected by out of tune melodies or loud drums However if the first estimate reads 43 and the next measurement reads 12 then it probably means that your song is not a good candidat for automatic Tuning Estimation Change Bar 2 Time Sig Reset Barlines Jump To gt very Poor Pow Gea Vary Goo Excelent Best use achive by resing a tar ich does nor havel Ser iy Bars Ge you get peri emanen t sce on ear dece ca ae Chapter 12 Wan as and Ulis Odd Length Bars and Drastic Tempo Changes 12 4H song contains occasional bars of 3 4 54 or whatever or if thre are sections where the music has an extreme sitar or acecrando sometimes you can just Tap Bar Lines to adjust it But itis sometimes more convenient to manually add or delete bar lines The following example song has an overal Time Signatur of 4 4 but Bar 9 should have a me Signature of 24 If you simply Tap Bar Line on 93 to shorten the bar then ACW will mistakenly decide that you wish to make all the following ar lines double 1empo 44 GC GBA Solution First Controtteliek on the beat 9 3 and Inserta bar linc Now a new bar line is added and three new GBL bar lines are flagged red C G B S AB Ch apte aa AB Bp 8 E Control cic on the new shortened Bar 9 and
31. As a result we have included a Refresh Solois menu item under the Soloist menu that when selected will allow the Soloist to think about all ofits musical notions again Choosing he Refresh Soloist option Shift F7 is like telling the soloist I s OK you can play whatever you like even if irs something that you played 5 minutes ago 3 The Soloist menu contains many options It has all of he same editing options found in the Melody menu so you can treat he Soloist track as a 2nd melody track Even if you dort plan to use the Automatic Soloist feature you can just use he Soloist rack as a 2nd track for counter melodies overdubs ete The result two 166 Chapter Automatic Mosi Fete melody tracks two soo racks or one melody and one solo track all at your disposal Tor any song without having to resort to an outboard sequencer Automatic Guitar Chord Solos The Guitarist With Band in a Box you cun generate a guiar chord solo far any melody Band Box will intelligently arrange the melody into a guitar chord solo by inserting real voicings throughout he piece You can select from among many Guitarists 10 create Yourarangement And you can define your own Guitarists choosing parameters suchi as Strum speed types of voicing Pop Jazz embellishments and many more You ean easily make and learn a profesional quality guitar chord solo to your favorite song Generate a Guitar Chord Solo Load in a s
32. Band in a Box Pro includes the Pro RealCombos a selection of twelve RealTracks in tee combos Jazz Swing 140 Pop Rock 120 amp Country Ballad 85 together with ReslDrums Set 1 Many more RealTracks are available cither as separate add ons or bundled into the various Band in a Box PAKS for better value There are over 400 ReslTracks in all with many more to come RealTracks Dialogs GP Ti stich othr buton opens he Assign RealT vacka Track dialog RealTracks Picker Cirkelick on this button opens the RealTracks Settings dialog lage 6 Hanna PomerCie a Global settings fr Real Tracks are made in the Real Tracks Settings dialog which opens with the menu command Window Real Truck Settings or with the Settings uton a the Assign RealTracks to Tracks dialog RealTracks Picker gf Enable Realtracis inc ren the Rea Tacs au racks Settings dialog you cun Enable Disable ahr aon ram Rea racks Piped Se quant Raa a dae ns er open dng anf scan Chat Inne a N or bc pu Mariana plur ete di Hanan hr pan Hol v Thee arte hen N Pedal SS Gir Repo Trung Ao Sn Tener eve Rehr snd noon A he top o tne seren 1a ek a eda i NOT a Taga editum care ra vd tas a Rer eck ume Strings een anad underlined wit shor line Ned cans fa vaek has Rech dica utr ck with promi The Reaches ceed MIDs or wih nti
33. Guided Tour of Banda o ReslDrums are enable isabled in the RealDrums Settings Settings dialog which is launched by the Settings bution in the Th RealDrums Picker opens ftom thc RealDrmns tse button or the Bes Windows RealDrums Picker menu command 1 can also be opened fom the RealDrums Settings dialog with the ton For this song only use this ReslDrum style and a lik onthe Drums Another option is to right click or Controt etiek or double click on the Drums parto open the contextual menu Then select the Choose A filter is available Type a filter text eg Filter by MA show if bossay and press Update and you wil then bosa A Show it the ls ile how only RealDrum that have the word bossa somewhere inthe Update show AT ttl memo genre ete Multiple search terms work with RealDrums Picker Ifyou separate rms witha space cach term is searched for separately So a search for Bossa Rock Ev 120 will find any Bossa Rock styles with an Even fee that would work with a tempo of close to 120 Adding a scarch trm that has a number wil filter for RealTracks that match the tempo or within a compatible range Pressing Show AU will cancel the filter and show all RealDrums again This shows the current RealDrums for this song Drums for this song BluesShuffleRard RIHat Ride None This sets the drums to no RealDrums override for the song and optiona
34. If he song is playing and the Embellisher is enabled you can update the embellishment by pressing this button This is useful if you ve changed settings and want to hear what the new embellishment sounds like Make Current Embellishment Permanent Normally the embellishment occurs live when the song is playing and doesn t affect the Melody tack permanently But if you like the embellishment and want to apply it permanently to the melody you can choose the Make Current Embellishment Permanent option Re Embellish NOW Permanent he song is not currently playing you con stil create an embellishment and have it apply permanently by pressing the Re Embellish NOW Permanent button Restore Original Melody The original Melody tack is not permanently affected unless you have press the Re Embellish NOW Permanent tion If you have done this and want to restore the original melody you can press the Restore Original Melody button Track to use Melody The Embellisher is usually referred to as the Melody Embellisher because youll usually want to have it affecting the Melody track But sf you d prefer it to affect the Soloist track you can choose the Soloist track as the Embellisher rack Embellisher Settings The settings contain a number of parameters that affect the embellishment They can be turned on and off and can be set with certain percentage strength Th
35. Next type in your chords If you want an F7 at bar 2 type F and 7 on your keyboard and press Return Notice that when you use the Return key the highlight cell moves to the second half af the bar You could hen emer another chord at beat 3 Chords are commanly typed using standard chord symbols like C or Fm7 or Bb7 or Bb1349 E but you can enter them in any of the supported chord symbol display Formats like Roman Numerals Nashville Notation and Sollegio light cell and it represents the bar around using the cursar Chapter 2 Quickstart Tutorial Enter Chords Using a MIDI Controller Keyboard you have a MIDI controller keyboard you can use ito enter chords into Band Box First you must make sure that your cables are properly connected and you have the correct input drivers selected I you play a chori on your MIDI keyboard and then press Ctrl teturn the chord will be entered into the chordsheet at the current highlight ell position Enter Chords Using the Chord Builder Builder ions Ree M isan 7 ane ess TUB ee Chord Baller Dialog To enter a chor at the current bar select the chord oot from the left pane and then the extension on the right pane Pressing Enter Chord enters the chond and advances he highlight cell to the next half bar Import Chords from a MIDI File Band in a Box can import chords from an existing MIDI file with the Chord Wizard o
36. Piano Guitar and Strings parts User Programmable Functions that allows you to create brand new styles ing patterns for cach of the Drums Bass maase Ez Styles with RealTracks and RealDrums The SiyleMaker has settings to assign RealDrums RealTracks Volume Adjustments Timing Offset adjustments Long Style Name Tempo and Resolution This allows you styles to assign specific RealDrums or Real Tracks to the style To access this dialog enter the StyleMaker press the IStyleMake boton on the toolbar and then press the PATCH button to launch the Mise Style Settings dialog z Using RealDrums in Styles You i assign a ReslDrums style to replace the MIDI drums in an existing Band n a Box style with the RealDrums Settings RealDrums Settings Audio Drums instead of MIDI drums style uses RealDrums audio drums ReslDrum style name JazzBrushesSticks C C Vary styles with each play Volume adjust of Audio Styles in dB decibels Overal 0 wsb 0 sub F Allow a Substyle RealDrums F Allow b Substyle RealDrums Enable Style uses RealDrums in order to designate a RealDrums style If your style is in the correct directory it should appear when you press the RD bution You ean then Select your RealDrums style and whenever the current style is played it will use your RealDrums style provided that
37. RealTracks selecting slash chords se technical notes using wizard Wizard Soloist menu Soloist Preferences solos w2 103 as 186 187 187 s us us 129 um m E n 212 Dr 5 132 E 133 D as 165 m as 162 162 166 162 166 166 ES 165 um Song entering chords save settings saving song endings option song memo Song menu Song settings additional choruses key signature main settings framing Intros Ioading Patches Allowing save options saving Substyles Changing Tempo Change at bar spacing standard MIDI file bar Status bar Stop button Stopping songs Stuck Note STY button Style m 7 E 61 134 m si x aL x 3 m as n us ns ur 1m 180 166 n n us us E 100 Changing Loading 9 Style Change 9 SiyleMaker assignments no Bass Making Patiems 201 Beat Mask as Chord playback 207 Chord Type 203 206 Drum Fill On Subsyle 200 Drums Alerts notes Entering Notes Late Triplets Making Patems Seren Tempo Changes Timcbase Editing existing styles Embellish Pater Half Octave Range 203 206 Importing Patiems Interval to Next Chord 203 Macro Notes Bass Macro Notes Piano Making new styles misc style settings n Overview ich Changes Pattern Weight of 9 196 Patterns Erasing 194 Lengts 193 Piano Guitar Strings 204 Playback Bar Mask Playba
38. Ser to On and it will loop that ip Since you might be holding your guitar or sax as you by to play wih Fis command waive made some easy ho keys o navigate around The NUMPAD 1 ay tums tne Looping on or of The Cursar Up Down keys pamp to the previous The Track Buttons 9 0 C5 C 69 These stand Normally you w any tick from Band in a Box The Soloist allows you to read along withthe solo oF printa hand copy Why not mute the Solos track and play the Solo Yourself Just press fhe button to change the tack You may do this while the song is Tor Bass Drums Piano Guitar Strings Melody and Solo be displaying he Melody or Solo track but you can display or print Nois The instumani vacka ae nol eal by Band ira Bax un you proe Play so you may notice mat the track s blank or shows a previous song unl the song has been played once Exploring the Notation T Current time position Th vertical line called the time bar indicates the curent time position You can click anywhere on the Curent Time line to seta new position This is useful to set a different location to type in chords ar to play from a different location The clefis displayed and the key signature of ihe song Ifyou want some extra space for the notation you can press the options button and Set Show Key Signature to No and this key signature won t be displayed Ab Settin
39. This enters the chord onto the chordsheet and ben plays the chon fr you using the patches on the Piano part and Bass part You can also listen o a chord that us already been entered by just pressing ShiftReturn after moving to thar bar with the chord If thee is no chord entered at that bar you will hear the est chord that was entered You can also preview chords from the Chord Settings dialog Press Option Zt launch the dialog and then press the Preview button to hear the current chond inthe Chord Options dialog Chord Settings we 1 Or Os O chord FEET Update Chord Subs No Push fest Type Opush oy 1716 Al instruments Opush by 1 8 C Al except Wess Lorum piano CjGwtar OStrings Pedal sass on Mer 0 bars B Cora Chord Builder This feature allows you to hear and build chords up by clicking on the root extension and aliemate root if applicable You can launch the chord builder by choosing he User Chord Builder menu option ar with the keystrokes Ctrl Shire You then soe the fllowing Chord Builder dialog w Chapter Band ios Povertiuide Os Om Geom C Cem Oone A You can now click on the root of the chord in the Root group the extension Maj7 stc and also an alternate slas not oot For example to make the chord F9 A you would click on the F root the 9 extension and the Slash Root of A As you click on hem you hear
40. Transpose A2 section 30 Anticipation in Phrases 20 F Generate 64 bar form Simple 1 and 2 Endings Default s0 This setting only applies to Melodists that are using the Jazz Swing Melody LST2 or Wate Melody WEZI ST2 databases This determines the of tme hat endings of the A seetions in AAA Tom willbe simple endings 1 0r 2 notes instead al complete phrases Usually AABA tunes end wit simple phrascs at the end of the A scenon so his option is normally left at 80 or higher Choose Unusual Chord Progressions Deui 0 Mseto a valu other than zers the Melodist will generate a typical chard progressions For example instead ofa Dm7 G7 maj he Melodist might generate Dmi D Cmaj Amr Force Long Phrases Defui 20 This determines the af time that the Melodist will try to generate long phrases 4 bars ar more The downside to seting it higher than 20 will be a Tos of uniqueness n the phrases generated The setting shouldn t be set much higher than 20 Mix Minor and Major Chord Progressions Deiu 0 Typical major key chord progressions hav progressions like in the key of C Dm7 G7 C7 whereas in the key of Am they would be Bb E7 Am6 This seting determines how much the two types of progressions shouldbe mixed in a single song Chord Substitutions Throughout the Farm Defui 0 Normally an AABA song has identical chords far ench u section Eis etg is grener than zero the Melodist wul penema chord su
41. ees SB Cue This dialog has senings thar allow you wo create a Melodist Ea J T Senger ae Memo Surg St tar coreP uei SMATRAS The Num selection box allows you to select the Melodist that you d The top area of the Melodist Maker sereen allows you to set the Title of the Melodist and supply a Memo Melodist is Ever 16tn nates Cheese ST2 Database ST2 style MELPOPLS X5T2 Gen ST2is Ever een notes The ST2 arca allows you to select the associated STZ database for the Melodist Here an some ST2 Melodist databases 0 MelodyLST2 daze Swing s notes Io MelodyPOP1 ST2 Pop Ballad 16 note Io Melody WLZI ST Waltzes notes mo MelodyROKI 72 Rock S notes Fote Salat databases aiso have exensiona of STZ but hey ara nal compaia wih Melodists Melodist databases can be easy identified as they all begin wih Meloy The Pateh change area of the Melodist Maker sereen allows you to select a Pateh astrument Harmony and Change Instrument setting cach chorus You can also Change Style for the Melodist and specify the fel for the style in the Style is box Patch change Vade o Choose Change Instrument ore F set Change Style SINATRASTY sis Legato Boost c Increase lateness by 120 ppq g Increase 8th note spacing by 120 ppa 0 Increase velocity by 127 127 o The Legato Boost changes the le
42. er Eg Ep a e oo Ge ge Cup e EG CS Cesw Omen mr Be GAC n TB naced Sw CE oe oer Cae el Dues Ses Go er LH GEO E u RC oer e Quee Come Drowa FT cm Lsemsieranr s repre J Detur g Chater 11 User Programmable Functions ES channel Sophisticated options control usage of passing harmonies diatonic dominant approach and chromatic drop octave voicing e g drop 2 octave doubling patch Selection and more An unlimited number of harmonies can be created and can be saved to disk as harmonics files Changes in harmonies can be heard ive as a song is playing The Harmony Maker screen allows you to design a harmony This harmony can be used in the future for the melody ar the thru harmony part Each harmony can use up to 3 channels Harmony Channel A B and C your harmony only has one instrument then you will use Channel A fr all the voices your harmony uses Flute and Bas then you could use Flute on Channel A and Bass on Channel B Lefs make the Harmony called Shearing Quintet This is illustrated above The Shearing Quintet was a famous Jazz quintet with a distinctive sound that consisted o Piano playing a part harmony with the melody doubled one octave below Vibes doubling the melody Elecrie Guitar doubling the melody one octave below OK well make this harmony by using Piano as Channel A Vibes as Channel B Guitar as Channel C Lets start with the Piano Let
43. that the Melodist is based on Instrument Tenor Sax T Choose Clear Harmony 120 Generic Vol 120 Octave below Y Clear Sle J EASY STY Choose C Clear Change instrument Every Pare Marker M Mclodiss can store patch and harmony settings and these are displayed in the patch area of ihe Melodist selection sereen You can also set he instrument to change cach chorus or example from vibes to guitar to piano You can over ride the settings of the current Melodist and choose your own patch harmony and change instrument settings in hese controls Telit ks Rox The Melodist Jukebox will continuously CE generate new songs and play them in Juke Songs Now Jukebox fashion You can set the range of Melodiss to include n the jukebox F change Melodists using the From To settings or keep the Jukebox on the same Melodist by From To 50 deselecting Change Melos To Launch the Melodist Jukebox press Juke Songs Nov options Write to Track Melody Normally you d want the Melodist to be writen to the Melody track If youd prefer the Melody to be written to the Solos track 4 for a counter melody then set the Write to Track setting to Soloist The favorites button allows you to pick a Melodist that you ve used recent Editing Melodists Maid Mater H you d like to create your awn Melodists or permanently change the settings of existing
44. 0 30000 PG uses 1255 melody patch to use 1 28 or ighersee list on web soloist patch to use 1 higher lis Choose a Built In style or click onthe User Song Style baton o choose from the fle dialog 28 oF Chapter Bond io Poweuie ui Style Aliases Lets say you have a new style for Jazz called Dizzy You can create an alias so that when Band in a Box looks for a Jazz Swing style it will lod in Dizzy instead so you don t have to change all your songs that were made with the old style And when you find a new favorite style jus change th alias Aliases are accessed by the MIDI Style Aliases menu item Doy oc pce eS Comes Comm Eme Z ho alas denned Z ro alas denned no aias defined Z io alias dened to alas defined B Cam To make an alias click on the Choose button under the Original Style beading 10 select the original style in the Styles folder Then clic on the Choose burton under Substitution to select the style you would like to substitute in its place The Clear button will clear the styles chosen for the style inthe List of Style Aliases You can temporarily disable the Style Aliases feature by unchecking the Allow Any Style Aliases checkbox lias that is currently selected You ean also have confirmation of substitutions by checking the Confirm Substitutions checkbox When you are using an alias you will notice
45. 14 Trumpet trombone 3rds 15 3 part Japanese GOH Cancel Play along with the Wizard Favorite Melody Harmonies menu item or by viy Harmony hax or the Favs button in the P Chaper Guided To of Banda Box Add a Solo Thats right Bandi feet ee ay ORO SS rmm mn m t ica pra in aver 200 styles pm Gm C M EROS SS mere i ERIT t 3s CA aeria Ham Ss ed Eier eire t Gime Grane AA foe E nuege eden ST Cle iem Connie Pro me te e Gon een SiR eem 3 Use the preset Soloist settings or choose your own Solo Mode and the Choruses where you want a solo The Soloist Maker Eat button gives access to the advanced Settings in the Soloist Editor where you can edit existing profiles or create new Soloists of your own etn buttons Ce Ce C2 C2 CS CQ 689 H6 Bam E View and Print Notation The notation feature in Band in a Box makes it possible to follow the music onsereen as it plays but it also docs much more We ll use the song OLDFOLKS MGU from the Songs folder to explore the Notation window Chapter S Guided Tour of Banda o Click on he Open button in the toolbar to launch the Open Song dialog From the Band in a Box Songs folder select OLDFOLKS MGU and load it Open into Hand in a ox Let s have a look at the Notation window i
46. 3 Band in a Box 2010 fr Macintosh Breeze alltracks fall frozen Un Freeze all tracks all frozen Y Bass frozen v Piano frozen v Drums frozen v Guitar frozen v Strings frozen Y Melody frozen Soloist frozen is also donc by the Freeze button Choose a frozen track to un fce reeze all tacks or choose Forcing Generation of a Song that is Frozen Band in a Box won t touch tracks that are frozen But if you want to change that without having toUn Frecze the tracks yow can do this easily Hold dovn the SHIFT key as you press the PI of har button ihe y hint will remind you fis creates a new arrangement and plays the ng QF you don t want your tracks re generated use Replay I you shift clic thie kuron it wili re generate the sorg even if t or go to the Sang menu and choose Generate even iftacks are frozen EE Generate even if tracks are frozen When you do this the song will regenerate the tracks will be rewritten and the song will stay frozen So if you re freezing songs to pet the instant playback with RealTracks but Bei tired of the same old frozen arrangement just press SHIFT PLAY generate a new Arrangement and press SAVE Then the new res lrozen arrangement will play instantly even with many Real Tracks Tip Obviously you wouldnt use te feature fo force regeneration ol a Fazan song you have mada custom eds to the song thal y
47. A typical setting for a slow triplet style is triplets late 5 the units are 120 bean Now let s make the ending drum pattern Endings are bars long In the case ofthe drums this is done by 2 consecutive 1 bar Patterns on the ending ow Move to the Endings raw Input a 1 bar pattem in the first column and then another bar pattern in the 2nd These 2 patterns are the ending parcens so you should make the 2nd pattern an ending drum pattem typically with a crush cymbal on beat 3 for example Auto Endings you ve made a style and haven t included an ending a 2 automatically based on the style Making Bass Patterns Bass pattems are recorded live om a MIDI keyboard Ifyou can t play in real time orit you don t have a MIDI keyboard youl have to import these instruments fom other styles as we will be doing with the strings The Bass Sereen bar ending can be generated ares s H If you re making a simple bass pattem youl only need o recor paternis on the A 8 beat row the top row These patterns will be chosen for every chord regardless of the egi But if you want the style to play different pattems when the song is encountering chords that last 1 2 3 or 4 notes you should record separate pattems on these rows Recording a Bass Move t the top row of be bass area in column 1 Press the REC button This will begin the recording of the bass pattem You will hear a 2 bar lead in and then y
48. And you can auto regenerate any part of the Song to modify the composition to your taste The Melodist will also generate a melody over an exiting chond progression A Melodist Jukebox mode creates and performs mew compositions in succession Launching the Melodist Eietodist 9128 the Melodia pss he Melts btn o he mn J sereen or w the SRF hot Ky Generate Chords and or Melody Dialog Onee you launch the Melodist you will sce the Generate Chords and or Melody dialog Lets explore the dialog sereen TT B Generate Chords BH Autn Tites Hoon Gam I Risenssrens Cre cue Mieesemeny ona Owes e tes Cate d EI p Ort tora anew se Cange ae Cu w a Te dew Oa oe 1 ktm pe Grace Teneo OS Mater von trice Tn Form 1 Signs um ee a SEES D O quee Camm jon weeeme CEE 3 sw oss Gam Com Sz Chapter Auomitie Musi Fere Iss The left af the sereen has the list ofthe Mess sop IBths Pad Bell 2 Pop 16ths KennyG Sopr Sax 3 Pop Lbths LMays w soloist 4 Pop LBths Calliope Lead 5 Pop 16ths Atmosphere 6 Pop 16ths Pad Bell 7 Pop ths Voice 8vb Pop LBths Phil C 9 POP 16 Always transpose A2 10 Pop 16ths Vibes 11 Swing Vibes 12 Swing Jazz Trumpet 13 Swing Wes Groove 14 Swing Tenor octave below 15 Swing Garner 16 Swing amp ths Sinatra 17 Swing Jazz Quintet Create C amp M in a st
49. C but it was unfortunately recorded 50 cents sharp There could be many reasons that a song was recorded off concert pitch Maybe the Chapter 12 Wizards Tutors and liie recording studio had a broken tape recorder Perhaps the piano tuner was smoking crack orthe singer couldnt quite hit the highest note Maybe the vinyl record cuter was off Speed or some recond executive decided that the song was 10 seconds too long for pla and instructed the mastering engineer to speed it up a litle bit Ta such cases the Audio Chord Wizard can get confused mis identifying some pitches to high and other Pitches too low detecting nonsense chords So if your favorite song was unfortunately recorded 50 cents sharp you can set the FineTune control o 50 cents so that ACW will properly display in the orignal key Auto Estimate Tuning ACW can automatically estimate the Set Bar One Taming which helps i some cases Since Insert Barline te estimation ia matinee ACW Delete jar only analyzes one bar of musi at a time Control click somewhere inside a bar and ick the Estimate Tuning function After the process is finished up pops the results dialog As advised in the dialog results can be improved by carefully picking the bar Bars with relatively long notes are easier to analyze compared to bars containing fashy fast melodies Trcan be useful to spot check a few bars If several spot checks give similar answers
50. Cancel Press OK to make your selection and retum to the song x to default setings whi will show all available styles Press Cancel to retum to the song without making a selection Chapter Bands Povetuide RealDrums style change at any bar F5 The Edit bar settings dialog opens wth the menu command i Bar Settings with the FS function key or the keystrokes AItHB Tip iss FS key or FE kay doas nol petarm The axpecied Tondion n Bandirma Box you wil need to go to the Apple System Preferences and uncheck the system setting in the Keyboard Shortcuts ist In this dialog you can change the style of RealDrums at the current bar location of the highlight cell The change can affect all choruses or just a selected chorus R Drums 15 R Drums buron opens be Rstrams Piekar o seista Clear RealDrums change oema meunangan ns change Song Settings Song settings include the title key si Bax se for its arrangement Main Settings The Main Settings dialog shows all the settings for the song Go to Song Ties Tempo En e or use the Keystrokes Command to open the dialog Tite Key Tempo The Title field will show the current title fom the Title window Fora new song it will be Untitled Type in the title for your song he Settings for Key and Tempo can be typed directly into the dialog you aren t sure ofthe exact number value for the tempo of your song you can click the me
51. Chord Type Usual Setting Any Chord This setting is very useful This allows you to ecard patterns that will only work on certain types of chords Far example you can recond a specific riff that will nly work ona minor Tih chond You then play the patem on a Cmin 7 not a C7 There are chont types for most types of chords Any Interval This setting allows you to restrict the pattern to be played only if the next chord isa certain interval away For example you can recond a bass pattern that is walking up a fourth and then assign an Interval of Up 4th so that the pattem would only be played if you re going up ath Half Octave Range Usual Setting Full Octave This is a new setting in the StyleMaker Usually a pattem will be picked on any ofthe 12 roots You can select a smaller range either A to D or Eb to Ab In his case the pattem would only be picked if the chord in the song is in that range lay Pushed how often Usual Setting 0 ticks to push pattern Usual Setting 0 Pushed pattems are patterns that are played fore the chord begins Jazz styles typically use pushed patems for the piano Patterns are recorded in the normal way non pushed and then you assign the of time and amount in ticks 20 ticks 1 beat to push the pantern The patem only plays pushed in the song not in the StyleMaker Ok To Use Macro Notes Bass Usual Setting No Bass Macros are special notes that you record Wh
52. CoreMIDI will know what devices are on the other side af Your MIDI interfacets Band in a Box MIDI Port Selection for External Devices E GS Windows Help MIDI Settings 2M CoreMIDI Audio MIDI Setup CoreMIDI choose ports Select MIDI Driver or Apple DLS Synth XCD Select Fors instruments E Bass set all poris to this Piano Drums Gutar Soon sues Fn Melody m Gee sit a Comon E e This example shows Band in a Box configured to reccive record fom a MIDI keyboard on MIDI Interface Port amp Band in a Box transmits tracks on an asortment of Synthesizers connected to various MIDI Interface ponts This scheme would be useful on 4 large MIDI setup if your best Drum sounds are on a Port 5 synthesizer best Piano is on a Port 2 synthesizer etc Your setup does not have to be so complex f you want all tracks o be played ona single synthesizer the most common situation set the desired destination in the Bass popup menu and then click the set ll ports to this button to quickly set the destination for all tracks You can get excellent results with all instruments assigned toa G MIDI compatible device such as an Apple DLS synth module ES Chapter 13 CoreMIDI and Apple DLS Syuth Apple DLS Synth and a Controller Keyboard I you have a small MIDI controller keyboard but you do not have any extemal MIDI Synthesizers Band in a Box can easily support this
53. Melodists press edi button o launch the Melodist Maker which is described in detail elsewhere Using the Melodist Generating Complete Songs Fav Here are some ways that you can use the Melodist by generating complete song The most obvious use ofthe Melodist is that you can generate an entire song complete with ino chords melodies full 5 part instrument arrangement pedal bass figures solo improvisations and even an automatic title You can customize the song to your liking regenerate any of the elements chords melody ct or any part of the song until you ge it right Either way the end product is a complete song What a great compositional and educational tool Sight Reading You can put the Band in a Box Melodist in Jukebox mode so that itis continually generating and playing new songs in succession By displaying the Melody tack in Notation you can then sigh read along with the Melody Since the melodies are unique tis s the ideal type of sight reading practice playing along to musie that you haven t heard before Bar Training Play along with the Melodies and chords that the program is generating without looking at the music Since Band in a Box is always using intelligent chord progressions and melody phrasing that a professional would actually use you ae learning to recognize chord progressions and melody phrases that you will encounter in real playing situations Guitarists
54. RealDrums are enabled Most RealDrums styles include several variations Select Vary styles with each play to hear a different variation each time the song is played There are also additional volume controls here If you have your dE setting exactly where you want it in your style file but with this particular Band in a Box style you want ita bit higher or lower you can enter a setting here There are also fields for adjusting the a or b subsection volumes only Yow can also remove the check mark from either Allow a substyle RealDrums or Allow b substyle RealDrums which means that for this style the one withthe checkmark remaining will be used forthe entre song regardless of what substyle ix curently called for in the song There are many Band in a Box styles with RealDrums The style names begin with a ZDAIL sw 8 160 Jazz Swing style They are listed in a separate category in the StylePicker Come Stes with ReotDruns Using Rea racks in Styles ReslTracks can be assigned to any Band in a Box instrument part in a style by using the Assign Soloist MIDI or Real Tracks audio to style feature To assign RealTracks to a style select the Instrument part that you want to replace with a RealTrack Assign Soloist MIDI or Rea Tracks audio to style Chater 11 User Programmable Functions ue Then select the RealTracks i
55. Rendering now bas Normalize option 1o normalize individual tracks or the complete arrangement Normalizing boosts the volume to a maximum level without distortion Most professional musie tracks are normalized Songs that are Saved As a different name now have the new name added to the Recently Played Song dialog Support enhanced for non concert instruments BW Eb sax trumpet et Now when the chondsheet is transposed you can type in chords in the transposed key and hey will show up as you have entered them instead of requiring you fo enter the chords in the concert key More Soloists are now available up to 2000 Many messages changed to yellow alerts at top right of seren so you don t have to respond othe message interrupting work flow Looped playback of any selected region On the Chordsheet window not the Notation window select a region of bars and press the Loop playback button on the toolbar The selected region will loop You can change the looped section during playback Pressing Loop bution again will turn off looping Mouse scroll wheel support added to the main window notation window and many dialogs Ability ta have endings use a held chord lie C RealTracks and MIDI For songs with no ending the last chord of the song can be a held chord like C ReafTracks and MIDI New RealTracks PAKs There are 101 new ReafTracks sets as and Country These new RealTracks add to a large existing
56. Sax solo with tempo of 140 and play it as a double time which will match the ballad tempo of 70 So now all of your existing RealTracks can Be used at 3 different tempos normal half time double time Tempo swapping of similar RealTracks You can use this feature either automatically or manually I you set Auto RealTracks substitution based on tempo to rue in he eslTracks Settings dialog or Additional Song Settings dialog Band in a Box will automatically choose the best one to use For example if you have a ballad loaded with an Acoustic Bass RealTracks at a tempo of 60 and you speed up the tempo o 140 and press Play button Band in a Box will automatically choose an Acoustic Base RestTracksclosr to the tempo of 140 if it is the same genre and feel This means you can use a simple Jazz style and play it at various tempos without having to set the best RealTrueks based on tempos If you don t want this feature to work automatically then Set Auto ReafTracks substitution based on tempo to false The RealTracks that support the Tempo Swapping are listed in the next to last column of the Assign Real Tracks to Track dialog Rearracks Picker dialog enhanced de Opens up faster New columns are added tempo swappable holds type u Chapter 3 Bend ios 2010 for Macintosh RealDrums Picker dialog has been enhanced with information about Artist name Artist bio and ReslDrums Set number
57. Select Guitarist Harmony changing setting channels Harmony area Harmony Enhancements convert harmony to notion Harmony men Help mena Hold button How to register humanize Humanize melody and solo TAC por import chonds 55 108 part fe redo section import MIDI chords instrament pane m 137 E E us EH m 179 265 E m 244 E intelligent guitar parts intelligent guitar style interpret chords aun interpret E custom stings 239 Intros s Jazz down chords 105 Jazz up chords 105 jukebox E Jukebox m JukeBox wo Hide Titles m Options 140 key 11 56 Kill no im Kill Melodist im Kill Soloist im License 2 loading songs styles 106 loading songs focal of Local On instrument settings a overview 26 piano keyboard n status har n synthesizer window n Melodies Recording ua Melodist s 6 bar orm 157 AP Transpose iss Allow Style Changes 157 Unusual Placed Phrasing 221 Auio Tempo 157 Melody Au Tiles 157 Siep Edit 176 Defaus 157 Melody Embellisher 30 181 Favorites 160 advanced senings s Form 157 ticipation D Generate Les than a Complete Song auto embellish 183 160 buton asi jenerating Complete Suns 160 buc im Tos 19 dio 182 inser Bass Pedals 157 doubled noe ies JukeBox 161 extra notes is atum ph grace notes 188 Kill Melody m pisci ps Kill Soloist m pes us Memo 19 octave 188 Minor Key i is ja pn Number of Chor
58. Soloist A jazz Swing Vibes TH since Mcldists can also generate Solos a specific Soloist can be set in this setting Isc to 0 no Solas the program teligently pick a Soloist Cony Paste Melon can be copied and pasted to quickly make new Melodist that are variations of each other You can export save and import load individual melodists from MI files This would be useful if you wanted to send a Melodist to a friend for example The emire Melodist file with 256 Melodists may be saved to a Melody file The usual file is DEFAULT Melody The DEFAULT Melody file is auto sayed every time the OK button is pressed so you don t ned to explicitiy save by the Save As button un want to save alternate Melody files and go beyand 256 Melodists The Guitarist Maker The Edit button in the Guitarist Selection window launches the Guitarist Editor where you ll see the option for making or editing Guitarists Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions EET Mem Eeen eon T Te Bez can ogie porcen Jazz Cutar plays wii the postion Cota Patch igid E Force open position i hos ood dors s wel nO resi Chords om eat TT tks same p j HisigNae 55 tks lany 8a id me eget Coseoice D inet previous note To ms Open Stags Res Tinetothenexinote ED Tms okto se herds wh tes Speed of summed chords Eb ms Srores IOTH Shams T00 M Crua Carus peu Gua re
59. Soloist track s the destination Guitar Patch Jazz Electric Guitar gt Confirm the Guitar Pateh Selection The Guitarist that you pick see item 1 will already have chosen the guitar patch to use but you can override it with this setting M Auto Set Set Ranse Generate Bar 5 9 Whole Chorus T O art Bars 2 Select the Range of the song to use You can chc generate a chord solo for the Whole sang or just a region of the song In ether case remember that you need to have an existing melody to work with You can use the Melodist to generate a melody if you don t have one Preferred Fret Position Sth M M Auto set SetRange 00000 Select the Main Guitar Position t use Band in a Box has a setting called Auto Set that will set the main guitar position for the soo for you based on the key signature For example in the key of C Band in a Box will choose the 5 position As the best position for the chon solo to be played You can override this For example if you wanted the solo to be in the 12 position you could de select the Auto Scr and then set the guitar position to 2 position 168 Chapter e Automatic Mosi Features IM OK to change existing guitar chan 6 Change Guitar channel tn case you already have a guitar track that has guitar channels for example if it was already played on a guitar controller as a single String guitar p
60. Sonti The sors vil ten te tne ee cringe io ba cdi Set the Tempo Leth tango o 60 bats per minute The tempo is ispaye in t 160 icona site window vith det seting of 12 bens pr mina Click with the mouse to adjust the tempo in increments of 5 beats per minute Clicking on the top of the numbers increases the tempo setting clicking on the bottom decreases it The tempo can also be typed into the Main Settings dialog which opens from the menu Sang Tile Key Tenpo Enel or with the keystrokes Command FK You can click 4 times on the metronome in this dialog to set your tempo Tap the Tempo Not sure af the tempo for your song Tap it in real time on ether the key or the key on your computer keyboard Four taps on the minus key sets the tempo four taps on the equal key sets the tempo and starts the song playing Finishing the Song Arrangement Use the powerful musical intelligence of features like the Harmonies and the Soloist to add the final touches to your song The Edit Bar Settings dialog AIt B or FS Iets you fine tune your arrangement by changing styles RealDrums styles patches harmonies tempo absolute or relative and meter anywhere in the song Changes can be applied to all choruses or just o a selected chorus cin Tmgs Cane 9 wind oui onte anae pene Do mna D 4 a EL z R3 a di 3 E33 s E33 a su tanen RST WTS pemn T Tees Dianei Tuta T
61. The Archive button will erase the AIFF files in the Drums folder when there isa smaller MSA available i Update Archive For a single chosen folder this reverses the Install funcion and erase the AIFF file when there is already an MAA file Press OK to make your selection and exit the RealDrums o Press Cancel to exit the ReslDrums Settings dialog without Cancel making any changes RealDrums Picker Use the RealDrums Picker to choose RealDrums for the current song only The ReDrams Pike opens om cler e fr waar buton Qi Duca curans Picker man comin sens 1r can also be opened from the RealDrums Settings dialog with the selection Fortis song only use this RexlDrum style and a click on the RD TRDI ton A fiter is available Type a filter tex e pns fShow if bossay and press Update and you wil then bossa F Show if the list filtered show only RealDrums 5 om that have the word bossa somewhere inthe Update _ show ATL tle memo gore ce Multiple search terms work with RealDrums Picker Ifyou separate tems with a space cach term is searched for separately So a search for Bossa Rock Ev 120 will ind any Bossa Rock styles with an Even feel that would work with a tempo of close to 120 Adding a search trm that has a number will filter for RealTracks that match the tempo or within a compatible runge Pressing Show AN will cance the ier and
62. Tracks endings are now 4 bars long giving time far the natural decay of the instruments Individual tracks MIDI or Real can be frozen now so the arrangements can be saved and fixed and will replay quickly without need for regeneration Soloist RealTracks are now saved with the song We added Multiple Undo support up to 999 levels of Undo There are new Reverh and BassfTreble controls foreach track allowing you to add these to individual RealTradks All settings are now saved with each song And many mere The New Features in Band in a Box 2010 for Macintosh are DAW Plug in Mode These now is a Plug in mode for your favorite sequencer GarageBand ProTools Logic Nuendo Reaper and more With the new plug in mode Band in a Box is open as a small window and acts as a plug in for your favorite DAW sequencer so you can Drag n Drop MIDI and audio AIFF MA tracks from Band in a Box to your favorite sequencer Work in your favorite sequence type a chord progression in Band Box drag the rack button to the drop station blue rectangle at top left ofthe cen and then drag that to your sequencers track at the desired track and the bar Jocanion The DAW Plug in mode is a mode within the regular Band in a Box program This mode allows you to transfer racks or parts of tracks to other DAW sequencers or Finder You can enter and exit the DAW plug in mode cas Start DAW Plug in mode Op
63. Use Index Finger Position If set the scale will use the index finger to play notes that are one fret outside ofthe normal position instead of the litle finger IV Show out of range notes Show out oFrange notes If sci any note will be displayed on the guitar regardless if it is the range ofthe Show muted note of guitar style comping Show muted note of guitar style comping For the hree note Jazz volcings there is a high not that is applicable to the chord but is either not played or muted You can choose to display this note on the guitar fretboard F Show Notes at Aeolian Position M Show Notes at Phrygian Position The note names wll get displayed im up to two positions depending on the settings for low Notes at Acolian Position and Show Guitar at Phrygian Position Dcfail us Note Names Scale Tones You can choose which notes will he displayed on the fretboard either None Root Only Chord T nes or Sale Tones Auto Set Position Phrygian Positiori Positions can be auto set to None Acolian or Phrygian M Aute The Auto Switeh Posi lows the program to automatically switch the display ofthe guitar when a new track is loaded i This auto chooses the best position to display the track Guitar Width def 550 11190 Guitar Height def 80 173 Th Guitar can be sized using the
64. With the new plug in mode Band in a Box is open asa small window and acs as a plug in for your favorite DAW sequencer so you can drag and drop MIDI and audio AIFF M4A tracks from Band in a Box to your favorite sequencer The DAW Plug in mode is a mode within the regular Band in a Box program This mode allows you to transfer tracks or pars of tracks to other DAW sequencers or Finder You can enter and exit the DAW plug in mode eal Press the DAW Mode button on the Toolbar then choose the menu item Start DAW Plug in mode or go to S kin Windows menu and choose Plug in Mode Options for DAW Pua in_ ine III stare DAW Plug in mode When you do this 1 Window size af Band in a Box changes to a small size you can resize it to the size positon that you want and it will remember that O comso Duas Oana Boum Ocuur Osning O eiody O Soio ou can now easly drag tracks from Band ira Bon To your DAW n Depa Tm drag the track button to the drop station blue rectangle and then when it tums areen drag that to your DAWS tack You can also drag files to other programs besides DAW s if they accept a drop of audio fles AIFF M4A or MIDI files Far example Finder allows this For this documentation we will use Finder as an example Dragging Tracks from Band in a Box to Finder or a DAW 1 2 Open or make a song in Band in a Box m Chapter Band io
65. Wizard From soloing with proper phrasing and fel and the best notes to accompanying a soloist with confidence and authority Use the Soloist track to record another part in addition o the Melody and other parts provided by Band in a Box Generate a Soloist on chords keys that you would like to practice For example if you want to work on your I V7 1 progressions you can just type the chords you want and generate a solo to play over those changes As the solo plays you sce the notation you can sight ead along Pressing te Loop Screen checkbox on the rotation will loop the notation the sereen so you can master each 4 bar phrase UI V T and then move ahead to the next one A Few Technical Notes on the Soloist solo acconding to your accompaniment and arrangement The Soloist has its owm separate channel and settings But when the Soloist uses a Harmony it becomes linked to the Thru Harmony channels and settings Since we are already using 12 of the available 16 MIDI channels in Band in a Box we didn t want to use up another 2 channels on dedicated Soloist Harmony channels So if Sou want to hear a Soloist with harmony use the THRU Harmony settings In other words wherever a THRU harmony is selected the Soloist part will use the THRU Harmony seti We have designed the Soloist not to repeat any solo ideas so that the solas are always fresh with new ideas forming and playing all the time
66. You can over ride this automatie setting if The name of the Style that is saved with the song is automatically entered Click on the T button to insert the current Band in a Box tempo or type a tempo into the Tempo field yourself The other fields are for Composer Copyright information You can get the C symbol by pressing the 0 button Left Margin Right Margin The left and right page margins are set in inches For example you could set the margin to 1 25 inches Music Font Size You can choose any size font you want for ead sheet printout To change the font size Tor printout insert the fon point size you would like in the Music Font Size bos The argerihe number the bigger the font The default is 24 Setup This launches the setup dialog box for your printer z Chapter 7 Nation ind Printing Chapter 8 Automatic Music Features Automatic Songs The Melodist Feel like composing a brand new song With Band in a Box you can compose a new song in the style of your choice complete with intro chords melody arrangement and improvisations all created by the program Just pick a Melodist and press OK the program then automatically generates the intra chords melody and arrangement in he chosen style It even auto generates a title for you to complete your song Once the song is generated the chords and melody may be edited modified printed and saved as a MIDI file as with any other song
67. a to c QAZOURA set in the song 4 DAOUAA Iset in the song i DAZZFAST set inthe sono f QAIPAST set in the sonal Making a Multistyle You can make your own MultiStyles from existing styles in the Stl with the menu command User Make 4 New Style SnleLE MAKER From within the StyleMaker press the PATCH button The Mise Style Settings dialog ox opens Look for the Multistyles box Enter the name ofa style zzjazz or multiple styles separated by semicolons zzjazzzzbossa and these wil appear as MultiStyles substyles eld ete A Baazzz2bossa 9 Maker which opens You can click on the Style bution to choose the styles for your MuliSile from the StylePicker window Chordsheet Editing Features The chordshect has a contextual menu that opens with Contro lick or a right click in the chondsheet area Cony Tema This menu is a very convenient way to access Sony ror up c IC the features for editing song arrangements Paste lend d Chords can be copied pasted cut or erased cut lend x and new chords can be entered from the Erase Chord peonter gt Chord Builder The Chord Setting pedal bass to be ap The Bar Settings let you refine your allow pushes rests and Chord Builder etri sh bl Play Current Chord Sh Enter Chord Settings optFS arrangement with changes in tempo meter Bar Settings for Bar 17 F51 key signature styles RealDru
68. arrangement They are saved with the song Key Changes Transposition The key signature of the song is displayed in the Title window Old Folks at Home IGARNER STY Ab t 185 1 32 3 To change the key click on the Key signature This displays a popup menu where you choose the new key that you would like Band ima Bor then asks if it is OK to transpose Lead sheet I you answer Yes the entire song will be transposed to a new key Answer No and the key signature will change but the song will not be transposed Select Cancel to exit without changing the key signatur look a 1 FE Setting Tempo The tempo ofthe song is displayed on the main sereen in the Title window Tempo can be set on the computer keyboard with 4 taps of either the minus key or the equals 2 Chapter Banna ts Povetuide ley When the tempo is tapped on the key song playback will start automatically at the tapped tempo Old Folks at Home IGARNER STY Ab t 185 1 32 3 To change the tempo ofa song while the song is playing you may use the and keys to change the tempo by 5 at a time Or you can move the mouse pointer over the tempo setting and click the mouse as follows The tempo display is broken up into 4 quadrants Mouse i 5 clicking in these four areas will change the tempo by 1 tr 4 5 or 5 before or during play You can change the tempo at any bar in the
69. at you have Set ihe Show BariBeat Lines Stow Note Duralons and Snow Velocity Line ia Yes This mode work like the Editable Notation you mouse click to insert a note and can rag notes horizontally or vertically and edit notes by pressing the Mouse while holding he option key Option key mouse drag of velocity or dura There is an additional function available in this mode Option Mouse Drag Hold down the option key then place the mouse cursor on the note head and drag it horizontally to the right to set the noe sdaration Use th mouse vertically fom the note head Notation Options Dialog Box me procedure to set velocity but drag he I 1 Resolution disixteens Y Tick Offset Transpo Transpose smones To Wliinize Rests Clefs Split at ca Engraver Spacing chord ver Pa E 7 sod Net Daas A snap to Grd Lines Duration 0 M Show Key Signature M show Bar Beat Lines If Show Note Durations Show Velocity Lines Velocity 90 Chanel T DUse Chord Seale for Enharmonics MI Pay Inserted Notes Scroll ahaa by ED r Resolution Serting Band in a Box automatically sets the resolution whenever a Style is loaded Ifa style has a triplet fec such as Jazz Swing ora Shuffle style then Band in a Box will set the resolution o 3 swing This will ensure that Jazz eighth notes swing triplets are handled correctly Whena straight style like Bossa Nova is loaded in Band in a Box will
70. be ed fran e of MDE eod rcu cu ats or pr te Dean reed o Hania Box ta nune ar Froma MIDI keyboard or MIDI controller connected to your computer Inthe Notation window using your mouse With the Wizard feature using your QWERTY keyboard Real Time Recording you want to record using your MIDI controller keyboard guitar wind dick on the Rec button ar type the letter R or choose Record Melod from the Melody menu ar ito Edit Soloist Track Record Salo in the Soloist menu The Record Track dialog box will appear Record Track Record From start of Song Ofrompar 1 Chous 1 C Tag O End C3 Overdub Underlying Notes Co Choose where you want to siart recording your track feom the sturt ofthe song ata specified bar atthe ta from the end ofthe track m Chapter 9 Recording Tracks you select Overdub Underlying Notes you will hear he melody that you re overdabbing Click onthe Filter button to open the Record Filter dialog This lets you choose which MIDI information you want to record and which you want to leave out This lets You eliminate unnecessary MIDI information Record Filter Record MIDI on THRU pari of pes M Notes C Folyphonic Pressure sustain Pedal Controller 64 L Bank Changes Controllers 0 and 32 Ll Other Controllers C Program Changes C Channel Aftertouch Rf Pitch Bend GB GD Gaus Click OK to retu
71. built in Mac sounds MacOS X CoreMIDI Comen E Cancel Selecting Apple DLS Synth plays your MIDI tracks through the high quality built Apple DLS Music Device ar software synthesizer No special configuration should be necesmary Chapter 6 Hand ina owehide us MacOS X CoreMID its you configure a custom setup wi other software synths or extemal MIDI devices The CoreMIDI and Apple DLS setup Click on MIDI Drivers Heg io go to the MIDI Drivers Help CoreMIDI and Apple DES Syath heip aea MIDI Settings The MIDI Settings dialog box Iets you make settings far each part bassdrums piano ctc and also to set the Harmony channels mih chapter gives detailed instructions for your MIDI PAL crave PATE WADE MESE CEU Fa Bass Piano Drums Guitar Soloist Strings Melody Thru Ce M io Desay Mo eyo Harmony f Color Notes F Overall Volume Changes F Allow Patch Changes Mistyle Volume Changes Fl style CS Patch Changes C Batra Nate offs Concert Pitch adjust B C View GS Map Boost THRU velocity by 0 OR Cancel CHANNELS Range 010 16 scito 0 par willbe OM Some synths e g MT32 give higher priority to lower channel s so Ifyou ae running out of notes you should assign important paris e g Melody a lower channel than other parts c Guitar OCTAVE This
72. bution You will then se a dilog box allowing you to type in patches you would like for thestyle If you don t need a specifie patch use 0 for no change of patch number Let s ada Strings to the Style There are 2 ways to do this Lo You could move to the strings part by clicking on the strings button and then record the strings patems The easiest way is to import strings from another style that already has strings This allows you to use existing string patterns For example the Miami Pop style hasa nice sings par Letsimport the Miami Pop strings into our style Choose the LOAD button Select the ZZMIAME Style style from the file dialog Select the Strings button to display the String patterns f r this style Select an bent String pattem to copy and press the COPY button Choose the LOAD button Select the ZZLITROK Style style Press the OPEN button to open this style Choose an empty beat b String patern because that is where the String pattem was recorded in and press the PASTE bution Press the SAVE button to save the Lite Rock style with Strings y in the b substyle only because thats how they were made in the The strings will Miami Pop sie You could now import the Guitar from the ZZCONTRY Style for example using the steps above It is quite easy to quickly add instruments to styles by importing instruments from other styles Let s Record some new bass pat
73. can extend the Sight Reading concept by just watching the on screen guitar fretboard play the melody notes If a student were watching his teacher reading music he would watch the guitar not the sheet music This is because guitar isa very visual instrument Similarly you may prefer to watch the on screen guitar instead o the notation Generate Less than a Complete Song Here are ways that you can use the Melodist short of generating a full song Auto generate regenerate remove an intro for an existing song You can leam from the intel gent chord progressions that are generated to lead in to the first chord of the song Auto generate pedal bass patterns over existing songs to add tension release effet to your Band in a Bon arrangements Generate chords only and then compose your own melody by playing or singing along with the chord progression This can elp composers to write new songs by starting them off with a chord progression that they might not ordinarily use And if You re stuck at a certain bar see what BB will generate regenerate as a melody for that section Generate chords only and practice playing your musical instrument along with the chond progressions Print out the generated lead sheet of chords so that you can w Chapter e Automatic Mosi Feutures sce the chords easily on the musie stand Working with new chord progressions is useful to get out of a ru in your practicing by play
74. can print the First Chorus Last Chorus ar the Whole Song When you change this setting Band in a Box will reset to auto fit the printout to one page if possible Normally yowli want to print the first chorus of the song Youtl want o print the last chorus in a song that has a tag ending or a song that you want to see the 2 bar ending printed The whole song could be printed if you ve played differently for each chorus Use the Edir Unfold Convert to 1 big chorus option to make cach chorus different Include Lead In Bar If your song has a lead in pickup to bar L then make sure you ve checked the lead in Actually Band in a Box has set this for you by determining Chapter 7 Neato and Printing is if there arc any notes in the lead necessary Staves per page This determines how many staves will be shown per page The title takes up 1 stave on page 1 so that if you set the staves fo 10 you will get 9 staves the tle on page 1 and 10 staves on page 2 3 ete Tile Style Composer Tempo Copyright The title is written in a big font that i underlined and centered LIKE THIS There are a and A buttons at the right side of the Title field These change the case of thetitle AJ UPPER CASE a Lower Case Ide title is long or you re using big margins then the font size will be reduced and the font wort be underlined for the title Titles are limited to 60 characters measure
75. change the resolution to sixteenth notes This will provide even eight notes You shouldn t have to change this setting very ofen as Band in a Box sets it for you The Resolution setting determines how the program rounds the note times and durations when translating a rack into standard notation For example a resolution of4 ill cause the program to round each note and duration o the nearest 16th note when displaying the musie in 4d time A resolution of 3 will cause Band n a Box to round cach note to the nearest Rh note triplet in 4 4 time A resolution of 2 will cause BB to ound each note to the nearest Sth not in 44 time Tip youre deplayng Jazz Swng ar Shute music tat has a Wil Teal o ha ight notes make sure la set the resoiutan 1o swing This wii depiay ne Bth Poles and ather aspects of Jazz Swing music corecti Tiek Offset The Tick Offic on the notation options is one of the keys to great looking notation It accounts for playing that is before or behind the beat The rack is automatically scanned to determine the tick offset so that you don t have to set this yourself This results in beter looking notation abis setting but normally Band y Box will determine the best tick offset automatically Tip The nclain of Jazz Swing music wil cn ba proved by a Tek Oel sang about minus 5 This s because Jazz music is ypcasy played a lta afr the beat r in Jazz forme i
76. chord will get voiced 90 ofthe time Ifa note occurs not the first note of a chord that is on Beat 1 of a br and the note is not followed hy another note for at least 50 tieks 120 ticks 1 quarter note ben a chond will get voiced 90 of the time Similar interpretations for notes occurring on Beat 2 3 and 4 You can see that the threshold is higher for notes on beat 2 and 4 which is how a guitar player makes chond solos are defined as short duration notes that aren t on the beat and are Passing notes wil followed by a note that is on the beat In the example above passing not never be voiced as chords since the tick threshold is set to zero There is a further threshold applied o whether ar not a note is voiced ta chord These are durations in milliseconds Tie threshold To gera chord ns Time to previous note 100 ms Time to the next note 80 ms In the seting as illustrated if the note occurs less than 100ms afier the previous note the note will not be voiced as chord IF the note 1s followed by another note within S0ms then the note will not be voiced as a chond Strumming Settings the Gitar Chord were all played at the same time it would sound asi it was plucked Guitar playing is more typically a strum Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions ssi Speed of strummed chords g ms Delay start time of strum 0 1 Strum Speed Ifyou set
77. file or as an audio wave file AIl tracks can be edited and saved To edit a MIDI track bass drums piano guitar strings or the MIDI part ofa RealTracks that has a RealC hart MIDI transcribed solo simply open up the Notation window or Piano Roll window and clik on the track and edit i Make sure to Freeze the track by pressing the Freeze button and choosing Freeze for that tick Now your died tracks will save with the song The Savel button saves your song in Band os format Badin Box d ompanimems are savea with the le extension sage Ifa melody has been Siye recorded he Ble extension wl be mgu Chapter S Guide Tour af Banda ox a TI Pets t puton tes you save your song witt all afis senings 1t launches the Assign Instruments and Harmonies to Song dialog where you can save custom patches for your song as well as Volume Pan Reverb Chorus Bank Harmony and RealDrums settings pl ee ntl ee yame t Sienten to GB tritam at ene wren tens arrangement to an audio wave file sia Saving As Audio Files The Render to Audio File s dialog box permits you to save your file as a wave file wav an AIFF file or a high quality compressed Mda file The fils will render in a few seconds with the built in Apple DLS Musie Device or through your own setup with Core MIDI s Daa Congratulations Now you know how to produce a compl
78. have Analyzes your current installation and reports which add on Styles and Soloists have been found E Clap 14 Referense GS Menu Reset Sound Canvas to Factory Reset Sound Canvas And Send BB 38G Master Combo Volume Adjust gt Reverb Type Chorus Type Assign Part Chan Patch Bank Send General MIDI Mode ON E3 Send GS mode On Roland Send XG Mode On Yamaha Auto Send GM mode at start Auto Send GS mode at start Auto Send XG Mode at start Panic send all MIDI note offs Turn Local OFF external MIDI keyboard v Turn Local ON external MIDI keyboard v When program quits turn Local ON Set Panning to Mono Set Panning To Stereo Reset Sound Canvas to Factory resets the module to factory settings Reset Sound Canvas And Send BB sends a reset message to the Sound Canvas and then sends the startup Band in a Box patch changes Adjust Master Volume sets the overall output level for Band in a Box verb Type or Chorus Type Roland GS instrument allow different type of tb and chorus setings These settings boxes allow you to make a selection Assign PartiChan Pateh Bank The GS Part settings are for GS compatible synthesizers only These synthesizers have 16 pars The default is for part 1 10 be channel 1 part 2 channel 2 ete but you can change a part to another channel This allows you to use the same channel for 2 paris so that you hear a layer of 2 instruments playing the
79. is a memo description of the style Thes are stored in the Band in a BovDatyRDPGMemos x file You can also add your own memos in the User Comments box below Restorums For this song BlussShuffleHard HU R de This shows the current RealDrums fortis song None This sets the drums to no RealDrums override for the song and optionally also forces MIDI drums ic no RealDrums forte style ether EE han en AWE Me The RealDrums list can be sorted by any ofthe column headings ck on this button to enter an asterisk beside the current selection inthe list indicating that tis is a favorite style BossaTerryClarke Click on the name of the ReslDrums style name that you want to select for the song Names ending in a caret have variations available Clicking in the caret column will show the variations for the selected RealDrums Genre is the type of music that the RealDrums style comes from such as Jazz Rock or Country Genre more suggests additional types of musie that the Real Drums style might work for At indicates the time signature which is 44 by default Ifthe column is empty the time signature i 4 4 if there is a 3 in this column the time signature is 3 4 Ev indicates the feel of ihe RealDrums style either Even or Swing The listing in the column indicates whether the meter is based on eighth notes 8 oF sixteenth notes 16 Lo i
80. is online is checked and add at least one port Tit W Bandin s Ban is runing when you enable the TAC aver you may need o qut and reopen the Band in a Box application before is recognized In Bane panas Box go to the CoreMIDI Choose Ports dialog and select TAC on all Chapter 13 CareMIDI and Apple DLS Synth ES Bass Cai pors to this Pano BIAB Virtual Output Drums OT Music Instruments Cultar Bus 1 soloist Bus 1 strings Busi Melody uri me Bai lcs inst Bui i Cirmi C Cancel Next launch your third party MIDI application and select TAC as the input port This is often done in the program s Preferences MIDI window Hint H can sometimes make a diference which MIDI appllcabon you apen Wr For example you may need to launch the third party application befora you launch Bandn a Box On Non GS Synthesize Commands euer ni reso micare ITEC GS ica Roland authored set of SysEx commands GS is recognized by many hu not all Roland synthesizers GS is also recognized hy some non Roland synthesizers In a perfect world the worst that would happen to a non GS synthesizer is that the synthesizer would simply ignore GS messages and therefore GS parameters like Master Volume or Reverb would not wark However there are many synthesizers available specially amateur written softsynths It is possible that y
81. left or mouse click on another measure and the chord will be erased Insert or Delete Bars Inserting or deleting measures in the chordsheet saves a lot af copying or re typing of chords when changes are made to an arrangement The commands to insert or delete bars fiom the chordsheet are To insert bars choose Edit Insert Measurefs or i and you can insert a given of bars To delete bars choose Edir Delete Measures or Std and you can delete a given of bars Breaks Rests Shots and Held Chords Breaks are points in a song when one or more of the instruments rests plays a shot oF holds a chord Rests You can have any some or all instruments rest at any bar Far example you could rest all instruments except the bass for the first 4 bars then add in the piano for 4 bars and hen add in the entire band for the rest of the song You may optionally disable the rests in the middle or final choruses where people are likely taking solos and rests are not appropriate A chord is specified as a REST by adding 1 period after the chord C indicates u C chond that isa REST Shots You can make certain instruments play shot where the chord is played and then a rest follows For example the song Rock Around The Clock has a shot on beat 1 followed by a rest for 2 bars A chord is specified as a SHOT by adding 2 periods after the chord Cox init C chord that isa SHOT Held Chords You can specify th
82. library of Jazz Country Rock Pop Metal Blocs and Bluegras styles and more all recorded by top studio musicians and econding artists The total number of RealTracks available is now over 400 with more to come in a wide variety of popular styles and genres ReafTracks sets are available separately for 29 each and they also come in specially priced PAKs for bundling with your favorite Band in a Box package They come included in the premium value versions of the Band in a Box program RealPAK Jazz 3 6 RealTracks Sets 34 styles 1 RealDrums Set 3 style groups RealPAK Rock Pop 3 5 RealTracks Sets 33 styles 1 RealDeums Set style groups RealPAK Country 3 5 ReafTracks Sets 34 styles 1 RealDrurns Set 2 style groups ble with special packages for Jazz Rock Pop Chapter 3 Band in a Box 2010 fr Macintosh i QuickStart Tutorial How to Use the New Features in Band in a Box 2010 Band in a Box 2010 is here with aver 50 cool new features There are some exciting new features in Band in a Box We ve added a new Plug mode allowing you to simply Drag n Drop tracks between Band in a Box and your favorite sequencer GarageBand ProTools Logie Nuendo Reaper and morc RealTracks generate much faster now typically 4X faster Real racks now support Shots Holds and Pushes Time for generating MIDI arrangement is much faster now instantaneous less than second Endings are improved and Real
83. live audio recordings by top studio players and recording artists replace MIDI tacks and can be controlled just like MIDI instruments volume changes muting tc Best ofl they follow the chord progression that you have entered generating an uthentc audio accompaniment to your song They are not samples but are fll recordings lasting from 1 to 8 bars at a time playing along in perfect syne with he other Band in a Box tracks RealTracks can be built in to styles to replace some or all of the MIDI parts Reales are Band category in the StylePicker for Reales Teas lists Styles with RelTracks a blend of MIDI tracks and RealT racks with subs for different musical genres Reclstyles M Classic RealStyles Styles with ReotTracks A11 Styles w ReolTracks Jazz Styles w ReclTrocks Blues Styles w ReclIracks Rock Styles w RectTrocks Gountry The st mames fr RealStyles are prefaced by an underscore 3140 ew 8 140 Jazz Swing Combo 140 RS Sipe ames for Styles wih RealTacks a peice by on equals sign s TBORE B sv amp 130 Jazzy Blues w AcEsss 110 RT Box styles that use RealTracks only There is a separate 1 Chapter 6 Band Hos PowerCde Styles with RealDrums Etyles with ReGlDrums The StylePicker has another category called Styles with RealDrums This lists many RealDrums styles Style that we ve made We always name the RealDrums style beginning with a minus sign so
84. manually type in this information to the memo Cu D Enter Lyrics at Current Bar opens the lyric entry window for the current locaton in the song Copy Lyries to Clipboard puts a copy of the rcs in the clipboard Move Lyries upidown Row s allows previously entered lyrics to be shifted up or down in a range of 24 rows Edit Chord Shortcut txt will edit the fle SHORTCUT TXT using Teach Text This is the chord shortcuts file Refresh Chord Shortcuts saves changes to the SHORTCUT TXT file Changes must be saved with this command or they will be lost Chapter 14 Reference m Song Menu Title Key Tempo Embel K Chorus begins at 1 E Chorus ends after 32 E Total choruses 3 9L v Vary Micdle Style v Overall loop Additional Song Settings Play 38A Stop Hold Pause lt Backspace gt Play From Bar dg Play From Current sg Go Open and Play p Juke Box Play 38 Previous Juke Song xI Next Juke Song 3e v Wizard Playalong xw v Wizard Uses Smart Notes Freeze all Tracks v Un Freeze all Tracks Freeze a single track gt Generate even if tracks are frozen Tikoy T empake Opens the Main Settings dialog This dialog offers you the option to set the title key and chorus begin end ec These settings are usually entered on the main sereen Chorus begins at Shows the bar number for the start of the chorus Choose this command to set a new b
85. mm nennen You ll now sce this Notation window Norn h x Look around the Notation Window Chords Line Ab Ab7 Db Just as in the chordsheet you can type in chords using the same keystrokes EXE este wil be mre a te can market by the Current Time Indicator Line Use the Right Left cursor keys to move back and forth from bar to bar and the Up Down cursor keys to move from screen to scree Change The Mode Of The Notation Window These are 3 modes Standard Notation Editable Notation and Staff Roll Band in a Box offers multiple modes of notation for different purposes The notation defaults to Standard Notation mode other modes are selected with the N button on the Notation window toolbar a Standard Notation ist display or print notation and enter chords It shows the grand piano staff with notes and chord symbols Pressing the button tog through the throe different modes he Eee The Standard Notation window displays the notation for any individul track and allows Tor the entry of chords Features include 0 Chapter Guided To of Banda Box Notation display for the Bass Drums Guitar Piano Strings Melody or Soloist rack 7 As the notation plays the notes that are sounding are highlighted in red This helps with sight reading or following the music You can set the notation to scroll either 1 or 2 bars ahead of
86. mouse over the instrument The drums can be moved offscreen without snapping back to the middle To display the QWERTY keys on the notes select the option in the Drums Window Settings dialog o Display QWERTY Chars on Drums Multi note instruments send different notes depending on where you click on the instrument For instance he Kick Drum can send three different notes Ac Bass Drum MIDI note 35 Bass Drum 1 MIDI note 36 and Square Kick MIDI Note 32 The hint ine at the top ofthe window describes the current contral under the mouse cursor Use the hint Ine to learn the mouse responsive ares of each drum instrument Multi Note Drums Instruments Kick Drum Ac Bass Drum Bass Drum 1 Square Kick Snare Acoustic Snare Side Stick HiHat Closed Pedal Open Floor Tom Low High Electronie Pad Muli zoncd for Hi Q Slap Electric Snare Chapter 12 Wizards Tutors and Ulis am High Conga Mute Open Surdo Mute Open Cuica Mute Open Metronome Bell Click Whistle Long Short Triangle Mute Open Guiro Long Short Scratch Push Pull Computer QWERTY Drum Keys Strike computer keys to play drums Drums are grouped on the computer keyboand by category The kick snare and hi hat Sounds are on the lowest keyboard row The ower middie row contains toms and cymbals The upper middle row contains Latin drums and the tap row contains Latin and percussion The numeri keypad keys contain the remainder
87. onc and save itas MyName HAR Then you could share it with other Band in a Box users who could load in your bank of harmonies from the Har Edit a Harmonies File without disrupting their own existing default har file Asstacd above each har file has 256 harmonies so you probably need only 1 file default har for all your harmonies But if you ve made a great harmony and want to Zive itto your friend for example you can export a single harmony as al file Your frend ean then import this harmony into their har file Or you could upload some At files that you ve erated to your favorite web site Tor other Band in a Box users t enjoy y importing them into thcir default har harmonies file The best way to develop a harmony is to hear itas it s playing The preferred way to do this is to havea song playing that has a melody in it Any changes o the harmony will be head on the melody as soon as you press the Update bunion You can also play along as the song is playing and hear the new harmony on the Thru chann Test Chord CMaj7 M I you don t want to have a song paying and want to hear the harmony then set the Test Chord to certain chord Then you ean play on the MIDI keyboard with no song playing and hear your harmony This allows you to examine exactly what notes Band in a Bon is using fo make your harmony More Additional Harmony Settings are accessed by pressing the MORE button
88. only overriding any ReafTracks stored inthe siyle None The INone button sets the curent track to no Real Tracks assigned for the song Glear AI This ses al Realincks forie song to None 1e wil as optionally Clear All issie Real Tracks present in the se fr this song E Disable RealTracks for this track force this track to MIDD Select Disable RealTracks for this track Force this track to MIDI if you want to have mo RealTracks instrument for this track even if the style specifies a ReslTrack e Chapter Band ios Powerude Artist Bio The Real Tracks have been recorded by top studio musicians The artist names and bios are displayed for tne RealTracks Double clic here to view the fall Memo field This describes the curently selected Real Tracks style and includes some usefil tps such as a suggested tempo range and Band in a Box styles to use it with User comments You can enter your own comments about any style in this field The comments are saved in RTUserMemes txt SongiSbyleDemas Use the song and style demos to audition Real Tracks The Song Demo MGU button wil display a list of Gong Demo MGU songs in the Applications Band in Hox ReafTracks Demos folder that use the selected Real Track instrument Gayle Demo STY Click on the song name and then press the Play bution to hoa i C Pay DC ston The Style Demo Style bution shows a list ofst
89. opens a lyric enuy line aboye the Notation Toolbar where lyrics can be typod in line by line Use the ese key o exit from the Lyric window Quit exits the program entirely Edit Menu Undo Song Settings xz Cut SX Copy C Paste xv Copy From To xc Copy Rests Erase From To XK Intro Bars Auto Generate 3 8 Clear LeadSheet Insert measure s x Delete measure s D Shrink reduce duration of chords by 1 2 Expand durations of chords by 2 Unfold Convert to 1 big chorus Transpose gt Blank Lyrics Slide Tracks Chord Settings x Bar Settings xB Song Memo XM Enter Lyrics at Current Bar Copy Lyrics to Clipboard Move Lyrics up down Row s Edit Chord Shortcut txt Refresh Chord Shortcuts Edit Undo and Edit Redo allow you to undo or redo most operations Chapter 14 Reference w Edit Cot functions like a delete command It removes bars of chords from a song Edit Copy and Edit Paste are to copy chords from one part ofthe song to another Copying a section of chords can he done in the same manner as copying text in a word processor Copy From To Copy Rests Erase From To One of ihe best ways to copy chords is the Copy From Ta command or pressing Option C which will launch the Copy Chords and or Melody dialog The Copy Rests command will similarly bring up a dialog to allow copying of rests The Erase From To command launches the Erase Chords andor Melody
90. previous songs and allows you to freeze an arrangement that you like If You freeze the whole song you dort have to wait at all fr the song to regenerate Next time you play it is ready to go I Tracks can be Edited and Saved MIDI tracks for bass drums piano guitar and Strings can now be edited and saved with the file Ifyou freeze a track edits can be still made to it because it is only frozen from Band in a Box making changes to it you can Stil edit i so that the MIDI track will be saved to the file So you can customize the ass part 1o match a certain song and save it with a ozen bass part so Band in Box won t overwrite your edits This includes RealChans if you wanted to edit the notation of a ReslTracks solo for example Chapter 3 Band in a Box 2010 for Macintosh s Soloist generated RealTracks are now saved with the song so you will he RealTracks play the same solo when you reload the song ReatTracks now support new features including Shots Holds and Pushes Simply type in the chords as you normally would adding periods for shots and holds and the RealTracks will play them Note for this you need the installer that creates a Library M Hoids folder in your RealTrackes folder ReslTracks endings have been enhanced and are now 4 bar endings instead of 2 ar allowing time fora natural decay of the instruments Multiple Undo support Up to 999 levels of undo configurable Always sav
91. same part Chapter 14 Reference E Send General MIDI Mode ON scis the extemal module to General MIDI mode This command will ensure that the module is ready to accept GM specific MIDI data such as Bank Controller and Patch information Send GS mode On Message Roland Send XG Mode On Yamaha Since the inception of he GM General MIDI standard there have been two major Sibscts extensions of this standard GS Roland and XG Yamaha Therefore in addition tothe GM Mode on menu item festure there are additional commands to send a GS mode ON ora XG mode ON message at any time by accessing the GS menu Auto Send GM mode at start sends a General MIDI mode on message when the program boots up Auti Send GS mode at start sends a Roland G Box program boots up Auti Send XG mode at start sends a Yamaha XG system on message when the Rand ina Box program boots up nie send all MIDI note ofts This sends a sweep fall MIDI notes ORE Use if notes are stuck On Turn Local OFF external MIDI keyboard Turn Local ON external MIDI keyboard you are hearing the information played on your keyboard played twice an echo effect then Tum Local OFF Ifyou cant hear what you ae playing at all set then Tum Local ox When program quits turn Local ON Normally while using Band in a Box the loca of setting for your MIDI keyboard is best since the THRU part will be coming from Band in a Box and you dort van
92. sc the Time Signatur to 2 4 B Serm EH Uns NEM Toa Timesig f C TA 4 99 GD Chapter 12 Wizards Tutors and Utes a I TC ole Gp Ap cA api Ao parete doc c Change Bar 10 o its desired duration Hover the mouseover the red triangle marker at Bar II and the mouse cursor becomes a drag cursor Click and drag the ar line to the Jocation marked 11 3 Ehab eh pth spe spek ap GIB opt Now we have edited bar 9 o have its proper 24 Time m aca diri tempo on both sides af the Display Controls Scroll forvard back in the wave file Plus Minus Zoom Buttons OLE cnt us sto mae det MIDI File Chord Wizard MIDI File Chord Interpretation Wizard Many people who play musie by ear think of songs in terms of Chords and Melody However many MIDI files lack chord symbols so they became difficult to eam without the user having to figure out the chords in a time consuming process Box wi Now you can open up any MIDI file in Band in a Box and Bandi automarieully figure out the chords of the song for you T automatically analyzes the MIDI file figures out where the Bass Piano Melody and other tracks are and then figures out the chord changes far the song The chords are writen onto the Band in a Box chordshet like any other song This allows you to quickly learn how to play a so
93. sequence of chords throughout a faster method to emer a song into Band in a Box is to COPY and PASTE the repeating chords Highlight a section of chords by dragging the mouse over them while holding the left mouse button The area will be blackened highlighted F Bo Press CmdC or select the Edit Copy menu item The highlighted arca will be copied to the clipboard can then be pasted back into the chordsheet at any location and reused as many times as you like Move the highlight cell to the bar that you want to paste the chords into using the arrow keys or the mouse mmm a a Paste the copied section with press Cmd V command or select the Ei Paste menu item The chords will then appear at the new location These features are also available fiom the Control click or right click contextual menu Chordsheet Contextual Menu RM ao Germ e sona nat iem a very convenient way to access the features or editing song arrangements Chords can be copied pasted cut or cur lema x Erase Chord pe gt nter gt Chord Bollder ere sh bl erased and new chords can be entered Play Current Chord Sh Enter stom ti Gis Hs The Chord Settings allow pushes rests Chord Settings opt FS and pedal bass to be applied Bar Settings for Bar 17 FS The Bar Settings let you refine your Song Settings arrangement with changes intempo meter key signature styles Realbru
94. sereen sizes allows the program to fll the entire sereen There are also option to restrict the sereen size to a certain size To force the screen size to a certain Size use the Preferences Limit Sereen size to iem Status Bar The first thing to note is that the name af the song that is open is identified in the window tik at the top af the sereen along with the name of the style This feature is handy when ou want to know the status and the title of your song and the style n use at a glance Youll also see the ength ofthe song in minutes and seconds this updates if you change he tempo and press the Play button er The fle name in the sau bar wl ave an asterisk dod thei has been changed Synth Window Piano Keyboard The Piano Keyboard This keyboard displays the notes that are being played by all instruments on various parts of the piano keyboard during playback except drums The name ofthe currently Selected part is shown just above the keyboard on the MIDI Thra the notes are displayed on the When playing slong ar recordi keyboard T tombs D Pano D Durs O Coar O Sring Celo O Salon CR Synthesizer Window Part Settings The Bass Plano Drum Guitar SoloistStings Melody and Thru buttons are referred to as Parts Sctings hat can be changed for an individual part include Reverb Chorus Pan Bank Volume and Instrument To change a setting for one ofthe parts Select the Part by mouse cl
95. silence you keep playing comping drums melody t trying to stay in tempo Drummers can mute the drum part When the band comes back in after the 4 bars you ll get instant feedback on how well you ave maintained the tempo if the band comes in time with you or ot Once set this feature works automatically with all songs until you tumn it of The Guitarist Guitar Fretboard Window iisa window for gitar and us players The onscreen toa ipys ay Bund ion tack on gularor bans Thi Guar Window bas eres such basting of correc pontnn nots mamed on eer ui oce aja pay nse poston Snd sabe gun bout Guitar plays wl be able f reaalong oa Meldy Solo Simply by king tthe utara Ana itv md fur way t ear gel Launching the Guitar Window To lunch the Guitar Window pres the guitar button or Cir Sti or ions imen ten Wadon Gute Padon Quick Tour of the Guitar Window Once launched youl see the various areas of the Guitar window E Clar 12 Wade Tutors and Ulis postion There are names for the open strings displayed on the left E B G D A E There are fret positions marked at the bottom of the fretboard You can mouse click on hese positions to change the current fret position In the diagram above the eurrent position s position 5 There are Note Names displayed They are displayed for two positions on the guitar fretboard One of the postions is the seale beginning with the third of the scale
96. sing a silent style Piano In this mode channels 8 and 9 are treated as the left and right hand ofa piano par Nie When saving a MIDI fe andthe Wack ipe s Gutar any pales on tha guiar channels 11 to 16 are preserved so that any fret postions are preserved Channels 11 o 18 corespand to strings 1106 so that a C5 note on Channel 11 would be shown on the oh E string at he rd fret Embellish Melody Dialog The Melody Embellisher dialog opens allowing you to customize the settings ofthe Embellisher choose an embellisher type from presets and make a particular Embellishment permanent Melody Ener B Live Auto embelia during every playback Smansa Dus ung Mm Tota Nac 448 Trumpet Ortar dj 0 aust oce pce ded To Exe ates 0 NI ates 17 Aegean rl es Ariston Sese tiers Virna Nar 34 ccce notes PERS Cuin e r Stara notes 5 Cam Cue G Minoon 57 Ces mbes NOW Permanent rr ite Current balan Permanent Sii fering vo Melody C Restore Organo cci use indo Hi Ses Pate Ge Convert Harmony to Melody Track Converts a single line Melody tack to include the current harmony selection Remove Harmony or guitar solo from Melody Track Removes a harmony ftom a track providing that the harmony was put there by Bandin Bon in the first place using the Convert Harmony to Melody Track command Generate Guitar Chord Sal Opens the Selec
97. style Un Freezing a Track s This is also done by the Freeze bution Freeze all vacks all frozen Choose a frozen track to unfreeze it or Un Freezealitracks all frozen home Un Frceo all ashe v Bass frozen Y Piano frozen v Drums frozen Y Guitar frozen Strings frozen Melody frozen Solis frozen us Chapter Bandi Hot Povertiuide Forcing Generation of a Song tatis Frozen Band in a Box won t touch tracks that are frozen But if you want to change without having to Un Freeze the tracks you can do this easily Hold down the SHIFT key as you press the Play button the I y hint will remind you of Pu e Y creates a new arrangement and plays t Jy f sana you don t want your Kl aereratea use Resim 1f you shift ci this A Ron tw Te senate ie Sora ee i race loc or go to the Song menu and choose Generate even if tracks are fr EGIT Generate even if tracks are frozen When you do this the song will regenerate the tracks will get rewritten and the song yl stay frozen So if you re freezing songs to get the instant playback with Real Tracks but get tired of the same old frozen arrangement just press SHIFT PLAY generate a mew arrangement and press SAVE Then the new fresh frozen arrangement will play instantly even with many Real Tracks Tip Deviously you would use fis feature ta farce regeneration ofa ozen song yau have mado custom eds to the so
98. styles Styles that are similar to the prototype are indicated with an asterisk These are styles bat have the same fel triplets eighihs sixteenths and a similar tempo range Styles with similar feel but a different tempo range are marked by a caret symbol So you Chapter 6 Band ina Bos Powertiuide 1w con quickly se styles that are similar to Jazz Swing in this example The styles J BASIE and 1 DIXIE could be substituted with a perfect match so are marked with an asterisk Styles like 1 DJANGO are marked with a caret because they sound best ina much faster tempo than the prototype Jazz Swing style Use the filters to display al styles or only ones that you choose Show Styles TF Feel and Terpo Natch Prototype Disk R68 Requested E Fo Auditioning S You can press the Preview button The Preview Preview Stop binon generates and plays an arrangement with he new style use the Stop button to end the preview Change the tempo by typing in a new tempo in the t field at the top t 87 Click to update the tempo Update Tong Demo The Song Demo button plays the style demo song directly from Leong Demed qs StylePieker window M raa Egan You can Reduce or Expand the duration of the chords Reduce Cexpar setu when changing the fel of songs z M he Prompt With Preview item is set the pE Program will ask you if you w
99. symbol Use for slash chords with alternate Roots such as CT E C7 with E bass Use a comma to enter 2 chords in a cell In the example below we would type Abd to get the 2 chords in the cell on beat 3 and 4 of bar 2 B CAT Daas Twe The sequence of eye o enter all these chords above wouid be stan abi g9 gt c6le gt gt W739 The gt indicates cursor key to the right We are abile to type A7 9 as a739 because Band in a Box knows to use the uppercase of es which is Tip Tha fastest way to pe in chorda e ta use your Ie Rando pen the chords Vour ht hand stays on the cursar keys or mouse to advance he highlight callo the next ariboatafieryouve ped in th chords Shortcut Chords you enter a lo of songs youl appreciate these shortcut keys Maj Hem7bs H stands for Half diminished Dedim o Ssu Example To type CMaj7 just type CI it will be entered as CMaj7 Add your own chord shortcuts Have you found a chord that Band in a Box doesn t recognize If o add it to your chord shortcuts file and Band in a Box will allow you to type in that chord in the future You Gon also define chord shorts onc leter abbreviations for longer chord names I for Maj7 etc To add your own chords and shortcuts make a text file called shortcut ix in your Band in a Box folder Note that this file doesn t ship with Band in a Box if it did it would overwrite your file Shortcuts supplied by PG
100. tat Ct ce ete ogy Te CSeng CET decribed i Al senec rman Tip Cima Play when selected chacksox aha batom of he sang Tet window ta have Band in a Box play your song immediately upon selection Like the favorite songs button the favorit styles button F activates dialogs with Favorites and Recently Played Radio buttons that toggle between a list of your recently played styles and your favorite songs styles Click the Play When Chosen checkbox o have Band in a Box play your song immediately upon selecting a style User Open Favorite Styles or SiN also opens this window You getto the SiylePicker window by prin the Sy buton ar ome Sin fe keria Cinta tis ue ly landete M in this manual This is the song memo button A red border indicates that the song has a memo There are automatically generated memos describing the song and you can type in your own memos too This opens the Additional Song Setings dialog with settings that apply to the current sang for rests pushes tgs endings and fadeouts Harmony Area The Harmony area displays the current Melody and Thru Harmony O eera DA teen The IM button is for Melody Harmony in this case is set o trumpettrombone 3rds harmony Whatever the melody plays will come out with trumpet trombone harmony in birds Pressing the f button allows you to choose from a list of only your most frequently used harmonies Press
101. that ZZJAZZ Style would be the ZZIAZZ Style but using RealDrums instead of MIDI drums Multistyles Original Band in a Box styles had two substyle variations a and b Band jax MultStyles have faur substyles 4 through d teisei There is a MultiStyles category Sea in the StylePicker that opens list of your available MultiStyles The Memo describes each substyle variation Memo R amp B flavored Country Rock W Drs Bass RhodesP Ac Gtr EL Gtr Multistyle A verse held chords B Cchorus busy bass C intro simp drums D Cbridge ride Standard Pop song form with 4 substyle MultiStyle Asa general rule for styles with 4 substyles a substyle is for the verse 7C substyle is for the chonas e substyle is for the intro or first verse CP sibstyle is for the break or interlude Choosing Styles For cach style you see the following information Dar TEI ina Stel tthe stri C or U Y caret indicates if the siyle is a periset or good muc to the prototype style ZZIAZZ is the name ofthe Style style file Io sw indicates that the style is in a Swing fel vs EV for Even fel IO The cS indicates that the style is an 8 note feel vs 16 note feel Io 160 is the tempo for this style Io Jazz Swing Style is the fuli name ofthe style SD 0 indicates that the style is found on Styles Disk 0 one of the original 24 Band in a Box
102. that there will be a small arrowhead inthe Title window on he main sereen indicating that you have an alias loaded Aliases are stored in files called ALL J DIZZY STY Alias far ZZJAZZ Style indicated by he symbol Playing Pausing and Stopping Songs Playing Songs Play here are several ways to play a song in Band in a Box cer staring fom the beginning or from a speci place in the song To generate a new Band in a Box arrangement and play the song from the start you can ithe n Chapter Band ios Povertiuide Press the Play button or Press the keystrokes 98 a or Press the F4 function key or Select the menu command Song Play e From To play a song in Band in a Box from a particular measure Press the From button and select the bar from which to play or With the song stopped type the letter x on the computer keyboard to restart fram the current location of the highlight cll or Select Play From Bar from the Song menu or Press CHEF Double clicking on the spreadsheet ar notation will start playback from that point without re generating the song unless needed due toa change in the song Replay inox Press the Replay button or Select Replay Already Constructed Song rom the File menu or Replay plays a song without constructing it fist To replay a song in Band Press the keystrokes r or Press the x key Pa
103. the bass note played on the Bass part and the extension played on he Piano wrack Ifyou are happy with the sound o the chord you can press the Enter Chord button to emer the chord at the bar and beat specified If you would ike the chord to be inserted automatically when you click on the note extension names select the Enter chord when ies option Change the ar Beat settings to enter at a different bar The Chord Builder can be left open as you work entering chords into Band i a Bor Remember that you can also play chords in from the MIDI keyboard by pressing CiritReturn alter youve played a chord Chordsheet Contextual Menu The Chordshect contextual menu opens with a right click or Controlelick on the chondshet area In addition to quick access to editing features t also includes shorteuts o major features for editing arrangements and making program settings Coon mid E mts Copy from _to_ OntC Samme enwu pos Paste cmd v The Chord Settings allow pushes Cut lema x Tess and pedal bas o be applied Erase Chord pe gt nter gt The Bar Settings let you re Chord Builder ctrl sh b E E Play Current Chord hinter fime solam lees thes nita Chordsetings foptF51 srg lb a id pud Bar Settings for Bar 17 FS Saisio om tans cada and Song Settings pom i CEN Git sem seins a esa Pray from Chorus 1 Bar 17 MIDI file Chord Wizard Tis allows you to read in the chords ftom any
104. the drums when playing at or speed irom the Play menu Global Volume adjust you are finding that the RealDrums track is too loud or quiet in relations to the MIDI pars you can adjust the volume here This affects all RealDrums styles Slide Track You should normally leave this at 0 but if you are having syne problems between the MIDI tracks and ReslDrums you can set this to a positive or negative value Values are in milliseconds ms Custom Folder For RealDrums Styles Custom Drum Folder Instead of JAnplications Band i Use a custom drum folder location Update Choose 7 Chapter Bands Povetuide You can choos ny folder for your ReiDruns This allows you orexumpe to omer space on Your ard dive by stoning the Realumt a at external ve Since yu cn type in your own folder ame det you shoul Update pie sting when you ne ined ping te rame you want to store your Drums folder somewhere other than Applications Band in a Box Drums then specify that location by choosing its folder here This button clears the currently selected ReslDrums for the song Choose i Clear This allows you to audition the song with and without ReslDrums without leaving this dialog Play Stop song playback Return the settings in this dialog to their defaults Defaults This updates the settings in the dialog and rebuilds the list of drum styles
105. the music without imerfering with your view of the curent notation Standard notation handles Jazz eighth notes and triplet figures correctly Automatic options such as uto durations clean notation mono display minimize Tests hard reses and engraver spacing produce very musical and readable notation Enter the Editable Notation mode iom the notation sereen with a single mouse lick on the IN buton This is a special staff with time divisions for mouse based editing In the Editable Notation mode you can enter move and cdit notes and rests using standard mouse techniques point and click and drag and drop This is the sereen for step entry ofa melody or for editing existing parts The grid of Vertical lines which sub divides euch beat indicates where the notes will be placed according to the resolution of the song Holding the Shift Ctrl or Alt key as you click na note forces a sharp flat or natural respectively Resolution Swing styles use 3 lines to divide each beat into eighth note swing triplets Straight styles use 4 lines to divide cach beat into sixteenth notes Band in a Box has automatically sets the grid resolution to 3 per beat triplets or 4 per beat This resolution can be changed in the Notation Options dialog but the program automatically sets the resolution to the correct value based upon the Hand in a Hox style hat is currently in use Click the N button again
106. the pattern will be embellished This is useful in Jazz styles Transpose Down Limit usual setting 6 This sting is quite useful It controls the range that the patter will be played over For example ifthe transpose down range is set to 2 the pattern recorded in C will be 206 Chapter 11 User Programe Fancsins aransposcd a maximum of 2 semitones down and therefore up to 10 semitones up to play all 12 possible rots of the chords Type OF Voice Leading usual scing Transpose Only Transpese Only CT chord based Smooth voice leading Rift based The easiest type of voice leading is transpose anly Ifthe notes C EG Bb wer played as a CT pattern the Band in a Box would transpose that voicing to a F7 chord as F A C Eb which is fine but not very smooth A more pleasant setting would be smooth voice leading then the F7 would be voled automatically as C Eb F A Riff based voicing is used when you have recorded a pattem with a melodie riffin it This setting ensures that Band in a Box will not try to transform any of the notes into chord tones Chord Selection Dialog Box This section is accessed by the CHORD button This plays back a pattem on a specific chord that you choose You can hear what pattems will sound like in a style by nying them out on certain songs Macro notes recorded in a pattem will play their corresponding chords smooth voice leading is demonstrated ete Just choose a chord and
107. time Two chord names can be typed into the highlight cell separated by a comma e C Cm so up to four chords per bar may be entered To enter a chord type its name using standard chord symbols like C or Fm7 or Bb7 or DIS E and press the return key The chord name s you have typed will be entered in the chondsheet at the current locaton of the highlight cell Each time the returm key is pressed the highlight call advances 2 beats or a measure WomrTovewsisto Bands Bor chord ramas please reier io ha online Hap To start typing in chords Go to the top bar 1 of the chordsheet by clicking on measure 1 Blank the chordsheet by selecting the New option from the File menu ar with the keystrokes Sn The highlight cell will be at the start of bar 1 reposition it if desired When you have the highlight cell positioned where you want to enter a chord type the name ofthe chord you would like For example type c6 to get the C6 chard You should never have o use the shift key as Band in a Box will sort this out far you Here are some other tips far casy chord entry Use b fora flat c Bb7 Iti not necessary to type upper or lower case the program will sort his out for ou s Chapter 6 Bandi Povertiuide Use or 3 for a sharp e g FT is the uppercase symbol of 3 so you can actually type F37 to get F7 Band in a Box will sort out the case saving you the effort of using lt SHIFT gt 3 to type the
108. to MIDI file checked the harmony will be written to the MIDI file I no just the melody will be written to the MIDI file MIDI fle Harmony separate tracks checked the harmony will be written to the MIDI file on separate tracks for each voice You could use this to print out individual parts to your printer for example Write Guitar part on 6 channels set to YES the styles tha are Intelligent Guitar Styles wil result in a MIDI file that has e Guitar part written on six channels 11 16 Then when you read it in PowerTeacks or another sequencer that uses the convention of 11 16 for guitar strings the guitar part wll display correctly JEsong has RealDrums also generate MIDI drums is an option when saving a Band in a Box arrangement to a MIDI MID file t can be unchecked if your song uses ReslDrums and you don t want MIDI drums included in the MIDI file song has RealDrums generate xxxx_RealDrams ALFF audio saves the Real Drums which are audio as a separate AIFF file This allows you to easily import the entire Band in a Box song into another program for editing Number of Levels of Undo Set the number of levels of undo from 5 to 999 Undo takes up memory so don t use huge values unless you have a lot of memory or make a ot of mistakes More Preferences Preferences 2 More preferences are accessed with the Preferences 2 button in the Preferences dialog Click on Preferences 1 or Soloist Prefs o jump to t
109. whole song or Tange of song m O More chords Mto substitute FO Orap C tess Chords Types of subs to include azz or Pop f More or less Chords Fast Sub Orly F Only chaose substitution is Melody is Compatible D include Chord Subs with each beat des Tip bar 1 negative 1 whole Song mr 5 is the very beginning of O Part at Seng ftus 2 the song M you d like Band in a Box to only generate for a certain range of bars you should fist highlight that range of bars in the chordsbect then launch the dialog The Range will then be set to Pat of the song and the bar and of bars settings will also be set You can override these settings with manual settings if necessary Using the Chord Substitution Wizard Load in the song Freddie MGU The tune begins with an FT chond far beats Let make that parta litle more interesting by trying some substitutions for that chord First press Shift Return with the highlight bar an bar 1 You ll hear the F7 chord played Then choose Edir Chord Settings Option and the Chord Options dialog will he launched Notice the following buttons Preview Builder and Chord Subs The Preview button allows you to hear the chord whichis similar to what we did above by pressing Shift Return The Builder bution allows you to try different chords and buil selecting root and extension The Chord Subs button is the one that we re interested in thi
110. y e a Out Ceu E n T os om GOO ED DW Oom Rp Crio D You can now click om the root af he chord in the root group the extension Maj et and also an alternate slash note root Chapter 12 Wizards Tutors and liie EJ For example to make the chord F9 A you would click on he F rot the 9 extension and the Slash Root of A As you click on them youl hear the bass note played on the Bass part and the extension played on the Piano trac you are happy with the sound ofthe chord you can pres the Enter Chord button Tiat enters the chord at the ar and beat specified Animated Drum Kit This sizable window is a cool animated 3D display of a complete drum ki with all 61 Drum sounds displayed on their instruments Watch the various drum instruments being played or play along record on any of the drum instruments by using QWERTY keys or a mouse Very educational and lots of fun Windows Drum Window option Thea the Drums Kit window wili display an r To launch the Drum Kit window click the Drums buo or choose the animated display of a complete Gi You can do several things with the Drums Window Watch the Drum part being played on the Drums Window in real time Play along withthe drums in real time by mouse clicking on the Drum Instrument or using QWERTY keys the key names to use are listed on the Drums Window Record a drum part into Band in a Box To do this simply pre
111. 00 Jazz Pop Rock Latin County and Caesical melodiy ses d Chaper Guided Tou of Banda Box Adding Lyries to your song Use the menu command Edir Enter Lyrics at Current Bart open the Lyrics Entry window The Eseape key closes this window Use the cursor arrows to move down and enter your lyrics a line at a time Twa lines of lyrics are displayed while the song is playing and the lyrics are highlighted as the highlight cll moves acros the chordshect Add a Memo A song memo of up 10 2000 characters may be added with your own notes Cw about the song and the Band in a Box song summary Clicking on the M button Heated to the right o be song title launches the Song Memo dialog where you can type in a short memo about the song style ct A red border around the M button indicates that the song has a memo The keystrokes Option M will iso launch the Song Memo Automatic Memo Generation he summary checkbox is selected you l see an additional window that automatically displays a full summary of the song itle tempo patches used in the song as well as other special features such as subs patch changes or harmonies This saves much ofthe work previously required to manually type in this information to the memo Saving Your Work Now that you have produced a great sounding song it is time to save it as a Bandin Bax file as a MIDI
112. 11 to 16 Channels 11 o 16 are used by Band in a Box to indicate strings 1 to 6 of a guitar It uses the current position marker on the guitar for this command Utilities There is a Utilities sub menu that has utility functions to eliminate note overlap and transpose the Soo Eliminate Note Overlap Preserve Double Stops Eliminate Note Overlap Remove Double Stops opens 2 Choose Range dialog to select the range of bars where note overlap will be eliminated while double stops are ether preserved or eliminated Transpose One Octave DOWN Transpose One Octave UP transposes the Soloist part onc octave in either direction This is often useful if the Soloist instrument has been changed Trunsposing can be done while the song plays e line Soloist trac to Eliminate Note Overlap Preserve Double Stops Eliminate Note Overlap Remove Double Stops Transpose One Octave DOWN x3 Transpose One Octave UP E Track Type Normally you d leave the tack type set to Single but you can set it to Multi 16 Channel All channels are W Single Channel preserved and ouput on the channels This Multi 16 Channel Soul b useful or importing an ent it MIDI fle ad playing from te Melody Guitar channel using a silent style Piano Guitar Channels 1T to T6 will display on the guitar as strings 11 to 16 TAB will show the notation will be up an octave and the MIDI file will contain the channels preserved
113. 4 if you want the pater to only be played on certain beat numbers I Beat I Beat 3 4 Beat 4 this allows you to put in piano fils for Roman Numerals usual seting 0 you have a pattem hat should only be played on the I chord ar the I chord ofthe key you can use these Roman Numeral Masks This setting is rarely used Chase 11 User Programmable Functions E Chord Type usual setting Any Chord This setting is very useful This allows you to record patterns that will only work on certain types of chords For example you can recon a specifie riff that will nly work ona minor 7th chord You then play the patter on a Cmin 7 not a CT There are chord ypes for most types of chords Half Octave Range usual setting Full Octave This is a new setting in the StyleMaker Usually a pattern will be picked on any ofthe 12 mots You can select a smaller runge either A to D or Eb to Ab In this case the pattern would only be picked if the chord in the song is in that range Interval Chord usual setting Any Interval This senting allows you to restrict the pattern to be played only if the next chord is a certain interval away For example you can recond a bas pattern that is walking up a fourth and then assign an interval of Up 4th so that the pattern would only be played if you re going up a 4th lay Pattern Pushed how often i usual setting ticks to push pattern 120 ppq usual setting 0 Pushed pattem
114. BAND IN A BOx Version 2010 for Macintosh Copyright 1989 2010 PG Music Inc All rights reserved PG Music Inc License Agreement CAREFULLY READ THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS BEFORE COMPLETING THE INSTALLATION OF THIS SOFTWARE USAGE OF THE SOFTWARE INDICATES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS LICENSE A The program may only be used on a single machine 3 You may transfer the rogram and cene to anoo party if de other party ares to acp the t of this Agreement H you transfer tbe programa you mu ior Waser A copien whale in prind ar machine cele fur o esame pary det all Copies mot ansfered This includes al modifications andr peas of the programa enel inia other programma C Yoni may recive ie programm in more thin ane mali Regardless of the type or sine of amada you receive you way install ar ie the moli on sale mache D The program inhaling any images apple photographs animations vien audio mui and tet incorporated i tne program is owned y P Musie Ine or its rien sd i rotto by international copyrigh laws renal ray mone You may nat se copy or aser the program or any cpi modification ce merged portion of he programa leor in part exceptas expen provided for wn thie license Mou tranfer possession of any copy modification ar merged portion of the progran ta another party your license automatically lema LIMITATION OF REMEDIES PG Music loei lity ad your exclusive remedy shall be A The r
115. DE EYE m ote ao uw Chap S Guide Tour of Banda o Play along with your MIDI Controller Keyboard Ifyou have an extemal MIDI Keyboard controller connected to your computer system you can use the MIDI THRU features to play along with the program The Thru part is the part that you play along on your MIDI keyboard or with the Wizard featur It can be harmonized by pressing the T button in the Harmony area ofthe main OSIA CO CO mrsa Seles Thru Harmony Thin opena the Select Thru Harmony dialog Whatever you play alo keyboard while the song is playing will be auto harmonized in real tim using a Tenor Banjo type harmony Select Thru Harmony on your MIDI in this case 17 SuperSax 4 1 Meno 18 SuperBeass 4 1 Tenor Banjo chording Use on 19 Trombones 4 Bru 20 George Shearing Qui 21 Big Band Brass 5 par 22 Super Sax 5 part 23 Glen Miller 24 Clarinet saxes and g 25 Les Paul Harmony G um 26 Errol Gamer RH eva Edt horeo 27 Flutes Supersex 28 Miles Guitar octav GoTo 29 Octaves no Patch L 30 Tenor Banjo Cras 31 Nylon Guitar 4 pat y 32 Joe Pass SQ Cane The Thu Harmony is also applied to Soloist parts when the option to Allow Soloist Harmony on Thri is selected in the Soloist menu Generate and Play a Solo Start a Soloists File Edit a Soloists File Edit Current Sol
116. DI velocities to 70 ranspose THRU Part live playing on MIDI keyboard This feature opens with the menu command MIDI Thru Tronspose Setting When playing slong on your MIDI keyboard you can set Band in a Box to Transpose ty semitones andlor octaves You can define a favorite key and Each timc a song is loaded Band in a Box will optionally transpose any and all loaded songs to that key This is a preat feature for practicing in a certain key You can also automatically transpose the Thru part so that you can always play along in your favorite key regardless of the acl key of thc song Chapter S Guided Tour of Banda o E Transpose by B Semitones amp p Octaves Cs taen me a song ined EE Transpose the Song poit now Transpose the THRU Part AM GS Core The default is No Transpase so the Default bution sets all Beds to 0 you are playing along while changing these setings the Update button will apply the changes you have made so you can hear the diference IDo it now sends your transpose setings fr ether the song othe Thr part as selected Change the Style The hundreds of musical styles available for Band in a Box include los of variations for any style you choose You can even use several styles in the same song by pressing the FS funcion key on the computer to open the Edit Bar Settings dialog to change the style at any har Try differen
117. EResirracs nt tetra banon to jump dnt the slart of the RealTracks soloists listings chosen Soloist DEN As with other Soloists press the JAI Sol button to make sure that the Soloist will be generated for all choruses or Melody and Solo if you just want the Soloist for a ceram chorus Saving RealTracks S Soloist generated ReaTracks are saved withthe song so you will hear the Real Tracks lay the same solo when you reload the song When you generate a soo sing RealTracks Band in a Box will remember this and when you go to save the song Band in a Box will ask you you want to save that slo and thereby freeze the Soloist track If you say yes then the solo will play instantly the same way when the song is reloaded Of course you can freeze the soloist track yourself Saving Your RealTracks Jg eres tte acetate The RealTracks selection that you assign to a song will be saved with the song but the audio track that was generated is not automatically saved with the Band in a Box MGU file This is because the Band in a Box MGU file only contains chords melody lyries and an optional audio truck AIFF file you have generated a RealTracks part that you want to keep you can use the Freeze feature to save it Frozen tracks will reload with the song and play green exactly as saved Are other RealTracks available There are over eighty sets available with more than 400 ReafTra
118. Exit and send chords to Band in a Box Average tempo Control eick the tempo box for options imesig 4 fay Son tine sige 24i 28 4 qu lux KeySg Cea Song key signature Fnerme 8 Use to correct pitch of song if necessary to improve chord recognition Other Keyboard Shortcuts Jump To Song Start W key Chapter 12 Wizards Tutors and lice Jump forward one bar P right arrow key Jump back one bar 4 left arrow key Jump forward four bars Y down arrow key Jump back four bars A up arrow key Chordsheet Overview There s a Chordshoe window in the Audio Chord Wizard that shows he chords for the whole song on a single sereen This allows you to click ona bar on the chordshee to jump to that area of the song You can mark sections of he song using part markers and the sections will begi new line with a line space between so they are clearly seen So you can then the form of the song as you can see the various sections nro verseichorus bres at a glance or quickly jump to the any section simply by double licking on that part of the shonsheet For this discussion open up Band in a Box Tutorials Frontier m a You will now sce the song and the Chordsheet window in the Audio Chord Wizard is visible Play the song Serdar One Losse the sirt of bar 1 on the waveform and click on the Set Bar One bution You may have to stop and sat over apain To pinpoi
119. Freezing locking MIDI or RealTracks RealDrums E Any tack MIDI or RealTrack DES Freeze all tracks not frozen san be frozen When frozen it Un Freeze all tracks not frozen won t be changed or re generated This saves time when Feplaying previous songs and allows you to freeze an arrangement that you like Ifyou freeze the whole song you don t Strings have to wait at all for the song o Melody regener Next tme you play Soloist itis ready to go a Claper Guide Tour of Banda Box You can make tracks Frozen by pressing the Freeze button snowflake on the toolbar and then choosing which tracks that you want to f Add a Melody Band in a Bon is much more than an arranger and accompanist You con also record al your live MIDI performance tothe Melody tack ener a Melody in the Notation note by note or use he Wizard to seco ots Sw mi om your computer key board Enable the Embellisher and the Melody will be embellished as itis played Ent tears mor tenine NOR audita sre te The Embellisher is only active while the music is playing does permanently affect the Melody tack Harmonize the Melody The Select Melody H defined harmonies ande ny dialog box allows you to choose from any ofthe pre n allows you to define your own reste INI bun next othe piano keyboard to ada hamony othe Melody ck MY CF Bote This dialog also opens with the Harmony
120. I choose ports Select MIDI Driver or Apple DLS Synth XD 955 EIE ni eee toes E wb s Specific deulls of your Audio MIDI Setup sereen will differ from dis example depending on your MIDI interface and your connected extemal MIDI devices This sa relatively complicated example with an eight port MIDI interface and four diferent synthesizers your MIDI Interface has been properly installed the picture of your MIDI Interface will automatically appear in the Audio MIDI Setup window showing input output pins for cach MIDI input and output socket on your MIDI Interface You need to inform Audio MIDI Setup about your extemal devices keyboards synthesizers drum machines mixers etc Click the Add Device button for each af Your extemal devices and then double click cach new device to set Manufacturer Model number of Send Receive MIDI channels and other relevant information Chapter 13 CareMIDI and Apple DLS Synth E Aier your extemal devices have been created and configured the last step is to wire em up to the picture of your MIDI interface For instance in the above illustration the KX keyboard controller is connected to MIDI input utp pair 8 on the MTPII MIDI Interface Click on an input output pin on the picture of your MIDI Interface and drag to an outpuinput pin of the picture of an external device Aer supplying this information
121. I Thr part to playback on You can contro volume panning t by using the Thra settings at the top of the main Band in Box sereen You can select the patch in the Tutor dialog The tutor will display Jazz Pop and Folk voicings in easy medium and advanced forms The advanced forms use inversions and changing patterns of chords while the easy ones just stiek to the common campfire chords F Show muted high note of 3 note comping One ofthe tutors uses 3 note Jaz yoicings to simulate the famous Big Band chord guiar comping styles Ifyou use this youl only sce 3 notes in the chords of course Since it Sometimes heips to see the entire 4 chord voicing in this case there is the option to show the muted note as well Fote Tis apes to e Guiar Tur There Te aio the opion fo show ts forthe Guitar Styles This option is presentin the Guitar Options Dialog The Guitar Tutor stays enabled until you change the Guitar truck to another track for example to change it to the Bass track You can easily re enable it by clicking on the Tutor button again Using the Guitar Tutor By enabling the Tutor youl sce and optionally hear guitar chords played on the guitar along o any sor Load in a Jazz song and star it playing e Old Folks MGU Youll notice that the associated style GARNER Style doesnt have any guitar chording init yet Lets use the Guitar Tutor to show us what guitar chords to play during thi
122. I mn When you do that the chords wil be interpreted from the MIDI file and writen onto the shordsheet Prior to pressing the button you might want to make some custom settings When you load in the MIDI IM Auto interpret settings from MIDI file fite Rand in o Box meros many things fom the MIDI Ale fr you automatically Normally you d want histo happen but if for some reason you d prefer to make the settings yourself you can set Auto Interpret settings from MIDI file to false The settings that are determined automatically for you are The key signature ofthe song MIDI fl Some MIDI files contain a special event hat states the key signature of the file but most dont For the ones that don t Band in a Box analyzes the tracks and makes a best guess at the correct key signature Chapter 12 Wizards Tutors and Utes E Ir usually gets it right but ifits wrong i s interval Tempo time signature The channels used for the Bass part Piano comping parts The channels used for the Melody pars The number of bars in he song to import including the number of lead in bars in the son Once you have loaded in the MIDI ile by pressing the Open Change button and assuming that you have the Auto Interpret set to tne youl see that he dialog displays the semings that the Chord Wizard hax found in the MIDI file for the key signature and channels used fr the song L
123. Ifa shorter chond duration is entered the remainder of he pater is ignored Patems are also entered for the A and B substyles Drum pattems are not of variable duration like the Bass and Piano patterns The Drum patterns are always one bar long Longer pattems than one bar may be chained together using bar masks sce below When you record a new patter Bass Piano or Drums a dialog box will be displayed with several options al set to defanlts of 0 Ifyou are making a simple style or if you don t understand all the options just leave them at their default settings When you recond a pattem with all the default settings it is called a eric pattern Generic pattems may be picked at any time by the program Playback of patterns in the StyleMaker is done fom the StyleMaker sereen button plays pattem back exactly as played set by the user from a menu Stopping Playback Clicking the mouse button or pressing the lt Spacebar gt stops playback of the pater Erasing Patterns are erased by assigning a weight of zero to the pattem Type a Oa the patr NOTE All user styles are entered in 44 me The Bandin a Box Program is capable of playing back in any time signature via the Bar Setings coton on ihe Edit Menu or Options so user defined waltz styles wouid be mada as abut played as 34 Editing Existing Styles The easiest way to become familiar withthe StyleMaker isto start with an existing style and modif
124. MGU and exported to a MIDI file with the string positions intact because we use channels 11 ta 16 for the Guitar pari You can remove the solo at any time even after the solo has been saved reloaded by choosing Melody Remove Harmony for guitar solo from Melody Track Guitar Settings stem Fethard eine CIT show Notes at usan Potion caren Tack Maumas eame show es a gin Postion MaDi Th fn nen igen iih ode p ses coors rri to Set Postion poima ec thin Ober Show ofrnge mots Ga Md et S 00 Oms Ditmas at Cua hoighe taet 0 n Ce tala emma Came se Netes ol Non Window THER CTS 380K 30i The Guitar Settings dialog allows you the ability to adjust various parameters on the on sereen gular fretboard so that musie can be displayed effectively and easily on this m Chapter e Automatic Mosi Features window regardless of the original instrument intended far the track data It also offers he ability to enter notation using the en scrcen guitar and to play back track data in specifie fretboard positions for educational and sight reading purposes Nute Display Options Note Display M Current Track F MIDI Thru IF MIDI Thru is selected default On the Guitar will display the musie played on a MIDI keyboard If Current Track is selected default On the current track will be displayed M Multi Channel Mode Base Channel The guiar will display informati
125. MIDI file and write them onto the Band in a Box chordshest First blank the song by choosing File New Choose File Import Chords from MIDI File or press Ctrt Option Chapter Bond io Powertiuide w You ll sce this Chord Wizard dl mere ein rom atis Open Change MAII Jazz Standard CINTERPRET CHORDS NOW cuter erare Qa Press the Open Change button and select the MIDI file to import Choose a preset and the Chord Wizard w interpret the chords in that style Press the INTERPRET CHORDS NOW button o see the chords written into the Band in a Box chordsheet ii FTHEN wo ow Ww o over rr 5G ms am ore mag ome 5 a n er 2 a Lo nor 0 VN a omes mm lore L mag M a x pi Chord Wizard sls interpreting fua Sudan MIDI File Chapter Banna Hos Powerade IV Import to Melody from channel s 4 The dialog has options to read channels inta the Melody andor Soloist tacks end in Chords from a PG Music oF Band in a Box MIDI file Many of PG Musics programs have MIDI files with the chords in hem You can open these files in Band in a Box and the chords will be imported onto the chordsheet To import the chords from a PG Music MIDI file i e a MIDI fle made by Band in 2 Box PowerTracks Pro or some other PG Music programs choose the menu item File Import Chords from MIDI File and select OK to use PG Musie chord names fom MIDI f
126. Mask USUAL SETTING 0 Playback Bar Mask determines on what bars ofthe song the pattem will play The bar numbers are counted relative to the last part marker Bar 1 is the first bar afer a pur marker for example Bar mask setting of O is the default This lets the pattem be pla Other bar mask settings pattem played at odd number bars only 1 3 5 7 9 pattem played at even bars only 2 4 6 8 10 pattem played on 3rd of 4 bar 3 7 1 15 pattem played on 4th of 4 4 8 12 16 20 pattem played on Sth of 5 13 21 pattem played on 6th of 6 14 22 is at any time pattem played on 7h of 8 7 15 23 Patiem played on 3th of 8 8 16 24 9 PRE FILL special value refers to the bar before a fil 10 FILL refers othe har of a fil not applicable to drums because there is a special row for drum fills 1L POST HLL refers to the bar afier a fil same as the first bar after a part marker Drum Fillon Substyle USUAL SETTING Any w Chapter 11 User Programmable unciam This setting is only relevant on the Drum Fill linc It lets you specify if you want the ram B to be used on the substyle the b substyle ar either The default setting is Any Late Triplets usual setting 0 This is only relevant in drum patterns with timebase 12 triplet fel If you want the nd triplet to be played late as is usually done in slow jazz style then set a number from 0 11 Default is O not late at all
127. Music are in a file named pgshorte ti which should be used only by PG Musie you find a chord that Band in a Box wont accept ike Csus2 when it expects C2 instead you can enter this as a single line in shortcut rxt us2 32 without the quotes Band in a Box will then enter the chord C2 if you type in Csus in other words you can type in Csus2 and the program will accept it You can also use it for honus just as dirmaj lcs you type C for CMaj See the file pgshorte x for examples of shortcuts MIDI Chord Recognition Another way of entering chords is through MIDI chord recognition Play any chord on Your extemal MIDI keyboard r MIDI guitar controller and Band in a Box will Tecognize it instantly and insert it omo the chordshest This allows you to enter an entire song without having to type any of the chords I s also a good way to find the right Tame for achod To use his feature select the menu command M Insert current MIDI chord o press the Ciri Return keys The last chord you played on your MIDI keyboard controller will be Caper Bund inox Powertiuide EI alomatically inserted into your song chordsheet or natation view at the current cursor location Then Band in a Box is ready for the next chord You can insert up to two chords per bar in this fashion Erase Chords To erase chords place the highlight ell over top of the chords you would like to erase Press the spacebar once Then move your cursor to the right or
128. S408 Notes about entering chords tis not necessary to type upper or lower case The program wil sort this out for you Any chord may be entered with an alterate root Slash Chord eg CTIE C7 with ps Separate chords with commas to enter 2 chords in a 2 beat cell e g Dm GT New chords added CSh This is at 5 Itis spelled this way to avoid confusion Cres C77 You can now type C 7 for Cm7 ie use the minus sign or C7 9 for C799 Chord Shorteut Keys Spesd up chord entry with these shortcut keys J Maj To type CMaj7 just type CJ I will be entered as CMaj H m05 H stands for Half diminished D dm 25 C4 C69 Ct am Chapt 14 Reterence PG Mu Inc Band in a Box is protected by copyright and is the property of PG Music Inc and its licensors Copyright 1989 2010 PG Musie Ine All rights reserved PG MUSIC INC 29 Cadillac Avenue Victoria BC V8Z 13 Canada Contact info opgmusic com Phone toll free in the United States and Canada 1 800 268 6272 1 888 PG MUSIC 746 8742 Or 1 250 475 2874 tells apply ternational Freephone Service Outside ofthe United States and Canada where available 800 4PGMUSIC 800 4746 5742 Fax toll free in the United States and Canada Ems Universal Phone toll ce in the United States and Canada 1 866 9TECHPG 866 983 2474 Or 1 250 475 2708 tll apply E mail supporti pemusic com L
129. Select the port that your controller is connected to as your MIDI Input and then select QT Music Instruments for your output ports Band in a Box will receive record from a keyboard connected to the MIDI interface but playback and keyboard MIDI Thru will z0 10 the buit Select Ports instruments Molin EXE seta ports tos mes GrMeseinerumens T Pano Car Nase nmen Drums COT Masie neraman Guns AT Masie sumens Soloist THwsehesumems T Strings OT Musie Instruments Melody COT Music Insruments mu OT Music Insituments csinst COT Music Insruments Comon B Cons Inter Application Communication with IAC or Virtual Ports Virtual Ports can be usd to ipe Band in a Box MIDI playback into most CoreMIDI compatible sequencers and oiher MIDI software This means that when you play a song n Band in a Box the MIDI information will be sent to another application rather than directly to a MIDI interface or Apple DLS sofisynth One reason to do this would e to use a third party application as an Audio Unit or VST plug in host An example of such a program is Rax hp www audiofle engineering coma With Band in Box you can either use the BIAB Virtual Poris or the TAC Inter Application Communication bus These are just two different ways of accomplishing came thing To use the LAC bus you first need to enable the TAC driver in the Audio MIDI Setup window MIDI Devices Double click on IAC Driver make sure Device
130. T ia aden of Steinke Medi Technologies Gail Other bad and theis products readers eared ridens albo respective holder and Should bo med sich PATENTS Band in a Box is potest under US Patent S090407 The TC Helicon Hanon festure in Hand inar Box and PowerTracks Pro Audio protected under US Pant 867901 S926 S986198 S4543 2060 173 9 PI9GO3KIO 3 MI 50776 644 395 and patents pending Prin in Canada PG Muscle License Agreement Table of Contents PG Music Inc License Agreement able of Contents Chapter 1 Welcome to Band in a Box What is Bandins Box ank Chapter 2 QuickStart Tutorial Step 1 Enter the Chords 7 Step 2 Choose a Style 5 Siep 3 Play your song u More fun with Band in a Box 12 Chapter 3 Band in a Box 2010 for Macintosh Summary of New Features E New RealTracks PAKS is QuickStm Tutorial 16 Chapter 4 The Main Screen Main Sereen Overview 26 Sus Bur n Synth Window Piano Keyboard n Toolbars E Tite Window Chonkshee Area 36 Chapter 5 Guided Tour of Band in a Box Loading and Playing Songs 3 View and Print Notation a Play the Jukebox E Automatic Songs The Melodist s Make Your Own Songs 56 Chapter 6 Band in a Box PowerGuide Real Tracks m RealDrums n Song Settings s The Chordsheet s Chord Preview Builder 12 MIDI file Chord Wizard 103 Applying Styles 105 Table of Content 2 The StlePicker Playing Pausing and Stopping Songs Chang
131. T you hava a song tal has a shor section Wat doas CAE chords every baat you can redo hat section ofthe song with a beat resolution Include Slash Chords Isc the Chord Wizard will include slash chords ike FTA Bass Part is mainly Walking Bass Fewest Chords Bass Part Type You can st this to Root oly Root third and 5 or Walking Pass Ifyou choose Root Only the Chord Wizard will assume that any bass note ithe root of the chord Choosing Raot 3 5 will cause the Chord Wizard to assume that the Pass pattern is mainly on the root 3 5 ofthe chord Ifyou choose Walking bass it will assume that the bass notes can be changing and can include many notes beside the root Serting the Walking bass line wil likely result in fewer chords overall than setting the Root only option M Allow Sus chords suspended B Allow 7th seventh chords e g C7 C Allow chords with no thirds rock tunes Chords Allowed The sening for Allow Sus chords determines if chords like Csus or Bbsus7 will be included The Allow 7 chords specifies if 7 chords like C7 or Bbm7 would be allowed Simple Rock songs might not have 7 chords or SUS chords Allowing chords with no thirds should be set in a hard rock song or similar song with power chore tht might not contain the 3 of the chords C Lowest bass note is delayed Bass Delay Usually a bas player plays the root
132. V7 Use MIDI Volume for Soloist Wizard Set to ie if you want MIDI velocity information sent to the Soloing Wizard Ifyou have a velocity sensitive MIDI device attached to your computer and you want to contol the dynamics of he Soloist you should enable this feature Trigger Playback Early Sct to true to enable song playback to start before the Soloist has actually completed composing a solo Setting this setting to alse disabled will instruct Band in a Box to completely compose a solo before song playback begins Soloist Prefer Long phrases Set the checkbox to true enabled if you would like the Soloist to use the longest musical phrases it knows Note this option may also inerease Soloist creation times Disable this feature if you are using a slower or low memory equipped computer The Soloist Melodist Velocity Adjust box allows you to quickly boost or reduce the volume of the Soloist r Melodist part relative to the other instrument parts Fora realistic mix they are set slightly louder than he other instrament parts in a song The default is S OK to treat the V Major triad asa VT Since the V chord is usually played as a Tth this son disable it for Rock or Blues songs that use the major tad Reverb 7 Reverb J 7 beton opens the Revert Seting dialog with sudio Reverb reverb settings for Res Tracks and RealDrums Select fom presets apply custom settings and save your own presets in this
133. a group of notes that includes the original note and the semitone or seale tones above and below Umembelished In this before and after Embellished with turn example the C note is replaced ya tur o notes with a zl note a scale tone above the C ma Chapter acarding Tracks Vibrato Vibrato can be added according to the additional vibrato settings available in F T3 DTP vere D UU H Fa 53 uel 91 Dur 32 Uh 1 8 aB Vel 108 Bur 277 Ch 1 J6 12004 1 Modulation Vheel Vibrato Data 15 Ch 1 f 1 mau 1 modutation Wheel vibrate Data 28 Dh 1 J6 5 094 1 Modulation Uheel Vibrato _ Datas 0 th 1 M Laid back feeling to Melody iis providing lite ing There are additional settings in the Embellisher More Additional Settings dialog box Erbelish Additional Setings Vibrato Rate 0 127 a Vibrato Depth 0 127 EJ Only use vibrato if note is this many ticks 145 Duration of Grace Notes Milleseconds 0 Legato setting 55 75 default 65 cI Adjust octave method Dynamic Range 20 100 deaiy aD Ap Legato Setting 55 75 default 65 ES G Gee Cum This allows you to set advanced settings for the Embellisher These include Vibrato Depth This is the amplitude of the vibrato ranging from 0 127 Vibrato Speed This is the speed of the vibrato slow fast range 0 127 Only use Vibrato if Note is this many ti
134. a set of rules that determine how Band in a Box crests musie using your chords By adjusting the rules we have crested hundreds of styles that are appropriate for everything from Country to Bebop Some style examples would be Jazz Swing Blucs Shui Hip Hop Country 4 4 Pop Ballad Waltz and Medium Rock to name just a few I yon dont find a pre made style that suits your tastes create one from serach using the StyicMaker Making custom styles with be StyleMaker is explained in detail in the full documentation Four Fast ways to Open a Style Method 1 From Disk To open a user style from disk you ean just type the F9 key You will be presented with the familiar Macintosh file dialog from which you can select a specifie style from the Styles folder Method 2 The StylePicker You can use the StylePicker window to select your style Select he Style bution above the chordsheet or type CtrieF9 on your computer keyboard Chapter 2 Quickstart Ta D E TET i Selecting a Style using the StylcPicker This window shows styles listed by categories RealStyles are styles entirely made with ReslTracks and RealDruns Styles with RealTracks use a combination of RealTracks and MIDI instruments MulStyles are styles with more variations than the standard a and b substyles Select a Set or genre from the left pane and choose the specifie style on the right pane There are memos and
135. ad in count Lead In even if Intro present F Play Lead In even if Intro present Ma song has an no e usually not necessary to play the 2 bar lead in count There s a new option 1o always omit the lead in i an intro is preset IF you would lke ih lead in ario be played even ifan inro is present in the song aet this cat to OR Landa Type You can specify to have Band in a Box play 2 bars of a drum pair instead ofthe councin You may prefer hearing the drum bent 1o a sirnple eunt in since it provides oreklinmutir dt th peonnin rove Lead in Type v Count in Audible Lead In a substyle fills Instru b pattern then fill Side stick 37 B a pattern then fill Patten 2 bars b pattern 2 bars a pattern 1 3 1234 Chapter Bund io Poweue un To set this choose Pref Count and set Lead in Type to ons of substyle fils substyle fils or fil patiem or pair artem combinations Audible Lead In Volume Use these settings for the audible drum count in You can select any drum instrument for the count in You can choose different count in rhythms eg Tap on 2 and 4 instead of 1234 Instrument Side Stick 37 Pattern 1 3 1234 id Instrument Choose your pick of drum Instruments far the encoun Pattern Choose te pater for your lun count rom the dropdown C Smart Lead In Smart enims an also best here A sr lain avis playing ke contin dum sou
136. ad of the musi it is helpil for the musie to scroll ahead So when the playback is on bar you ll also see bar 5 of the next screen displayed This feature still shows you the curent ar when it is scrolling ahead so it is useful even if you dont read ahead mire Rests The Minimize Rests checkbox when checked will cause Band in a Box to display the music with minimal rests Use this setting if notes are displayed as shorter than you intended For example if eighth notes are displayed as sixteenth notes because you recorded them staccato This is an intelligent option that spaces the Notation to avoid overlapping notation and accounts for space required by accidentals rests ete Tt should normally be set to On The only reason to set it to OR would be to speed up the Notation redraws but then you will se a mathematical spacing which results in overlapped notes in some Situtions Iis only operative in nan editable Notation mode Inserted Note Defaul the Snap to Grid Lines checkbox is checked the inserted note will be lined up with the closest grid line quantized So you dont have to click exactly on the bear o have the nore inserted exactly on the beat Duration is the duration that will be assigned For example if a whole note is inserted with a duration of 80 the note would last 4 8014 3 2 beats The Channel and Velocity settings determine the MIDI channel and velocity of inserted notes
137. adjusts the octave of the part Range is 2 to 2 usually set to 0 Base is usually set to 1 for General MIDI instruments PATCH Range Oto 127 These are General MIDI patch numbers You do not type in the patch numbers of your synthesizer The patch map handles mapping of the General MIDI patch numbers to your non GM synthesizes patch numbers VOLUME Range 0 to 127 Typical volume setting is 90 us Chapter Banda Hos Povetuide REVERB Range Oto 127 Typical setting 40 CHORUS Range of Oto 127 Typical setting PAN Panning refers to the left right stereo placement Range is hard righi A setting of O is centered C Harmon Harmony Channels 3 hard le t0 64 Press ihe Harmony button to launch the Harmony Channels dialog box Melody HarmonyB T Melody Harmony 12 ThruHamony8 13 Setting the Harmony Channels Melody Harmony Channel A Always uses the Melody channel Melody Harmony Channel 8 Default 11 Melody Harmony Channel Default Thru Harmony Channel A Always uses the Thru channel Thru Harmony Channel B Defaut 13 Thra Harmony Channel C Default 14 Band in a Box already uses 7 channels Bass Drums Piano Guitar Strings Melody and Thra chanel Adding these 4 harmony channels produces potentially 11 channels of information If you have a modem module that receives on all channels then you can use these defaults Older modules capabl
138. aid back Transpose The Transpose setting lets you adjust the Notation window to display notes either higher or lower ihan their actual pitches It includes presets for commonly transposed instruments with the option to make your own setting in semitones For example if you select Guitar 12 the guitar musie will be displayed an octave higher which isthe way guitar music is normally notated Clef Split at The Clefs Split at setting determines the split point for placing notes on the Bass ar Treble clef The default setting is CS whieh is middle C For example you can use a higher split point such as C6 if you want some notes up to a G above middle C to be displayed on the bass clef with edger lines instead of on the eble clef Ifthe split point is above middle C and a noe in the musie is high enough that any of the ledger lines above the bass clef would overwrite the treble clef the note will be placed on the treble ef Chord Vert Pos The chord vertical position affects the printout not the disp how high the choris will be printed above the staff Iset 10 5 the chords will be written 5 notes above the top ofthe Staff i S notes above the F at high DJ your pisce contains a lot of high notes then set the chord position to a high setting If you re using a big font e g 32 point musie font size you should set the chord height to a los value 1 ar 2 so it won t be too high and encroach on the staff above
139. almost M Speed up Generation of RealTracks This specdup feature works automatically you should just notice that generation of RealTracks is much faster This feature uses CPU resources during playback If you have a multi core machine you may not potice this at all since it will use different cores hun the main Band in a Box thread Ifyou have an old machine low on memory slow hard drive ete you can disable this speedup feature This will insure that your machine is doing less CPU work during playback This is done in RealTracks Settings dialog Soloist generated RealTracks are now saved with the song o you will bear the ReslTracks play the same solo when you reload the song When you generate a solo using ReslTacks Band in Box will remember this and when you go to save the song Band in a Box will ask you if you want to save that solo fand thereby freeze the Soloist track If you say yes then the solo will play instantly the same way when the song is reloaded Of course you can freeze the soloist track yourself tan time Note that only one solo can be saved You can t generate a bunch of different segments of solos only the last one will be saved Shots Holds and Pushes ReafTracks now support new features including Shots Holds and Pushes Simply type in the chords as you normally would adding periods for shots and holds and the RealTracks will play them Note Vou need the met for
140. als on the relative major For example in key of Am Am is either the Im chord or the Vim chor Save Button on main sereen works as Save As The Save button will launch the file dialog where the location and name ofthe file being saved can be changed Name MIDI files with MID extension This will append the file extension MID to MIDI files dan preficing them with SMF Standard MIDI File Allow larger fonts on Chordsheet Display larger fonts particularly with higher sereen resolution Color for Chordsheet Area Make your choice from a list of colors for the chondsheet area The keystrokes Ciri ShifttC will toggle through the colors from the main sereen without opening the Preferences 2 dialog Help Tags Help tags are short messages that appear if you leave the mouse pointer hovering over an interface element fora few seconds When the pointer leaves the object the tag vanishes ihe mouse pointer is not moved the operating system hides the help tag afier about 10 seconds Use these settings to enable help tags and to set the delay time in mS before a tag opens Normalize MIDI velocities to performing live or at a jam session it helps to have the volume of all of the songs be similar With the Normalize MIDI velocities feature you can level the volumes na Setting you enter For example you can set all volumes to be 70 and the program will make each song play within those levels Normalization for th
141. am Explanation of the pattern lengths 8 4 2 and 1 beat You may ask Why would I need to have different pattern lengths in a style Whenever Band in a Box encounters a chord change in a song it will begin to playback a new pattem starting at the beginning of the pattern It firsts scans the chord to see how ong that chord is going to lat without a chord change For example le look at these choris Mom 1267 C6 3FMAIT 4 These chonds are in substyle a7 When Band in a Box is playing back your style it starts by ooking at the Dm chord and counts that it lasts four beats before the next chord change to a G7 chord It then looks to the style that you have created and sees if you have any patterns created inthe A 4 beat line if so you will get an appropriate pattern that you have recanded far chords lasing four beat Note iE you dont want to casa patterns according ata method Wont worn you ca ust recor aliaf your patterns onthe A8 beat ine When Bandn e Box sees tha you haven t any 4 beat pattems t wil choose an eight beat pattem and than only use the fst four beats oft Then when Band in a Box encounters the G7 chord it sees that it lasts two notes before the next chord change So Band in a Box will look fr any A 2 beat pattems There is tremendous advantage to being able to record different length pattems Eight beat paterns might be blank for the first four bets for example a situation that c
142. ame and location for the file save The Save button opens the Assign Instruments and Harmonies to Song dialog where custom patches harmonies and other settings can be permanently saved with the song Use this button to Start End DAW plug in mode and choose options such as Allow Drag and Drop In plug in mode Band in a Box is reduced to a small window and acts as a plug in for your favorite DAWisequencer The MID button allows you to make a Standard MIDI File and save ito disk as a file with extension MID Type 0 and Type 1 MIDI files are Supported or you can also choose to save the song as a Karaoke file withthe RAR extension This is the Render to WAV file button which will convert render your MIDI arrangement to an audio wave file I includes a batch render feature to Audo convert an entice folder of songs in a single operation Transport Controls These buttons are like the transport controls on a CD player o a media player Pceomi ee Par das Repay Sep faust From Fi its pueri ocr rmi ml er he Chgier 4 The Main Sereen Loop plays the selected highlighted section ofthe chondsheet in a loop Replay plays the song from the beginning without creating a new arrangement Stop button stops the song or the Jukebox from playing Pause button pauses the song during playback From button is used to play a song stating anywhere in the song incl
143. an it paa ec ase Troe oF voce Lng Aen oneris use macro notes Dern CENE F rps ton ten mana ch Har cae ge Cem Payre nanes rewon layback Weight usual sening 5 Set this number higher lower if you want the pater to be played moreiess often than the other pattems on the same row This number is also displayed on the main StyleMaker A setting of9 always is a special scing that instructs the pattern to always be played instead of the other pattems on the same row These pattems always have other options specify the times that this pattern would be eligible to be played layback Bar Mask usual setting 0 Playback Bar Mask determines on what bars ofthe song the pattem will play The bar numbers are counted relative to the last part marker and range from 1 3 Bar 1 is the first bar afier a part marker for example Other bar mask stings patem played at odd number bars only 1 3 5 7 9 pattem played at even bars only 2 4 6 8 10 pattem played on 3rd of 4 bar 3 7 11 15 pattem played on 4h of 4 4 8 12 16 20 cd on th of 5 13 21 pattem played on 6th of 6 14 23 pattem played on Sth of 8 8 16 24 Special bar masks 1 PRE FILL special value refers to the bar before a fil 2 FILL refers tothe bur of example 3 POST FILL refers to the bar after a fill same as the first bar after a part marker layback Beat Mask usual setting 0 Set the beat mask to a beat from 1
144. ant to change he feel ofthe song s melody or auto reduccfexpand the chord durations when the styles change Muto Change MEL SOL When a new style is previewed patches appropriate to the new style aet loaded in if you have selected Auto Change Melody Soloist Patch So when you lad in a Chopin Piano Style the Melody patch of your song will change to Plano This allows the song to blend in with the new style review on Double Gk ps rn teu song in the new style Other Options Check this checkbox to play the selected song as soon as you press OK M Selected Style Defaults to Current Style seicct his option and when you choose a style with the song playing it will switch to the new style and continue playing F Play when chosen M Prototype Style Defaults to Current Style v tis option is checked the prototype style will be the style atis currently assigned to the song m Chapter Bands Povetuide List Management This adats the cumcnly selected style t the list of Favorite Add Favorite sles Favorites tave a leitar F beside their name in he left Colum GEI Ss Tist they also appear in the Favorite Styles dialog EAEE setn aeea ny ea rice Ifyou have added new styles 1o Band in a Box or edited the Re Buld BAW LST Ae ie SyePcker Re Bud ution wl pte p WIRT Tis sop te Solet toe diyom ean thn be Print
145. any melody will be embellished as it is played so that you hear a livelier and more elise melody and ife differat every time The Melody Embellisher feature is tumed on and off by the f Emb Embciisher checkbox on the main sereen The Melody Embellisher senings are accessed during playback with the embellisher grace note button on the main sereen or from the Melody Embellish Melody during playback menu item Embe The Melody Embellisher only functions during playback If enabled the melody that plays will be embellished You ll sce the embellished melody on the notation as the melody plays so you can sce the embellished notes When Stop is pressed the notation reverts to the original unembellished melody The embellishment changes timing of notes durations velocities legato as well as adding grace notes additional notes and turns Here is a before and after example that Shows a typical embellishment o a melody 10 Chapter 9 Recording Traci i Embellished Melody 9j 10 As you can see in the notation examples the embellished melody adds anticipation in bar 9 and in bar 10 adds extra notes and timing changes to spice up the melody Using the Embellisher Memb sika e Mg tts iy dones here Melody Eni dialog This alow yon to Make a particular embellishment permanent The Melody Enbellisher dialog is launched from the Melody Emhellish Melody Dialog menu item Contro
146. ar The song then jumps to the Tag Begin at Bar and plays until Tag Ends After Bar At the end ofthe tag the song then plays a 2 bar ending as usual sau 8 Tal ca ds ke adopts t en ung Yuan cali Fs St he ar edn n Ties nine Snel it 2 bur appended tod dog Topica cepit detiene ote Auto Endings 1f you ve made a siyle and haven t included an ending a 2 bar ending can be generated auiomatcaly based on the style Fadeout ending bars You can quickly choose a fadeout ending Just press the Fade button and Band in a Box fade out the last X bars of the song you can specify how many bars Or customize the faut with precise values for each bar Fadeout ending bars o Fade Solos should have a bluesy fec Check this setting for solos with more syncopation ttd thirds and seventh Generates a new arrangement and plays the song Stop Stop playback with this command or the ese key Hold Pause Pauses the song Repeating his command resumes play from the exact location where the song was paused lay From Bari Choose a chorus and bar to play Bom in the curent arrangement Prts are not regenerated Use this command during playback to jump to any bar in the song lay From Current When the song is stopped this command starts playback again at the ar withthe highlight ce Go Open and Play Launches a file dialog for selection of an
147. ard sets the Volume ofthe current instrument and the Tange isthe same range as the piano 0 to 127 i e a click on the bottom C sets a value of 0 and the top B is value 127 pam itineron mam onat Choose an instrument bas drumspiana gutarlstringsimelody and then use BET be TONE contralto adjust the tone from 18 maximum bass to 18 maximum treble Default is 0 The settings are saved withthe song Audio Reverb There is a Reverb control for individual tracks with Real Tracks or RealDrums so you can easily add reverb 0 to 127 for any RealTrack Reverb type is also settable and Saved with the song m Chapter Bands Powerade At the top of the sereen there is an A REV Audio Reverb contral Click on an instrument radio button and then set the Audio Reverb fori Note that this only applies to ReafTracks since MIDI tracks have MIDI Reverb which is set via a REV contro The Audio Reverb varies from 0 to 127 Adjust the value by clicking a key on the on sereen plano keyboard Or right click or conrl click the contro to enter a value Those is also a feature hat automatically adds reverb to RealTracks according to instrument type No Reverb is added to Bass for example but most instruments get reverb This feature defaults to on but you can tum it off in Real Tracks Settings or Reverb Setting dialog B Auro add Reverb to ResITracks Strength 100 You just want more or less added you can adjus
148. ari then you might want to tell Band in a Box not to change the ular positions ofthe notes that it finds Normally you d want to set OR to change existing guitar channels to true Pres TOR to generate the Guitar Chord Solo You ll now see a message box confirming that a chord solo has been added Message Guitar Chord Solo written successfully There were 279 notes on the track and with the chord solo there are now 643 Playing the Guitar Chord Solo The playback will begin automatically and youl se the guitar voicings on the guitar neck For example at Bar the chord is a Ci and Band in a Box has voiced a Bb melody note with a note guitar voicing of Bb E C and G Tcu aio RTT This particular solo will be played in a single position because those are he parameters ofthis particular guitarist Other Guitarists will play ina range of positions eg Guitarist 1 or in open position e g Guitarist 8 As you listen to the solo youl notice the following 1 Some ofthe notes are left as melody and some are assigned to chords 2 Wide varieties of guitar chords are used including some advanced chords Al of them are popular chords played by real guitarists there are no theoretical chon 3 The chords are strummed to simulate a real guitar player 4 The Truck Type for the Melody has been set to Guitar and the MIDI file will be saved with the Guitar Chann
149. armonst feature This feature generates a chord progression in the chosen genre based only on the melody The idea of ihe Reharmonist is to generate a completely new chord pro melody in a genre that you choose Jaz Country etc This ignores any existing chords in the song Chords for a Whole Song This example uses the melody of Bach s Brandenburg Concerto 1 in F Ist movement but you could use the melody of any song you choose ession fora IJ Press the Re Harm button to open the Select Re Harmonis dialog and A choose Whole Song am 9 Whole Song You could also use Windows Auto Generate Chord Reharmonization oe Deselect Show All and then select the Bossa Nova Latin penre s oko ids due showall Sle vertes Chapter 12 Wizards Tutors and Les us Note that the program has analyzed the melody and decided that the key should be F this is independent of any key that was already set in the song Ce Analysis shows the correct key s likely Now press OK Reharmonize a You will then have an entire chord progression written forthe song ina Bossa Nova style The Chord Progression generate is different every time so the one that you get will be dierent from this one T Tuy 3er TE Gm an Om ius DTS ET Pap L woo c m cr Dow on ie m Play the file that you have genera
150. artially or fully Show styles If Feel Matches Prototype If Feel and Tempo Match Prototype Use the Disk amp filter to view only the styles from one styles set disk rz 7 74 Nashville Rock Multistyles Category List Use the Category list on the left o select a style category Jazz Pop ste Jora style set Click on the list to choose Style List Once chosen you ll se the list of styles available in that category or styl set You ll sce the name of the style and the file name for the style RealStyles are Styles made exclusively with RealTracks while Styles with RealTracks have bath ReslTracks and MIDI tracks MultiStyles have additional style variations Memo and Examples Click on a style to see a memo for the song a list of sangs that could be played using that style and the suggested tempo range Double click on the style name to exit the dialog and load the style E 1f you have added new styles to Bands then you can re ecbu oues Crane This allows you to print the styles list I copies the list to the ili clipboard Then you open up your favorite word processor like Worl for Mac or BB Edin Inside your word processor select File Print and print the lst Chapter Si Guided Tou of Banda Box The Scarch button helps you ind data in any of he fcd C Search m T Frame the song Here we aye selected ar on toe e fst arf he 1 32 3 dee
151. at certain instruments hold a chord sustained fora certain number of burs For example you can have the bass and piano hold a chord sustained while he drums continue to play a pattern A chord is HELD by adding 3 periods after the chord C n indicates a C chord that isa HELD In these examples bar 1 has a normal chord and bar 2 has a chord with a break on it x rest shot or held chord Chapter Band ios Povertiuide 2 bars of C chord no break on bar 2 This is the usual situation without any break Note that the piano plays rhythmically on bar Reston bar 2 Tuis rests the instruments until the c next chord on the chondsheet The Test is typed in as a C chord followed by one period A shot is put on bar 6 The shot plays a staccato C chord on bar 6 and then Tests until the next chord on the chondsheet The shot is typed as a C chord followed by two periods H held chord on bar 10 The chord on bar 10 is held sustained until the next chord on the chor sbeet The held chord is typed in as a C followed by three periods e n Breaks for only some instruments You can specify that some instruments not be affected by the bre The for the instruments are B for Bass oded names D for Drums P for Piano G for Guitar S for Sings To exempt instruments add their letters following the break Typing Cbd d EI bd will puta rest on all instruments EXCEPT the bass and dr
152. at you know bow much fn iti to play music with Band in a Box you ll be pleased to see how easy it is to make songs of your own This section shows you how to make a new song with step by step instructions from sta to finish Start with a clean sheet Use cither the menu command File New or Edit Clear Lead sheet or the keystrokes Cond N to blank the chordsheet Name the song Enter the title of the song by clicking in the title ares Da aee to We ea Fpl e2sav STY Jazz Sung Sy Select the Key won sx s Click on the key select ist and change the key of your song c instantly Click on YES to the OK to transpose Lead sheet prompt and Band in a Box will automatically transpose the entire Db D s Eb E Gb ype in the chords The choris ye vill emer are F far 1 2 a ber Bb far 172 cA a bar and C7 fora bar Mouse click on the first cell in the chordsheet and type in the chord symbol The chord name will appear in the chord box Pres the return key to enter the chord on he chonisheet and advance the chond cell Y bar To enter two chords in a chord cell type the chord names separated by a comma eg fbb Continue until the song is complete This song will have no intro and the chorus will be 32 bars long The chondshect we want to end up with will look something like this Copying and pasting a sect Since many songs repeat the same
153. atically figures out the chords from audio files such as MPA MAA AIFF WAV and CD audio The Pref button will bring up a Preferences dialog where you can set Pref various settings and access program options Clogier The Maia Sereen Perio aein Prewuee mem ivessune e GN Y tavtotaer e d pon Aus This buon sends out an ll notes off message to your MIDI or software synthesizer I functions as a panic button to stop a hung or stuck note This apens up the pgmusic com website to the page with video tutorials for earning Band in a Box Opens the Band in a Box PDF manual which isin the Manuals folder When playing songs in the Jukebox this arrow will jump back to the previous song in the list The Jukebox plays a folder of songs according to the specified options The JukeBox button is used to start ar stop the Jukebox When playing songs in the Jukebox this arrow will jump ahead t the next song in the list This button resets General MIDI devices by sending a GM mode On message and then setting up the Band in a Box patches This lunches a Finder folder in the current song folder You can open up songs by double clicking on songs from the finder This apens the previous song in the folder in alphabetical order This apens the next song in the fo
154. ave rst You will notice the grid of vertical lines that indicates where th notes will be placed This song is in Jazz Swing so Band in a Box has automatically set the grid resolution to swing triplets 3 grid lines per beat This resolution can be changed in the Natation Window Settings dialog but Band in a Box should set it o the correct value based upon the seyle that is currently in use For example when a style is a Bossa Nova the division will be sixteenth notes since Bossa Nova is an even rhythm not a triplet feel rhythm To inser Move the mouse to the location that you want Ifyou want Beat 1 move to the first dotted line in the bar Click on the staf over the note that you want The Current Note box in the toolbar will give you the name ofthe note that you re on Clic with the mouse button to insert the note To insert a SHARP hold down the SHIFT key as you click the note To insert a FLAT hold down the CONTROL key as you Toinserta NATURAL bold down the 8 key as you click the note lc the note How long does the note last that T insert Band in a Box uses an intelligent auto duration feature to determine how long the note should be A note that is put in will initially have a duration of 2 bars 2 whole notes When the next note is put in say 2 beats later Band in a Box will shorten the duration of the previous note to just shorter than 2 beats This means that y
155. ballad loaded with an Acoustic Bass RealTracks at a tempo of 60 and you speed up the tempo to 140 and press Ply button Band in a Box will automatically choose an Acoustic Bass RealTracks closer to the tempo of 140 if it is the same genre and feel This means you can use a simple Jazz style and play it at various empos without having to set the best RealTracks based on tempos The RealTracks that suppor the Tempo Swapping are listed in the next to last column ofthe RealTracks Assign dialog For example if we loadin a Ballad Jazz style like _BALFRED Style O Combo sass O Piano O Drums O Guitar C EEUU kearah Bass Acoutio Jazz Balad Sw 085 we can sce that the name of the Bass RealTracks style has a tilde symbol at the beginning That indicates that t conl be changed toa different Real Tracks at a higher tempo Now let s increase the tempo af he sang to a higher tempo like 113 O Combo Ome O Piano Q Drums aan g We will see that the name of the RealTracks switches to a different Real Tracks suitable for tempo 110 So when you press Play button you ll hear the RealTracks closest to your tempo without having to do anything to make this happen C Auto RealTracks substitution based on tempo you don t want this feature to happen automatically then set Auto RealTracks substitution based on tempo to false Then if you have similar RealTracks available at different tempos Band in a Box will simply tell you ther
156. bers Ifyou use a custom patch map it will handle the conversion to your syah s non GM patch numbers always enter GM patch numbers for the favore instruments A Favorite Combo is a group of patch changes 1 for each part that are sent out as a batch when you send one of the combos Faronte instruments Use General Midi Instrument 9 s E Can not your synth patch sr Edit Drum Kit Note Values you have been unable to find a preset drum map that matches your synths drum notes then you may need to type in the drum note that your sound source uses To do this you need 10 hook your MIDI controller up to play the Drum sounds iom the Keyboand Play up and down the keyboard to hear all the drum sounds Locate note 36 as a starting point Type the MIDI note numbers for the various instruments as you find them on your drum machine or keyboard SaveLoad MIDI Setup Drum Kit lows you to save different custom MIDI setups or load in preset or custom setups Send Sys Ex File isa command that sends SysEx information to your MIDI device Style Aliases Let s say you have a new style for jazz called Dizzy You can create an alias so that when Band in a Box looks for a Jazz Swing style it will oad in Dizzy instead o you have to make changes to all your songs And when you have found a new favorite change the alias You can also load or save sets of Alias files and share them To make an alias click
157. blank b to insert at beginning This will insert blank bans into the Melody tack Remember that Band in a Box normally has a 2 bar lead in count I your MIDI file has no lead in then you ll need to Set this to 2 to compensate for the 2 bars of lead in Include notes early by 120 ppq you re reading in a MIDI file starting at bar 5 it would be annoying to haye a note that was played I tiek earlier than bar 5 left out of he MIDI file that is read in To include it ou can set this and the note will be read in Include continuous controllers and pitch bend Patch changes Select the items you want to include when the track i imported Merge with existing data on Track You can choose to merge the imported data with your existing Melody tack Record using The Melodist There s always the option to let Band in a Box do it all by writing an original melody with ts Melodist feature I will do this ver the chond changes you enter in the chordsheet or it will generate its own changes far whatever style you select from the Melodist dialog This feature is useful for stimulating ideas for creating instant songs for sight reading exercises to demonstrate different musical styles or far background music Additional Options for Melody Soloist Track Manipulation of melodies is done with functions like insert delete bests time shift rack copy melody from bar to bar ete Press Option to Copy Chords and or Melody over a range of bars
158. blem Just lick on the View ches button and up pops your numbered patch list is Remember that as win al ther Band ina Box pat iunctione you uae he General MIDI Fs for the istumentregarsss ofthe synt you are using Fi Patches To fill the patch boxes with your current patch settings press the Fil This saves you having to select the patches o save with songs Zeros atches uon Click on this button to clear all patch changes then no patch changes will occur Frozen This will set the track into a ren state where it gets saved with the specifie arrangement and won t get overwritten by Band in a Box You can still edit the frozen track Use the JAN buon to set all tracks to Frozen The None button set all tracks to not frozen normal Save Settings for uk Chapter Bandi os Povertiuide Other parameters that can be saved volume reverb et are shown on the right side of he window F Save all settings with Songs You can save all senings including patches by selecting Save all settings with Songs Uncheck this box to customize the settings that are saved with the song Storing Volume Reverb Panning Chorus and or Bank Settings You can optionally save these MIDI controller settings with your songs You can make for example a song with the piano a litle quieter than usual add reverb to the melody panch or pan the bas o one side ete Simply choose the parameters you
159. bstitutions throughout the varous a sections while preserving the identical melodies Number of Variations to Choose From Defui 15 As the Melodist is determining what type of phrase to generate it will narrow the possibilities to the number of variations set in this variable Setting a higher number Tests in more interesting melodies but the chord progressions are more unusual Tempo Range Deiat om 110 to 180 bpm The Tempo Range setting determines the tempo range that the tune will be created with Git will be a random tempo in the range The auto tempo setting must be set on the Melodist Selection sereen for the tempo range ta work Transpose A2 Section Deft 30 In songs with an AABA form it is common for the second a section to be transposed For example the first a section might be in the key of Eb and the second would be transposed upto the key of Gb Melodiss store these settings and some Meliss are set to transpose the A2 sections This setting determines tbe Ys chance that the song will be generated with a transpose The transpose will be usually 2 3 or 4 semitones The song ill only be transposed if the A2 transpose setting isn t set to none on the Melodist Selection sereen Anticipations in Phrases Deft 20 Melodic phrases often begin a little before the beat this is referred to as an anticipation This setting determines what of the phrases will be anticipated Always Use This
160. c a melua Best Chords 200 Best Chords ifnothing else 5 Good chords Advanced Chords Unusual Chords Barre chords Lenny B Chds CloseVoice Open Strings Naver M Orte use chords wih We F noter 2notes 100 4motes 100 Snows 100 X notes 100 6 notes 10 OK to use chords with this of Notes You can selest the of notes far chords to be included in the chord solo In the example above chords with 2 6 notes wil be included Tens OOOO UOO Embellish how often 100 Embollish types 7th hs eas 7 Embellishment types allow sening of the types of embellishments to do Pop Guitarists should be set to use Mhs only This will change C7 chords to C9 and Cm7 to Cri The Tis bs seting should be used for Jazz This adds the embellishments of C to Cmaj and Cm to Cm7 The 710 11 13 embellishment should be used for Advanced Jazz Guitarists and add 1 iths and 13ths voicings you make changes to the Guitarist settings you need to manually prie caring thee sdf 5 por individual Guitarists can be copied pasted com import ported or imported to from dii CD Gaon Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions Chapter 12 Wizards Tutors and Utilities Audio Chord Wizard Chords from MP4 This amazing wizard automatically figures out the chords fom any MPS EJ Sia AIFF or other audio file and displays them in Band
161. cal drum programming screen grid Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions w Are allways entered as bar pattems longer pattems may be chained together using BAR MASKS deseibed below The drum pattems ae entered ftom the drum screen in 4 sections these 4 sections appear when you click on the drum bution A Faem tetesoos Fae iter Erden is A pattems This row is for 1 bar drum patterns for the a substyle B patterns This row is for I bar drum patterns for the b substyle Fils T isrowis for 1 bar drum pattems forthe a subst Endings This row is for endings Endings are 2 bars 2 patterns of I bar each If you ve made a style and haven t included an ending a 2 bar auto cading an be generated automatically based on the style ip W you are making a simple siye you oly need io vse the Top raw T pater Bass Pi Are played in real time from a MIDI keyboard MIDI guitar ete by clicking on Rec or typing r with the cursor placed onthe fist dot af the A or B section of the desired instrument starting with Beat Are played in based on a C7 chord C E G Bb though all 12 notes may be used The pattems for Bass Pano GuitarStings are classified by he length ofthe pattem Le the number of notes that the chord lasts without a change f chond Click on the Piano Guitar Strings buttons 1o tog between each instrument s A B recording sections Yo
162. ck Beat Mask A Pushed Patems 203 Pushing Patiems ReslDrums in styles ReslTracks in styles Relative Weight Roman Numeral Mask 200 Selecting a Style to Edit Soloists in styles styles with ReatTracks Time Signatures timing offe Transpose Down Limits Voice Leading Riff based Smooth volume offset StylePicker asterisk symbol caret symbol choosing styles MultiStyles prototype RealStyles rebuild i styles with RealDrums styles with RealTracks third party styles Styles abou applying Ser dad previous LS3 files selecting Styles menu Styles with RealDrums Styles with RealTracks substitutions 94 n 02 aw n n n 2 57 208 189 189 205 205 195 0 190 n D 206 207 207 207 190 107 109 109 109 109 us D m 109 108 m Subst Changing Technical Support tempo Tempo Change at bar n Thru harmony Taru pan Thru velocity boo Tis Tide window Tone conta Toolbars mack ype Trademarks Transport Controls iriton substinntion Tutorial CoreMIDI and QuickTime Unti User menu User Setings vibrato voicing 213 Volume Allowing Changs Changes window ie Windows menu Wizard playing recording Wizard play long o n E 100 E 40 138 D D a a 31 254 m ES ns zs n 185 253 D E E E 30 m m Registration Form Please register your program Registering your PG Musie software en
163. cks instruments and Sce http www pemosie com products ealrcks hm for the latest releases RealDrums The ReslDnums feature replaces MIDI drums with udo drums cord iy op sio arare tesiores Why do ReslDrams sound better than MIDI Drums The RealDrums are recordings of top studio drummers playing multi bar patterns MIDI dms are patterns based on single drum hits being programmed typically on a quantized grid of what people assume drummers are typically playing We record drummers at multiple tempos so the playing you hear at various tempos is also musically different not just sped up Drummers play different types of fills ete at slowerffaster tempos and these are captured with RealDrums Technical nate V inierested you cam ave whch tampos have Baen recorded by loiig the Bandi BawDrums feider for e parteular style you ara interested n Chapter 6 Band in a Box PowerCie z Those are several ways to hear RealDrums with new or existing Band in a Box songs RealDrums can be added 10a single song or substituted for MIDI drums in existing styles We provide many styles that already have ReslDrums These styles can be identified by te style name beginning with a minus sign For example ZZIAZZ Style is a version of the Z21AZZ Style that uses RealDeums Let s Explore the Real Drums The RealDrms button on the toolbar opens the RealDrums Picker Let s load in some ReilDrums tunes
164. conflict with he new chord merely stop playing instead of changing to new notes Use Guitar Harmony Voicings This harmony type uses real guitar chand voicings that display correctly on the guitar fretboard Seting the Use Guitar Harmony Voicings checkbox means that guitar chond Nolcings will be used instead of any other voicings specified in the Harmony Maker Check out Harmony 32 1 Pass for an example of this The Soloist Maker This module allows you to define your own soloists For example ets say you want to create a soloist in a style similar to John Coltrane the preat Jazz saxophonist The Soloist Maker allows you to define the parameters essential to a solos playing such as instrument range Le tenor saxophone ext legato playing playing more on tap ofthe beat than most jazz musicians and playing straighter Sth notes than usual swing Sh In addition you can set phrasing options such as how long the phase should be and ov much space to eave between phrases You can also set how outside the playing should be In the case ofa John Coltrane style you set that to the maximum Then tum it loose and hear the soloist play over any song 10 easy steps to make a Soloist Bring up the Soloist window by pressing the Sola Button or Stift X Selecta blank apot in your Ist af soloist ana press de Sola Make EA button 3 Insert the title of your soloist and any memo note you wish to add The Num fie
165. d by the highlighted instrument button In the diagram you ll notice that the Piano is the current instrument Clicking the mouse on a different instrument button wil change the instrumens The StyleMaker begins by displaying the Drums and Buss Lets have a closer ook at the Drums The ZZLITROK Style Drums sereen wil lok similar to this A Faem esesse2y Fie 35552618 Eede ii You will notice that there are 4 rows of drum pattems A Pattern is the row to recond drum pattems for the i subse B pattern is the row to record forthe are recorded on the Fills row Endings are recorded on the Endings row 2 consecutive pattems of 1 bar Ifyou ve made a style and haven t included an ending a 2 bar ending based on the style ean be generated automatically Lets hav A Patter 55555229 Eachofthe numbers represents a drum pattern that has been already recorded There are 8 patterns that have been recorded on this inc The numbers themselyes are called weights The weights can be from 11 8 a weight of is a special case explained below Most af the patiems have weights of 5 which is the default Assigning a higher or lower weight will cause that pattern o be played more or less often relative to the substyle loser look at the A Pattern row Chater 11 User Programmable Functions 195 ler patiems The 2 pattems with a weight of 2 will be played less often than the puters with wei
166. dd in the piano for 4 bars and then add in the entire band for the rest of the song You may optionally disable the Tests in the middle or final choruses where people are likely taking solos and rests are not appropriate Shot You can specify certain instruments play a shot where the chord is played and then a rest follows Far example the song Rock Around The Clock has a shot on beat 1 followed by a rest for seven beats Hold Chora You can specify that certain instruments hold a chord sustained for a certain number of bars For example you can have the bas and piano hold a chond sustained while he drums continue to play a pattern Pedal Bass Fedal tess Benza Jon e P De You can enter podal bass with any chord For example if you are in the key of F and would like to pedal on a C note for 2 bars an an Fin chord then type in the settings as above This will play the rhythm specified in this case the pattem will play on beat 2 and Other options are No Pedal Buss Beat 2 and 4 Octaves Beat 1 und 3 Slow Tempos Whole Note and Eighth Notes Clear A The Clear All button erases all rests shots pushes and el bus iom a song Copying and Pasting a Section of Chords Copying a section of chords is done in a manner similar to copying text in a word processor Highlight the area you would like to affect and select the desired action s fom the EDIT menu See below for additional detail
167. de the entire track ahead or behind T Humanize Slides a y Su by the of ticks 120 ticks per Bass E bean mu g ag If you set bass 3 the bass Pano z player will play 3 ticks early 2 throughout the song Default 0 su z Musically useful range is 10 to Stings 2 in Melody 2 Update Soloist o Defauts Zeros_ Sening these numbers will slide the emire track ahead or behind by the of ticks 120 ticks per beat You could far example slide the bass rack so it plays a litle ahead of Be rest of the band This hus the effect of making the bass player drive the band and is useful in Jaz styles to make the musie sound more exciting Allow Any Slides you want the slides to occur then check this box Humanize Slides his box is checked the slides will be randomized to slide the track a different amount for cach note The amount varies fromm D ticks to the slide setting for the instrument A rack that always plays notes early by a certain amount tends to sound out of ime whereas randomizing the slide makes the track sounds more human M he song is currently playing you can press the Update Update button to hear any changes you have made This retums all fields to factory default settings The deu Defaults settings are as shown in the illustration This enters a value of zero for all fields Chapter 6 Hand ina PowerCuide un Song Memo A red border ar
168. de E if Rear sive not fon us ther aaDrums sie gt Diete eo eee rige enn TI z Use IF RealDrums style not found use other RealDrums style to replace RealDrums styles that you don t have i havent purchased yet with ones that you do hav This feature also has a range of settings from 1 to 5 I set to 1 almost all missing styles will be substituted If set to 5 only RealDrum styles that match the style perfectly will be substituted Technical note Thea panuse d Wax ie conais Wis Taur ReslDrums For Individual Songs Individual songs can have RealDrums added to them Fer tn ong ony see Mearan ie YS ci RD Click on the RD button to select a specific RealDrums style for a particular song This will lunch the RealDrums Pieker with ist of RealDrums styles F or this song choose different variations with each play For this song choose different Avarlations with each play When this is set if you save a specifie style with a song you ll hear a new variation of that style cach time you press PLAY with different drum instruments Developer Mode Only set this when you are a developer making a RealDrums style and want to see additional debug information such as the Applications Band in a Box drumaudioresults txt file and messages about errors in the style fi Hi Res Quality at alfapeed When selected RealDrums will use a higher quality more CPU intensive method to play
169. dialog Chapter 6 Bond iB Poweue un Micu e Preset Name fanina tox Deuter V Deta saap Trand in a Boc Dela Ree Ss a a se jue f 100 j e t 7 m x so D 3 E 6 E ar PreDeiay Decay LF lle HF Rolo Density Hh Auto Ad Rover toReTracke Strength 100 Save as Deliun Revera Tenore Defeats Ee You can enable disable the audio reverb If you disable i this will save some CPU cycles so this might he advisable on an older slower machine if you hear that the audio is clicking or not keeping up V cick on the green Selecta Preset button to apen the list of presets This list wilt sow only the Band in a Box Default Reverb unl you save some presets of your own AE S _ 2 Default Lo am 00 0 0 0 0 As you adjust the setings they will be applied to the current song The Swap fault button toggles between your curent settings and the default settings This allows you to hear the effet of the changes you make to the settings C aan OO Use the row of oom buttons to load typical settings for different types of spaces These buttons are a convenient way either to apply a particular effect or to load setings that you can then tweak to make your own preset Cm Room Wed Room large Room J Hai JC Nem Reverb Parameters Pre Delay is the time delay of first reflections Decay is the time it takes for reve
170. dialog These dialogs allow you to specify the number of bars to copy or erase the locaton to copy to and the option to copy or erase the Chords Melody andor Soloist Intra Bars Auto Generate This command will launch the Generate Chords for Intro or Remove Intro dialog where you can specify the characteristics ofthe intro you wish to generate Clear Lead sheet blanks the chordshcet and restores the default song settings Insert Measure s inserts a certain of bars into the chordshect Delete Measure s removes a certain of bars from the chondsheet Shrink cuts chord durations by 50 cg 4beats gt gt 2heats 2beatessl beat Expand doubles the durations of chords e Ibeat gt gt 2bents Zheats gt gt 4bents Unfold convert to 1 BIG chorus Choose this command 1 unfold a multi chorus song into one BIG chorus When Selected Band in a Box will display all choruses and verses of a song without loops or repeats I is useful for instance when you have a song with 3 choruses and want to convent it 1o a single large chorus or to customize a song with the Edi Bar Stings feature to change meter tempo patches styles and or harmonies and generate a MIDI file for export Set Time Sig OF Serap allows a new time signature to be selected for highlighted bars on the chomdsheet Transpose opens a dialog where the song canbe transposed up or down by a semitone orby any number of semitones These operations can also be per
171. dit the Harmony file that is currently loaded on your system OK to Load Harm w songs Toggle this option On i vou want to load any harmony settings that were saved embedded in a given song Save Harmony with this song Toggle this option Orr to allow Band in a Box in embed the harmony settings fr the currently open song so that they may be recalled automatically later Change Harmony with new chord Toggle this option On to allow the program to vary the harmony characteristics Ls inversion each time new chord is encountered in he song Allow Melody Harmony Toggle this option On to allow the Melody MIDI channels to utilize the harmony features Allow Thra Harmony Toggle this option On to allow the Thru MIDI channel Allow Soloist Harmony on THRU Toggle this option Or to allow the Thru MIDI channel for the Soloist tack Convert Harmony to Melody Track This conversa single line Melody rack to include the curent harmony selection Convert Harmony to Soloist Track This converts a single line Soloist track to include the current harmony selection On the Thra harmony Use Passing harmonies for THRU When you play slong on a MIDI Keyboard or the wizard and use a Thru harmony you can use passing harmonies For example on a C7 chord wih an Ab note the harmony might be a B diminished chord which is a passing harmony to utilize the harmony featur to ulize the harmony features
172. dn t add or remove files from this Real Tracks folder unless you know what you re doing Applying ReafT racks Settings To make these setings open the Real Tracks Settings dialog with either the Settings button in the Assign Rea Tracks to Tracks dialog or with Ctrhelick onthe Real Tracks toolbar button This dialog also opens with the Windows RealTracke Senings menu command You can apply an overall Volume Adjust to the RealTracks Global Volume Adjust 10 d Global Volume Adjust oF about 10 dB Allow soloing to cresecendo low soloing tn crescendo can be applied to some RealTracks to have the intensity of the solo building sp with the flashiest part of the solos playing as the solo builds they are too loud overall ty a Chapter andina Bax owethide as M Speed up Generation of RealTradks s oe works automatically for faster generation of RealTracks using CPU resources during play hack you have a multi core machine you may not notice this at all since it will use different cores thin the main Band in a Box thread If your machine is older low on memory sow harddrive ete you ean disable this speedup feature so that your machine is doi less CPU work during playback M Auto Real Tracks substitution based on tempo when set tne program will find the best RealTracks to use at the cwrent tempo For example it might substitute an Acoustic Bass at a higher tem
173. dy harmony En Select Melody harmony shins 10 Allow Thru harmony Fu Select Thru harmony Shiner Panic all notes off n Direction Arrows Move the cursor in the appropriate direction 11 Adjust the tempo by increments n5 lt gt Advance page in either direction 1 Displays the Lyric Mode Hit ESC or to ext H SetAdvance Part Marker at cursor location During Playback delete Hort m shite 141 shift 41 oes Cine am Pauses Song Resumes Playing Song Increments Patch number by 1 Decrements Patch number by Increments Patch number by 5 Decrements Patch number by 5 Select Favorite Instruments Combos Stops Song Transposes Melody down 1 octave Clap 14 Reterence Muting Parts You can also mute a Part hy Option Clicking is button at the top left of the Main Window 82 Mutes the Combo ll die instruments EN Mutes the Bass ET Mutes the Piano Sis Mutes the Drums 366 Mutes the Guitar ES Mutes the Strings E Mutes tbe Melody E Mutes he THRU Selecting Parts Cuba Selects the Combo Hold down Ctrt Shift and the letter to change the value for the selected part ER Decresstncrease Reverb TY Decreasetntease Chorus va Decreselncresse Panning or Decressetntease Bank ow Decreselcrense Volume Holding down CtrkeShiftand 149 and 0 keys on top row of keyboard selects favorite instrument patch Hold down Ctrt Shift and 4 and s keys to decrease increase patch by 1 For example ets change the Piano pa
174. e Dealt To synchronize Band in a Box with an extemal sequence check this box Overall Volume Changes Default To prevent any changes of volume inside Band in a Box uncheck this box Style Volume Changes Default Styles occasionally come with volume changes To prevent these uncheok this box Extra Note Offs Dealt Leave this box unchecked unless you are having trouble with tuck notes when you press Stop Ifyou check this box Band in a Box will send a sweep ofall notes off Concert Piteh Adjust Deiat Ths is useful for non concert instruments such as Saxophone or Trumpet The output is irensposcd so that you see the musie in one key and it plays in another Trumpet players and other Bb instruments should set Concert Pitch Adjust to 2 Le minus 2 Alto Sax and other Eb instruments should set Concert Pitch Adjust o 3 Here s an example of an Alto player using Band in a Box by setting the concert pitch adjust to 3 dhe song isin the concert key of C transpose the song to A using the key signature box on the main screen The song will display in the key of A but with the Concert Pitch Adjust set ro 3 it will play 3 semitones higher in the key of C So the Alto player can ead the musie in the transposed key while hearing it in the concert key The song can also be printed out in the key of A View GS Map Tien GS Mapi butos opens ist af Generat K View GS Map J supi patch numbe
175. e tendered to its own separate file This allows for complete control when the files are imported into another program for further editing and mixing There is a choice of output formats AIFF Audio Interchange File Format is a lossless audio format most commonly used fon Macintosh computer systems The audio data in a standard AIFF file is uncompressed pulse code modulation PCM This is the format o use for the highest quality but the file size is large typically 10MB per minute of stereo audio at a Sample rate of 4 IkHz and a 16 bit sample size MAA isan audio file that uses high quality MPEG audio compression It uses the same compression algorithm as an MPA video file but an MAA file is audio only and docs not contain a video track WAV is another lossless audio file format usually PCM based on the Resource Interchange File Format RIFF Itis more common on Windows systems but can also he played by the Macintosh Use this format 1o export lossless audio files 10 a Windows computer p Chapter 10 Audio Festns When rendering audio files you have the choice of making stereo or mono files The Auto Channels setting will use the current Band in a Box setup The Normalize option will normalize individual tracks or the complete arrangement Normalizing boosts the volume to a maximum level without distortion Most profesional music tracks are normalized To enable this set the Normalize Rendered Files option to t
176. e when the size of the Band in a Box window changes the Notation windav redraws in proportion to the new size Close the Notation window by pressing the Notation button again Notation Window Toolbar The toolbar at the top ofthe Notation Window gives you access to most af the functions TU HATTE tan Gee TE Cope Ionen buton ances te Nealon Windows Sting dog 3 where notation display options are set Notation Mode EM Tsis an important buton Itis the Notation Mode button This toggles between the 3 modes af the Notation window Standard Notation mode Editable Notation mode and Staff Roll mode You can tagge through the 3 modes by clicking the mouse on the bution Print Options Press this button to Print the Notation to any standard printer supported by the Macintosh If you havent set up your printer to work with any other MAC programs then you ll need to select a printer in the Chooser This launches a dialog box that lets you set options for printing described elsewhere Current Note This box displays the name ofthe note that the mouse is curently over This is the note that will be inserted when you click to inserta note Note or Rest Checkbox ua Chapter 7 Non ind Printing These determine whether a Note or a Rest will be Note Rest insert whens mouse is licked Mano Mode O Moni When this checkbox ise the notion in entered as O n
177. e Melody and Soloist tracks is optional if you want their MIDI Velocities left as is you can uncheck the Also normalize Melody Soloist box Insert Breaks silence in arrangement also called Chord Breaks is a great feature for practicing tempo contral Select the of bars and Band in a Box wil play for say 4 bars selectable and then will rest all instruments for the next 4 bars Onee set this feature works automatically with all songs until you tum it of During the silence you keep playing comping drums melody et trying to stay in tempo Drummers con mute the drum part When the band comes back in after the 4 bars you ll get instant feedback on how wel you have maintained the tempo if the band comes in ime with you or not nce set this feature works automatics Allow Lyrics display during playback When lyrics are present Et Enter Lures at Curren Bar this setting will open the lyrics window and show two lines of scrolling lyrics as the song plays ly with all songs until you tum it off us Chapter Band ios Povertiuide Soloist Prefs The More Soloist Settings dialog ean be opened with ether the Solis Prefs button in the Preferences dialogs or the Mora button in the Select Soloist dialog C Use MIDI Volume for Soloist Wizard IV Trigger Solo Playback Early M Soloist Prefer Long phrases Soloist Velocity Adjust 5 Melody Velocity Adjust E IV OK to treat the V Major triad as a
178. e Print button This launches the Print Options dialog box that ets you view the curent settings and hen pres The OK Print bution Print out any combination of Chords Notes Lyries or blank paper You need to choose what to print out notes chords lyrics bar numbers and what clefs to include treble ass You can print out the first chorus last chorus or the whole Song Margins are available o you can make a cft margin to produce a printout to ge intoa 3 hole binder or example Auto Fitonto1 page Band in a Box will set the staves per page for you This will be set when you enter the Print Dialog box or change the range that you want to print first last chorus or whole song This willbe done to uy to fit your printing onto page I youre printing the Whole song itis unlikely that i will fit onto 1 page so Band in a Box wil sett the oral 10 staves per page You can override Ihis seting by typing in the staves pr Page that you would like Note Remember tat e eon page 1 takes up T siave so F you choose TU Staves you wil gst the te 9 staves on page 1 and 10 saves on page 2 Print Options Dialog Box Include Chords Ifsclected this will include the chords of the song on the lead sheet Remember tut you can set the eight of the chords relative to the staff in the Notation Window Settings dialog box Include Notes Ifyou want only a chord ead sheet with no notes then turn this of Otherwi
179. e StylePieker dialog Use the ty baton to select a style from a folder on your hard drive You should select a style that is present in the Styles falder in Band in a Box or the same falder where the song resides sty NR_CURR STY The name ofthe new style you choose will be displayed oremovethe ye chang at distr pes Clear Style Change the Clear Siye Changel bution Tere isan option 1o send the Send patches with style change abede patches in the style with he siyle change Disable this checkbox to keep the patches that you have already Selected Rote iE you want Ta mix aves wih SU and IH Um signatures you should make The main sty used in the song a 4 amp lle You could Ien change back to 3 4 at bar 1 1 you want When you select a style change you ll notice that there is a red frame dawn around the bur line This indicates that there is a style change or other change at that br found in the Edit bar settings dialog RestDrums Changes at any Bar RealDrums can be changed at any bar either for the whole song or just for the selected chorus st the new ReslDrams style pres the IR Drums button Tost RDrums mus will open the RealDrums Picker where you can choose from a full ist of RealDrums or filer the list to narrow your selection Yon see the new style name displayed JazzBrushesSticks onscreen To remove the c
180. e all song settings Now all settings are saved with songs including patches meses volume cz so that the song will play the same way each time without having to set his in the Save With Patches dialog Reverb control added for individual tracks with RealTraeks or RealDrums so you can easily add reverb 0 to 127 for any RealTrack Reverb type is also settable and Saved with the song BassTreble Tone Control added for individual tracks with Real Tracks ar RealDrums so you can easily adjust the bass treble EQ for any RealTrack Settings save with the song Band in a Box window is now sizable when size changes chonfshcet notation and ther windows redraw n proportion to the new size This allows you t have Band in 2 Box open as a small window on screen with other programs and you still see a full chonisheet The sereen size is remembered between sessions New favorite songxstyles dialog with separate lists of recently played and favorite songs ar styles The previous favorite songslstyles dialog was a list of recently used Songssyles Now there are 2 tabs in this dialog showing you both recently used Songstyles and a new list of favorites that you select as a favorite songs or styles You can add an unlimited number of favorites Double time and half time support for ReafTracks added Now you can play any ReslTracks at halftime or double time This allows you for example in a ballad ata tempo of 70 to add a RealTracks
181. e cepa es Do L DESEE Bap When sati with the bar lines and chords click the TO reum the chords and tempo map to Band ina Box Special Cases Time Signature Ma song is not in the default 4 4 time signature set the Time Signature very carly before you do anything cs Bad Initial Tempo Estimates Double Halt Tempo Sometimes Audio Chord Wizard will guess double ar half of the tempo you might prefer Sighily Wro Sometimes syncopated songs can have musical anticipations which make ACW guess tempo slightly too fast ar slightly too slaw Completely Horribly Wrong Some songs have rhythms dificult for a computer to understand Sometimes a song s rhythmic beats are spaced in such a way that a song with a perfect Tempo of 120 might mathematically BETTER fit the audio beats at some simple but wrong related ratio such 80 100 160 or 180 BPM 1 the initial Tempo Estimate is pretty good the Tap Bar line funcion will be the casiest way to fix such errors requiring only a few keyboard taps during playback But if the initial tempo estimate happens to be horribly wrong it helps to make the initial tempo in the ballpark BEFORE you tap a few Fs to make it completely right Controteliek the Average Tempo control for some casy automatic fixes ES Chapter 12 Wan Taos and Ulis Find the Next Good Faster Tempo Playback Lags Behind BarLines Find the Next Good Sl
182. e f playing only amp parts at once like an MT32 or a Korg M1 Won t be able to take advantage of the harmony using different instruments In this case you should set the harmony channels as follows Melody Harmony Channel A Uses the Melody Channel no need to set Melody Harmony Channel B Need to Set equal to Melody Channel Melody Harmony Channel Need to Set equal to Melody Channel Thru Harmony Channel A Uses the Thru Channel no need to set Thru Harmony Channel B Need to Set equal to Thru Chann Thru Harmony Channel C Need to Set equal to Thru Chann you do this hen you don t need to do any other modifications to your Band in setup because itis not using any new channels Chapter 6 Bund io Powertiuide r Piano Dispi Uncheck this box i you don t want to see notes played on the onsereen plano keyboard Default Color Notes Default The notes that play on the onscreen piano are usually in different colors for each pat Bass Aqua Pano Blue Guitar Green letter G Strings Pink letter S Melody Red leter M Solo Red letter S Uncheck this box to show them all in black and white Allow Pateh Changes Dett Do not check this box if you want to disable All Patch changes If you haven t made a patch map you should disable this Style GS Patch Changes Default Styles frequently come with pach changes Ifyou want to disable these uncheck this 3 MIDI syn
183. e is a better one to choose Chaper Band in Hos 2010 for Macintosh The T column ofthe RealTracks Assign dialog shows which RealTracks are eligible Tor Tempo Swapping The tempo swapping only occurs you have the RealTracks in your installation RealTracks Picker dialog enhanced Opens up faster New columns are added tempo swappable holds type ealDrums Picker dialog has been enhanced with information about Artist name Artist bio and ReslDrums Set number New Favorite Songs Styles Dialog There s a new dialog for these favorites with separate lists of Recently Played and Favorite songs or styles The previous Favorite Songs Sy les dalog was a list of recently used songsstyles Now there are 2 tabs in this dialog showing you both recently used songs styles and a new list of favorites that you select as favorite songs or styles You can add an unlimited number of favorites F The F button launches the Favorites Recently Played dialog D SS a Chapter 3 Band in a Box 2010 fr Macintosh EI O Favorites amp Recently Played i cs and Recently rise Radio buttons toggle between a list of your recently played songs or styles and your Favorite songs or styles Add Favorite rhe favorites ist wll stat of xan empty one but you ean add songs styles as your favorites by clicking t
184. e options to generate Chords only no Melody and the Melody uito will sct the options to generate only a Melody no chords over an existing chord progression The Defaults button sets the Melodist setings back to Default Defaults CrN w Tempo 95 AutoTempo The Tempo setting determines the Tempo of the song and defaults to the current tempo ofthe previous song 1f Auto Tempo is checked the tempo will be set by the tempo ange stored with the Melodist For example ifa Melodist is called Fast Waltz it would have a fast tempo range stored inside the Melodist and the song would be generated at a fast tempo ithe auio tempo option is set Chapter e Aunomatie Muse Fetes 157 A2 transpose Section Plus hd In songs with an AABA form it is common for the second 1 section to be transposed For example the first a section might be in the key of Eb and the second would be transposed up to the key of Gb Melodists store these settings and some Mclodists are set to transpose the A2 sections If you dort want to allow Melodists to transpose the form in this way set the A2 transpose to none set to section plus it will transpose the A2 section and might transpose 2 bars early or 2 bars late The song will anly be transposed if the particular Melodist is set to transpose the section y The Song Key area determines the key for the song I Set to A
185. e realistic Melody and its dierent every time played so that you lembel cick onthe e Embellishertoolbar ner ik Dein a ape pe buton to open the a oann Melody Embllsher Seem 87 dialog Mimmo 06 MCI Reihen c The Memo shows the Mentem current embellishments ese oo reve been applied Semi CE CO You can change See tor settings and redothe Sa fmbellishment or you Saint aay fan make the curent meses Cii 3 embellishment permanent w Chapter amp The Main Sereen The Embellshe is only active while the music is playing it doesnt permanently affect the Melody track There is an option to make the Embellishment permanent so that if you like a certain embellishment you can add it to the Melody track This is especially sefil to spice up songs that have been entered in step time with robotic velocities and durations of notes Using the Embelishe makes it sound like a person was playing instead of a computer Toolbars The main toolbar extends the full width of the sereen It is divided in two bere B uHumgcb seeomuir OP ao Ty eise de dnbie ta ney sng andres reminds you to save your work before it erases the chords New M 119E ton so open ond sones into he program iom e Open File dialog Open The Save button saves the song o disk This saves the song allowing you to choose or confirm the n
186. e settings are Humanize The velocities durations legato and timing of the notes are humanized The original velocities ete of the notes are ignored This is useful when the me been entered in a stiff manner Octave The octave of the Melody is changed to the best octave for the current Mei instrument For example if the instrument were a Piccolo the octave would be raised to the best range fora piccolo There is an additional setting for the octave in the More settings dialog Anticipation An anticipated note is played early or ahead of he beat as shown Embellished with anticipations on beats 1 and 3 Less Anticipation Thies the opposite of anticipation This inde notes that are anticipated and embellishes them by playing them ter on the bean Grace Notes The grace notes are brief notes played just before and a semi tone below the original note The grace notes intentionally don t show on the notation so that it wil remain easily readable They can be heard Doubled Notes Melody notes are doubled with the same pitch Unembellished C quarter note is doubled to Embellished ight notes Extra Notes Unembellished o In this before and afier wi example an Eb and E note are faded between the D and F Extra notes are added between melody notes Extra Notes added j Note Turns With a note tum a sigle note s replaced by
187. eal Tracks to Track dialog RealTracks Picker Mure This dialog also opens from the main screen contextual menus which open with a right Solo lick Controlselck or double click on any part name Then click on the Choose Choose RealTracks RealTracks menu command o assign a Generate RealTrack RealTracks instrument to the selected par T Click on the Settings button to open the RealTracks Settings dialog Chap S Cid Tour of Bandi as c eem pue E In the RealTracks Settings dialog you can Eee areen rea Audio Reverb These is a Reverb control for individual tracks with Real Tracks or RealDrums so you can easily add reverb 0 to 127 for any RealTrack At the top of the screen there is an A REV Audio Reverb control Click on an instrument radio button and then set the Audio Reverb for it Note that his only applies to RealTracks since MIDI tracks have MIDI Reverb which is set via a REV control The Audio Reverb varies from O 1o 127 Adjust the valu by clicking a key on the on sereen piano keyboard Or right click or Cirrellek the control to enter a value V The Revert type is also seti and saved wit the ong To do tiis press YW ihe Audio Revers buon and adjust he various parameter Ave The default isa room type of reverb Freeze Tracks
188. ealTraeks in Styles The SiyleMaker has settings to assign RealTracks to styles in the Mise Style Settings dialog This allows you to crete or cdit styles to assign specific RealDrums or Reaffracks to the style To access this dialog then press the PATCH button to launch the Mise Style snter the StyleMaker User Make A New Sie and ings dialog RealTracks can be assigned o any Band in a Box instrument part in an existing style by using the Assign Soloist MIDI or Real Tracks audio to style featur cs To assign RealTracks to a style select Instrument part that you want to replace with a RealTrack Assign Soloist MIDI or Real Tracks Gudio to style instrument ase Mi Then select the RealTracks instrument that you want for this part in the style Note This Tet ala cies slate tha ResHTrack sg begins a FAET Soloist RealTracks to use 397 Bass Ac Jazz Paul Sw 140 M Styles can have multiple Real Tracks For example you could have RealPedalStel and RealAcousticGuitar And alo ReslDrums Volume and Timing Offsets The volume and the timing ofthe ReslTracks parts can be adjusted to match be rest of the syle dB offset Meat Tracks or Volume offset MIDI tracks T note 5 dB change is about a 32 change of MIDI volume Timing offset RealTracks or MIDD in ticks 120 per bea 0 Chapter 6 Hand inBox owehide Mutistye s Molise rajaztzzbo
189. ed Defaul current tack will be displayed IV Multi Channel Mode Base Channel The guitar will display information on channels 1 to 16 on strings 1 to 6 if Multi Channel Mode is set to on default Channel 11 is referred to as the base channel Defat 11 You can edit notes on the notation to sc the channels of the notes Guitar controllers will also recond information in this manner so you can recond on a MIDI guitar and sce the display on the guitar fretboard The base channel is normally 11 but You can set i to any channcl cg if set for channel 5 this would mean that channels 5 o 10 would be the guitar channels Fretboard Color Brown C Black The Fretboard color can be brown or black Default brown Qlse inlays 20 Clar 12 Wizands Tutors and Utes you elect to not display note names you can select Use Inlays and a Guitar inlay will be displayed along the neck The inlays will only display if note names are not being displayed Send Notes to Editable Notation Window I Send Notes to Notation Window Default On is set when you click on the Guitar nots and the notation window is open in editable notation mode or note roll mode the ote will be inserted at he current time line on tbe notation window Fretboard Octave 07 Mi Auto Set Octave You can set the fretboard octave For example ifthe music is very low and you need to boo
190. ed instead of the other pattems on the same row These pattems aways have other options set which specify the times that this pattem would be eligible to be played back Bar Mask Usual Setting 0 Playback Bar Mask determines on what bars of he song the pattem will play The bar numbers are counted relative to the last part marker and range from 1 8 Bar 1 is the first bar afier a part marker for example Other bar mask settings 1 pattem played at odd number bars only 1 3 5 7 9 2 patem played at even bars only 2 4 6 8 10 3 pattem played on 3rd of4 bar 3 7 11 15 poter played on dth af4 4 8 12 16 20 pattem played on Sth of 5 13 21 6 pattem played on 6th of8 6 14 22 7 pattem played on 7th of 7 15 23 S pater played on Sth of 5 16 24 Special bar masks Chapter 11 User Programmable Funcns 1 PRE FILL special value refers to the bar before a fi 2 FILL refers to the bar of fill this allows you to put in bass fills for example 3 POST FILL refers to the bar afer a fill same as the first bar after a part marken layback Beat Mask Usual Scting 0 Set the beat mask to a beat ftom 1 4 if you want the pattern to only be played on certain beat numbers I Beat 1 2 Beat 2 3 Beat 3 4 Beat 4 Roman Numeral Mask Usual Setting 0 you have a patter that should only be played on the I chord or he IV chord of the y you can use these Roman Numeral Masks This setting is rarely used
191. ed as a text file rom any word processor This sets the StylePicker to show all styles It is an easy way to Show all restore the full iist after a filter has been applied Search The Search button Iets you find data in any ofthe fields Support for Third Party Styles Third party styles with LS3 files are supported in the StlePicker LS3 files have the information for Third Party styles Ifyou have hind party styles and an LSS file fram the third party add these files to the Data Tolder Then press the Rebuil Re Build buton inside the StylePicker to see your styles listed About LSS Files LS files add information to the StylePicker dialog about you styles The LS3 fles are for third party added styles and style data descriptions An LS3 file cannot exceed 65 000 bytes 65K If you need more use 2 LS3 files The Style data and descriptions show up in the style picker dialog Lines beginning with are fr style descriptions memos ee Lines beginning with the 3 chars are for the style dat More information on the farmat of the style data line is found at pemusic som styledata hum Here s a summary of he style data line on the next 4 lines stylenamesololst to use 1 255 soloist type to use see list on web double time OK m time sign 3 r4 straight or swing sev Ls ors 8 16 tempolom 30 500 tempo high range 30 500 tempo mid range 30 500 style disk
192. eginning for the chorus by clicking on the bar in the chordshect Chorus ends after Shows the curent bar setting for the end of the chorus Use this command to set a new ending for the chorus by clicking on the bar in the chordshect Total Choruses Show the number f choruses far the song click to change Vary Middle Style checked the middle choruses o the song will be played in the b substyle Overall Loop Ichecked the song will play again fom the beginning cach time it reaches the end ese stings are saved with the song m E E Vary Style in Middle Choruses Mallow Pushes in Middle Choruses Rests M Allow Rests in First Chorus Mallow Rests in Middle Choruses F Allow Rests in Last Chorus M Allow Pedal Bass in Middle Choruses F Allow Embellishment of Chords Tags D Tag Exists 7 Tag Jump After Bar eam Tag Begin at Bar 5 Tag Ends After Bar 8 IV Generate 2 Bar Ending for This Song Start the 2 bar ending early 0 Fade Fadeout ending bars Solos should have a bluesy feel COE Cancel Chapter 14 Reference Var Soin te Chorus vcu Weis tes py nbsp gout ie Md Chr Te Mie Chonan ces ep stan antec ele Sho iy and cst cre rakes T ich Shon eu Atov Fassia Claus sas 8 This is used if you have put pushes into a song but don t want the pushes to play in the middle choruses The middle choruses are usually used for soloing o you may not wan
193. eks ca If sct to 120 ticks one quarter note then only notes of at east that duration will get vibrato Start the Vibrato after this many ticks For notes that will get vibrato the vibrato will start after this many ticks Adjust Octave Method Ifthe octave is to be adjusted it wil ether only adjust it if the notes are outside the playable range or always adjust it to the best octave according to the setting you make here Dynamic Range Refers to the runge of vel Useful ange 30 to 50 o Legato Settings Refers to the amount of legato for the notes Useful range 55 ities used for the humanization Chapter 9 Recording Tracks us Chapter 10 Audio Features Rendering Audio Files Direct to Disk Audio Rendering Audio rendering means converting a MIDI song to audio format usually to an AIFF file fora compressed MAA file With Band in a Box for Macintosh rendering couldn t be casier Press the Audlo button on the main Band in a Box sereen to render your Band in a Box song to an AIFF MAA or WAV file The song i rendered automatically in 5 10 seconds through the built in Apple DLS Musie Device or Core MIDI Is that casy ES ro E Die Sinaloa teatras Seat Ern You can choose to render the fll mix of MIDI racks and Real Tracks together or just the mix of Reat Tracks or MIDI racks alone By selecting Individual RealTracks or Individual MIDI Tracks cach track will b
194. el the instrument Panel This section allows you to adjust the settings for Reverb Chorus Panning Bank and Volume Audio Reverb and Tone for instrument parts Click on the top half ofa number to raise it by one and on the bottom half to reduce it by one Or click on the vertical bars to the right of the number ox to aise lower the sering in increments of 5 You can also select a cont assign it a number value by licking a key on the piano keyboard The value will correspond to the MIDI note number from 0 to 127 that you click on Higher Bank Patches The button on the instrument selection panel will give you casy access to patches on higher banks These are selected from a PAT file that GM _corespondso your synth or sound module We have included many PAT files in the Syth Kits folder Press the button to launch the Patches on Higher Banks dialog To narrow your search you can do one or all of the following Open the Patch list and select an instrument 1s Electric Bass Acoustic Piano et Click on the Include Family checkbox to have other offerings of similar type Shown ie all Bass family patches all keyboard family patches ete EI Chapter The Main Sereen o Find a patch by keyword by clicking the Scarch button and typing some letters that you know are in the name e g mando will find your mandolin patch and any others containing mando Nate Yau can o
195. els 11 16 preserved which preserves the fret positions Fote Alot tesa fama can be customized in The Gutanit Maver Wisch Inch by the sit bution m he Select Guitarist dialog Redo Part of the Solo Lets edo part ofthe solo at a higher fret position This particular song GIT TES has 6 choruses and the last 3 choruses have a much higher range of soloing Lets redo that part of the solo using higher fret position Well press the Ch Solo button again de select the auto set position button and choose the 12 position Since we only want to regenerate this far the choruses 4 19 6 we set the range to Part of Song and the range to start at chorus 4 bar 1 and range of 96 bars This will rewrite the solo by first removing the existing guitar chord solo if any and then generating a new one Technical Nota Sinc some ihe gulariss can be assigned a sum ha chords n a delayed fashion f you repeatedly r generate the sco tha melody wil become more and mare delayed The saluton s would be ta choose Edit Undo Salo prior to Te goneratng the solo or picking a Guitarist that doesn t delay the sirum The Sirum delay status i indicated on the nfo panel of the Select Guitarist screen Saving the Guitar Chord Solo Once you have generated a Guitar chord soo it becomes part of the notation tack You son edi it like any other part by deleting inserting notes cte The soo will be saved with the song
196. em Editor allowing step editing of patterns 1 The StyleMaker sercen with drum pattems looks like this A Faem Betstiis B Patten 55536459 Erig The screen will ook like this The solid box indicates the currently selected pattern Empty patterns are indicated by a Le patterns that have not been recorded yet fa pattern has been recorded there will be a number in place of the indicating the weight of the pattem The 4 rows ae for the different types of pattems a substyle b substyle Fills and 2 Pur Endings Drum Pattern Entry Drum Pattern Entry screen is where the Drum pattems are made To enter the Drum Editor With the highlight bar on a pattem on the drum area ofthe SipleMaker sereen press the REC button to record the pattern in Step Time iB BERT NUMBER 1 OPEN SIUE CLOSED SHAKER us P on HAND CLAPS 67 65 Gs m TAMBOURINE ea TmMBALE ie es ee 9 e oT now be mih Drum Paticra Entry sereen There are T6 ow across indicating 4 beats with 4 divisions per bent Changing Timebase of Drum Pattern Change the timebase to 12 by clicking the mouse on the Tlmebase bution This allows for drum patterns in 3 4 time The program will ignore the 4th column of cach beat Timebase 12 will hen be displayed in the timebase button Moving around the Drum Editor Sereen Move around the screen with cursor keys or mouse click The black flashing highlight ar indica
197. en they are played back they are replaced by a funcion List of Bass Macro Notes Note number 72 C Pop Walking Noti On playback the note number 72 will be replaced by intelligent notes walking in a Papi Country mode to the next chord Maximum 4 walking notes per pattern Note number 76 E Note a semitone below Root of Next Chord Note number 77 F Root OF Next Chord Note number 78 F Note a semitone ABOVE Root of Next Choe Note number 79 G Best Filth a Fifih above or below the Root depending on how high the root is Also stays on the root if in a slash chord C7 E Remember to get Bass Macros Working you mus Hit he right note number you may be out by an octave Chater 11 User Programmable Functions ES Check the OK To Use Macro Notes box Playback the pattem with the CHORD button The PLAY button gives you an as played playback with the strange sounding high macro notes Making Piano Guitar and Strings Patterns Piano Guitar and Strings are all considered together because they have all the same options available They like the Bass pattes are recorded live from a MIDI keyboard you cast play in real time or if you don t have a MIDI keyboard vou have to import hese instruments from other styles as we ll be doing with the Strings In this section we will refer to Piano pattems but this information applies equally well to Guitar and Strings patterns Moving to t
198. ent to your song Wate Any track can be converted from MIDI track into a Real rack from the contextual menu on the Solo main screen Just ight click or Controleclick or Coen ere re double lick on the part name to open the menu EUR and then select Generate ReaTrack or ReslDrums Save MID track as AIFF file You will then be shown alit of ll the available instruments and styles to make your selection Set Track offset 0 Now its ime to make music with Band i a Erase Track Box Have Fun 2 Cher 2 QuickStart Tutorial Chapter 3 Band in a Box 2010 for Macintosh Summary of New Features Overview Band in a Box 2010 for Macintosh is here with over 80 cool new features These are some exciting new features in Band in a Box We ve added a new Plugin mode allowing you to simply Drag n Drop tracks between Band in a Box and your favorite sequencer GarageBand ProTools Logie Nuendo Reaper and moro RealTracks generate much faster now typically 4X faster Res Tracks now support Sots Holds and Pushes Time for generating MIDI arrangement is much faster now instantaneous less han 1 second Endings are improved and RealTracks endings are now 4 bars long giving time for the natural decay of the instruments Individual tacks MIDI or Real can be frozen now so the arrangements can be saved and fixed and will replay quiekly without need for regeneration Soloist RealTrac
199. eplacement of any media not meeting PG Musie e s Limital Warranty which ane ered io PG Musie Ine or an mibi PO Mani Ine dealer with a coy Of yout 1 HP Musie lc or the authorized dealer is unable 1o deliver replacement media that is fe of detsen ater or wound yo may emit is agrement and vour money Wil be rende In a event wll PG Mosi Ic be iate to you for any damages including but pot ied st profis ot saving or other incidental ar consequential damages arising out ofthe use othe Stull to ue such program even d PG Muse Ine or am autborzad PG Manic Ine desler ha been dvs of the posi af such damages or Tae an clim by any other party TRADEMARKS adco CloufTiack CopyMeh Cuiarstart za PG Mui Power Tracks Pro Redlunds ResiDrune and RealTeasko ac cer he wademarks or reper idonei of PG Misc Ine in the United States Canada and other punts Microsol and Window ae either registered tease ada of Microsoft Corporations the Uni Sats unde other counties Apple the Apple ago GurageBandit Leopardi Macintoshi Macs Panihari Power Mac Quick Times Tiger and TrueType ame trademarks af Apple Compo nc opted nthe U S and othar coumes IBM e ester densi of rostra Business Machines Corporation Roland and Roland Lage EDIROLY and EDIROL Logo GS and GS Log are registered demit and MIDI Logo EDIROL Vital Sound Canvas Muli Pack VC MPU are ademas of Roland Corporation ASIO isa tales and salwar of Steinberg Media Technologies Gl VS
200. erate Solo Now button the portion of the solo that you have Selected will be generated The song will then start playing two bars before the new part so you can quickly hear the new solo Remember that the custom solo generation can be used with different soloists so you can use a Tenor Sax Jazz soloist for a few bars and then insert a custom Bluegrass Banjo soloist far four bars and so on Hic z C Bb Soloing over Slash Chords The Soloist analyzes slash chords like C Bb to determine the best scale type to use eg Bb Lydian There s nothing you need to do this function happens automatically behind the scones Editing Soloists yout like to create your own Soloists or permanently C Edit Soloist Maker fe essing euauny Scit you can prens he Eain button to launch the Soloist Maker which is described in deal elsewhere Tutorial Using the Soloist Feature Generate a Soloist and practice the solo by looping it slowing it down or printing it out until you can perform a great solo on any chord changes Generate a Soloist and attach a Harmony such as Big Band Bras to create phenomenally quick and interesting Big Band Arrangements automatically Generate a standard MIDI file or print them out for you and your finds Have the Soloist pl Trades withthe Soloist you solo for 4 bars BB solos for 4 bas et Concentrate separately on different aspects of your playing with assistance from the
201. erated and then the program wil pause until the MIDI or keystroke signal is received Close window when not in BB Closes the Ban Box window when the Finder or another program is chosen Include Patch Changes in MIDI files This will include the patch instrument changes Include 2 bar lead in in MIDI file you don t want to create a MIDI file containing the first two bars af the 34 oun you can select this option and the MIDI file will begin directly at bar 1 without the couni in Ihre is a Melody pickup then the two bar lead in will remain in the file Include Controllers ReverbiChoruspan This will include the reverb chorus and panning settings Include Forced Channel Meta Event This will include the forced channel META event Itis recognized by PowerTracks Pro Audio and other PG Musie programs only Chapter 6 Hand inBox PomerCie un Write Chords Part Markers META event Writes the chords and part markers to the MIDI i Include Guitar Postion Controller Ths will insert a controller 84 which PG Musie uses to indicate the fret position Since some synths also use this for Portamento Conto you should use this setting with Write Soloist irt on channel Normally the program writes the Soloist part on channel 8 Since that could also mean he left hand ofa piano track using the convention of channel 8 9 for piano this option allows you to write it on channel 3 instead Write Harmony
202. ere MIDI ports are configured C Make General MIDI Patch Map This opens the GS Pateh Numbers dialog where you can make a customized General MIDI patch map for your non GM instrument Type in the patch number that your synth uses for each instrument listed For example suppose that your sound source has Acoustic Piano at patch location 41 Inthe General MIDI Patch Edit dialog select he box to the left of Acoustic Piano and type 4l Do the same forall ofthe instruments in the General MIDI patch list If your synth doesnt have an exact mutch use a close sounding patch that it does have Once you have made a patch map in this way whenever Band in a Box encounters Acoustic Piano which is General MIDI instrument 1 it will ook up this Patch Map Location and then send out Patch 41 to your synth soumd module Furthermore you will never have to refer to instruments in Band in a Box by your synt umber Instead youl use the General MIDI instrument numbering c4 Acoustic Piano I So if you are Saving a Song with Patches or Assigning fav instruments or combos you will stil type 1 to tell Band in a Box that the patch is Acoustic Pane Set Favorite Patches Combos For each ofthe 8 parts Bass Pano Drums Guitar Strings Melody Soloist and Thru you can assign up to 10 favorite instruments Once assigned these instruments can be quickly and easily st Use General MIDI instrument num
203. ert time signature changes at a certain bar For example you might wanta single bar of 2 4 or bars of 3 4 time cte This option allows a change o ime signature during a song The change takes place at the beginning of the bar and continues until a new time signature change is specified You can select beats per bar fram 1 to 4 bets per bar A setting of 0 bette bars used for no change of time signature Examples A song in 4 8 time with a single bar of 6 4 time Since the maximum beats per bar is we will split the 64 bars into 2 bars a 4 4 bar and a 2 4 bar Insert a beats per bar atthe beginning ofthe 24 bar and then restore the time signature to 4 4 by assigning beats per bar 4 for the next bar A song in 5 4 time throughout To do this we will alternately create a 34 bar 2 4 bars On odd numbered bars insert a beats per bar 3 and on even bars insert of bents per bar 2 This needs to be done far every bar Style Changes at any Bar You can specify a new style at any bar of the song so that you can use many styles Within the same song To change styles at any bar Move the cursar highlight bar to the bar for the style change Chapter Bund io Poweue Press the FS key to open the Edit bar settings dialog or choose the Ed Har ings menu command or use the keystrokes Option B SW sty Clear Style Change Use the Style button to electa style using th
204. et s work with an example song called Violet Song MID This should he included in your Songs folder For this example we re going ta interpret the choris of this MIDI file and read them into Band in a Box Start with a blank chordsheet by choosing File New Choose the MIDI file Chord Wizard dialog by choosing File Import Chords from MIDI File Copen Change Press the Open Change button to select the MIDI lc and thea choose the file tha you d like to import Violet Song MID Once you load in the file you ll notice that the Chord Wizard has analyzed the MIDI file and made these determinations for you 1t has automatically determined that the Violet Song MID file of lead in bars in MIDI file 2 has 2 bars of lead in How many bars to import 103 7 tus 103 bars of chord Key F v Tempo 120 TimeSig 4 4 TWh Key OFF with a 49 tm signature anda Tempo 70 Bass part is on channel s 2 Ths Bass paris und on channel Chording track is on channel s 3 67 Ticini comping paris are und on Channels 3 and 7 I Import to Melody from channel s 4 The Melody is found on Channel 4 IM Import to Soloist from channel s 10 Taere are no oiher parts Tike ie Melody That Shola Re pur on The elit rack Chapter 12 Wizards Tutors and Ulis ree compite so Gorton Gora
205. ete song arrangement in Band in a Box with RealDrums and RealTracks a Melody Solo Harmonies and Lyrics either from scratch or from an imported MIDI file You can print out clean lead sheet notation complete with chord symbols And you can save your song in MIDI form or as lossless PCM audio or compressed Mda audio for playback from your computer or over the Internet ar to send as an e mail attachment You re on your way to making lots of great music with Band in a Box Have Fun e Chapter Guided Tour of Wands Box in a Box PowerGuide Chapter 6 Band Yes it s as easy as 1 23 to make great music on your computer using the intelligent automatic accompaniment features of Band in a Box but there s much more to this amazing program Work your way through this chapter to become a power use RealTracks What are RealTracks QR jon Reams replace the MIDI drum track with Ie audio recordings of top session drummers RealTrucks add real instruments recorded by top studio players and recording artists These tracks replace the MIDI track for that instrument and can be controlled just like the MIDI instrument volume changes muting et Best ofall they follow the chord progression that you have entered so that you bear an authentic audio accompaniment to Your song These are not samples but are fll recordings lasting from 1 to bars at time playing along in perfect syne with the other Band in a Box tracks
206. examples for each of the styles Styles with a similar fec and tempo range to the current selection prototype are marked with an asterisk These styles are possible substitutes far the prototype Styles marked with caret symbol are similar in feel but have a different tempo range The style of your song can hc hanged at any bar by pressing the FS key to launch the Edit Bar Settings dialog Method 3 Favorites Styles that you ve used previously show up in the Favorit Styles dialog Choose this rom the menu User Load Favorite Styles or type Shift F9 on your computer keyboard or click onthe IF button to the left of the Style StylePicker button You can choose t save a Favorites set for use later You can also load a set of favorite styles this Method 4 Quick Pick You can choose from among the 24 built in styles This list provides a quick way to choose from among the most popular musie genes w Cher 2 QuickStart Tal Eus wu sor ma v Jazz Swing Country Triple Feel Country sixteenth Feel Bossa Nova Ethnic Blues Shute Blues Even Walz Pop Ballad Shuffle Rock Light Rock Medium Rock Heavy Rock Miami sound Latin Milly Pop Funk Jazz Waltz Rhumba Cha Cha Bouncy 12 8 Insh Pop allad 12 8 Country 12 8 Ole Reggae Step 3 Play your song We ve entered chords on the chordsect and chosen a style Now it s time to play the song First we need to tell Band in a Box
207. f You also need to choose the style to use a Jazz Swing style in this case If you examine the Melody track by opening the Editable Notation window and option clicking on some notes or menu Windows List Editar Window Ctri Sbife L you ll notice that the Melody track contains notes trom Channel 4 which is what we specified in the Chord Wizard dialog Importing part ofa MIDI fle or redoing a section of the chordsheet Import Complete song Insert to BB starting at bar 1 How many bars to import 103 Normally we d want to import an entire MIDI file worth of chords But if you only want to import some bars you can deselect the Import Complete Song checkbox and then specify where to start in the MIDI file ie the of lead in bars in MIDI file and what ar to start at in Band in a Box Insert to BB starting at har and the of bars 10 import How many bars to import For example using the song Violet Song MID we could redo a section of the song using different settings for example a chord resolution of 1 beat instead of 2 beats If We were unhappy with the results at bar T and 8 we could redo this by making the setings as follows C Import Complete song Insert to BB starting at bar 7 How many bars to import 2 Other Settings for the Chord Wizard C OK to use PG Music chord names from MIDI file Band in a Box and PowerTracks Pro songs contin special evens that
208. folks and the search will find the song title Old Folks at Home plus any other songs with Old folks in the title Import Chords from MIDI File uses the MIDI file chord wizard to interpret chords from any MIDI file and also read tracks to the Melody and Soloist racks Chapter 14 Reference w ro make Song Titles list makes the list of song tiles for the current folder It can be used to update the list when new songs are added to a folder Save saves an existing song to the same folder with the same file name Save song As saves songs using the file dialog to name the file and choose a folder or the saved file Save Standard MIDI File makes a standard midi file You can save in Type 1 multi tracks or Type D single track files Karaoke MIDI files are also supported See the settings in the Preferences dialog box to control how the Melody Solo and Harmony are writen toa MIDI Save song with Patches Ifyou would like to save certain patches with a song then type in the number of be patch instrument that you would like Leave the other Instruments at zero 0 for No Patch change Remember that as with all other Band scBox functions you use the General MIDI number for he instrument regardless of the synth you are using File utilities Open Next Song E Open Previous Song em Auto Rename IBM songs Rename any Song on Disk Rename Current Song on disk Delete a Song from Di
209. formed with keystrokes Blank Lyries removes the rcs from a song ide Tracks This allows you to move any ofthe Bass Drums Piano Guitar Strings Melody or Soloist tracks ahead or behind by a certain amount You could ar example slide the Bass truek soit plays a ith abd of the rest of the band This has the effect of making the bass player drive the band and is useful in Jazz styles to make the musie sound more exciting Chord Settings This launches the Chord Options dialog box where you can put in rests and pushes You can launch the Preview Chord Builder or Chord Substitution functions from this window Bar Settings This command opens the Edit Bar Settings dialog where you can change meter tempo patches styles andor harmonies at the current bar m Chap 14 Referense Song Memo A song memo of up o 2000 characters may be added When a song has a memo associated with it a litle red square is visible around the memo button located to the Tight of the song tile Clicking on the M button launches the Song Memo dialog where you can type in a short memo about he son style ct Automatic Memo Generation The Song memo has a summary checkbox If selected you ll sce an additional window that automatically displays a full summary of the song title tempo patches used nthe song as well as other special features such as substyle pateh changes or harmonies This saves much of the work previously required to
210. g The Synth Window is the area between the Menu Bar and the Piano Keyboard where Instruments patches are set and levels are adjusted It also includes buttons Tor adding harmonies to the Melody Thru or Soloist parts 3 The Tool Bar area under the Piano Keyboard has buttons far direct access to important program featares and menus Hold the mouse cursor on any button to see a pop up hint that deseribes its function 4 The Title Window shares the Tool Bar area In addition to the song title it includes ll the other settings for the song such as its Key Signature Tempo and Chorus settings 5 The Chordsheet Area occupies the lower part ofthe screen Chord changes for the song are typed into the numbered bars cells in the sheet Part markers a b c ete fre entered here to switch between Band in a Box substyles To resize the window just use the sizing contro at the bottom right comer of the window Hold down the mouse buton while you drag the sizing contol This allows you to have Band in a Box open asa small window on sereen with other programs and you sil see a full chordshect The sereen size is remembered between a Clogier The Mala Sereen Personalizing the Main Sereen Macintosh themes are supported You can choose different colors for the chordshect arca of the screen and you can alio choose to use larger fonts for the chord display These two settings are found in the Preferences 2 dialog Support for larger
211. g You can disable har endings ciher globally using ReafTeacks Settings dialog M Use 4 bar endings for Songs with RealTracks rona song by song basis using Additional Song Setings dialog Song Additional Song Senis M Use 4 Bar Ending for RealTracks Carey the only way to al i a Ral Tracks has a 4 bar ending other ry ie and sec or to look in the Select Soloist dialog Soloist Generate ond Play a Slo and see the name of the ST2 file under he term database at the op right Then check the date ofthe ST file IE is Nov 2009 or newer then it should have a har ending Check our pgmusie com web site as we are releasing fee upgrade patches to add 4 bar endings to most of the RealTracks styles Audio Reverb Reverb control are added fr individual tracks with RealTracks or RealDrums so you can easily add reverb 010 127 for any RealTrack Reverb type is also settable and savod with the song em EN At the top of the screen there is an A REV Audio Reverb control Click on an instrument radio button and then set the Audio Reverb for it Note that his only applies to RealTracks since MIDI tracks have MIDI Reverb which is set via REV control cml The Audio Reverb varies trom O 1o 127 Adjust she value by clicking a key on the an sereen piano keyboard Or right click or contral elick the control to enter a value See the RealTracks and RealDrum chapter for mo
212. g the Key Signature The key signature ofthe song is set bythe Key Signature area which is outside the Notation window and is under the Til of the song You l get a popup menu that allows you to choose key and optionally transpose the sang Typing chords in Notation Chords can be typed in the Notation window and entered at he curent position ofthe time bar Chords that are typed in the Notation window also show up on te chords CI F7 oss Ja ke Ja f Th is Bar 1 Chara The box ie highlted because there a part marker present a As you can sec the Notation window contains the notes and chords of the song The bar numbers are also present with the chorus number in brackets If there is a part marker present at the bar the bar number will be displayed in blue and there will be a letter a or b indicating the part marker Notation Window Contextual Menu Chords can be edited and major song editing features accessed fom the contextual menu that opens with Contratteliek or a right click in the Notation window S hos an be sop pe i or rud und Ct scii a Swansea oie etie oe pete Brae iniu T Gen naenin oa es Signature styles RealDrums volume levels Bay Settings far Bar 17 irs Patches and harmonies Song Settings Song Settings allow rests and pushes and control tags endings and fadeouts Preferences lor E Global system settings are accessed
213. gato length ofthe notes generated Instruments like Saxophone have longer legato phrasi 0 Latenes refers to how much after the beat the notes are played This is normally left at zero for Melodias 8 note spacing is usually left at zero Iset to a non zero value the notes will be farther apart units of 120ppq Increase velocity is used to increase or decrease the volume of the Melodist The next section of the Melodist Maker allows you to select options that contral what typeof melody will be generated Here s an explanation of these options Unique Themes Default 100 This is normally left at 100 But if you want to force the Melodist to stick withthe same theme throughout the song sc this to a lower value say 804 I shouldn t he set mach lower han 0 ced Phrasing Default 0 nus The Melodist tries to make phrases that are appropriate for the position in the song For example the fist 2 bars of the melody are appropriate for opening phrases Hut if you want to experiment with phrases that dont follow these rules set the Unusual Placed Phrasing toa value higher than 0 c g 30 Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions m Unique Themes 100 Unusual Placed Phrases 9 Simple 1st 2nd endings m1 Choose Unusual chord Force Long Phrases m Mix Minor and Major Chord Progs fo chord Substitutions Thruout Form 0 7 Number of Variations to Choose From 15 Tempo Range 180 to 250
214. ghts S Use of a weight of9 an one af tbe patterns is a special case Patterns with a weight of9 wili always be played instead of any other patterns on the same row These pattems usually have other options associated with hem to ensure they are played under certain circumstances only For example the pattem on this row has an option set of Bar Mask post il which means it will be the bar afier a drum fil In this casc the pattern has a Crash cymbal on beat 1 This pattern will always be played when the song is at the first bur ofa new part whieh is the bar after a drum fi gamag You can examine the options for any pattem by selecting the pattern by mouse clicking on it and then clicking on the EDIT button Move around the sereen to different pattes by either using the cursor keys or mouse clicking on the desired pattem FESS Lers examine the Drum pater by pressing the REC button This opens REC the Drum Editor window This sereen allows you to create or Edit drum Qo pavers in step time There are 16 columns representing bar af 16h notes The numbers on this sereen represent velocities from O to 127 Using the bottom row of the computer keyboard ic the XCVBNM keys is the fastest way to put in commonly used velocities or by selecting the various commonly used velocity buttons at the botom right of the Drum tern Entry screen You can also just type in the number that you want Try typing in some new drum no
215. give pushes ticks to push Choose the number ticks for each push t use 3 triplet 60 half note Style Pushes 16h note 40 ticks A B Bass 10 20 In this example the Bass part pattems will be pushed randomly 10 substyle and 20 of time in the B subtle Since Rests can be Shots that play a chord on beat 1 the style can define what instrument to use for this and t what velocity Similarly cach Push is accompanied by a drum stab and the style can define what instrument to use and at what velocity ifthe time in the A Drum Rest Inst _2 Snare Drum vj Drum Rest Vel 100 Drum Push inst 7 Ride Cymbal 7 Drum Push Vel mo Set Patches The Se ch and Volume for Style dialog box allows you to assign instruments toa style including default instrument volumes When the song is played back using the Style these puch changes will be sent to your synthesizer along with the default instrament volumes Remember to always use General MIDI Instrument numbers nat the Patch numbers af your synth unless you have a General MIDI synth If you don t requie a specific instrument for the style type a 0 for no patch change The patch changes take effect immediately in the style so that when you are recording Bass parts for example you will hear the bass patch that you have selected Thru Patch you set the Thu Patch to other than O the instrument tha
216. hange click on Clear Clear RealDrums change RealDrums change Tempo Change At This Bar Most songs will have a single tempo throughout but if you want to change the tempo st a certain bar ofthe sang then use this dialog box to type in the new tempo in beats per minute Or type ina relative tempo change in a range of 90 o 100 A setting of halves the tempo a setting of 100 doubles i o w Chapter Banna Hos Povetiuide Tempo can also be set by clicking on the metronome button Clicking on this button 4 times will ser the Click On hee tempo to your tapped in value The tempo change takes Ties effect at he beginning of the bar and remains until a To Set Tempo ew tempo change at another bar is inserted Volume Changes Volume levels can be changed at any bar either for All parts or for each part individually Volume 7127 127 All Changeby o Changes can be entered manually or selected from presets Mute The presets nae senings 1o Mute apart o Back to Normal stromsicalydetevel o v Change by Fade per bar Louder per bar Patch Changes at any Bar This setting allows you to insert a patch change at the beginning of any bar Type the General MIDI number of the patch change in the appropriate box ie Bass Soloist etc that you want to affect Tote To Edt Save ong wi patch changes al the beginning of he song you sh
217. he Add Favorite button This button is sso found in the StylePicker Technical Note Tha e of soogusije avories e eared In a Text ie caled Song verte it or Sferavertes nne Bandi ma Box older Always save all song setti i Now all settings are saved with songs including patches reverbs volume etc so the song will play the same way each me without having to set this in the Save and Harmonies with Song dalog IM Save all settings with Songs yr you kesp tne deft seting of Seca tings with Songs you will find that all setings are saved and londe with each song You shouldn t have to visit this dialog unless yon have some custom eme that you don t vant iste with he song ches Not that if you set a MIDI patch for one of the bass drumsipianouitrstrings parts that if you load in another style Band in a Box will overwrite your patches with the style patches Ifi didn t do that you would be stuck with the same patches regardless of the Style So if you want a certain pateh fora track set it after you have loaded in the style that you want Songs that are Saved As a different name now have the new name added to the Recently Played Song dialog Rendering Tracks Rendering now has a Normalize option to normalize individus tracks or the complete arrangement Normalizing boosts the volume toa maximum level without distortion Most professional musie tracks are normalized 7
218. he Piano Pattern Sereen Move to the Piano area by mouse clicking on the Pi vo button sssasesss sssssisss H you re making a simple piano patern youll only need to record patterns on the A 8 boat row the top row These pattems will get chosen for every chord regardless ofthe length But if you want the style to play diferent pattems when the song is encountering chords that last 1 2 3 or 4 beats you should recon separate pattems on these rows Recording Piano Patterns Mave to the top row of the piano area in column 1 Press the REC button This wil begin the recording of the piano patcr You will hear a 2 bar lead in and then you record a 2 bar piano patter For your piano pattern you will play a pattern based on a C7 chord You can use all 12 notes but should just play the pattern as you would ifthe shord was a C7 Tip Y you are uncerian whal to play press he LOAD buton and edi anolhar sive al comes with the program you can then play the pano pattems by the pressing the PLAY Button to see what pattems wo used 10 make it and imtate hem in your s Ace you have recorded the piano pattern a dialog Box with options will appear This allows you to specify the conditions that must occur for this pattem to be played back in the song These are called masks Usually you can just accep all the defaults which allow the pattern to be played at any time tamawo E gt nts Pinga armasi EE Tae Do
219. he Tile window It is also displayed under User Curren Se and information on the current style can be Viewed by selecting Ste Information om the User menu The IF button launches bc Favorites Recently Played CP Cong daio User Laad Forte ler nso opens in C Gye m D Favorites Recenly Played Chapter 6 Hand ina Ba PowerGuide us The Favorites and Recently Played Radio buttons toggle between a list af your recently played styles and yout Favorite songs styles This ets you quickly load in styles that have been used your last few sessions with Band in a Box The favorites tist will start off as an empty one but you can add Songssyles as your favorites by clicking the Add Favorite button This button is also Found in the StylePicker Check the Play When Chosen checkbox to have Band in a Box pl immediately upon selecting a style your song When OK to add recent files is checked Band in a Box automatically adds styles to thelist Use the Search button to save time seroling up and down the list Type in part of a name to search for zz When you have made your selection press OK to Toad the chosen style Click on Cancel to return to the main sereen without changing the style Types of Styles Band in a Box originally used MIDI styles with well over one thousand available ina wide variety of musical genres This version also
220. he dialogs for those settings OK to savelond revivolicborus wisongs fers global control over additional song settings Le reverb chorus ete bat can be saved andr loaded with each song Send GM mode at startup For sound modules that are GM compatible this command will ensure that the module is ready to accept GM specific MIDI data such as Bank Controller and Patch information Send GS Mode On at startup For sound modules that are GS compatible this command will ensure that tbe module is ready to accept GS specific MIDI dats such as Bank Controller and Patch information m Chapter Band ios Povertiuide opened Em cue rem PES eerie Somnus OETI e Meme os v marae NO vctus 10 noD Em easier eese m pastries redd Mise Mb Heth Mb crim Milf on Ceci at Gre Gertie ie ED Send NG Mode On at startup For sound modules that are XG compatible this command will ensure that the module is ready 1o accept XG specfie MIDI data such as Bank Controller and Patch information Turn External Keyboard s Local On at end of session Normally while using Band in a Box the local o setting for your MIDI keyboard is best since the THRU part will be coming from Band in a Box and you don t want to bear Your MIDI keyboard doubling the notes that are being played However when you ext Band in a Box you might want the local on setting for your synthesizer tumed back on This option defaults to true OK to beep wi
221. hment Se discussed above You would need to unchack ifr any song that you dont want on Chapter andina PomerCie as Additional Song Settings I Vary Style in Middle Choruses M Allow Pushes in Middle Choruses Rests IM Aliow Rests in First Chorus I Allow Rests in I Allow Rests in Last Chorus idle Choruses Allow Pedal Bass in Middle Choruses M Allow Embellishment of Chords Taas C Tag Exists Tag Jump After Bar Tag Begin at Bar Tag Ends After Bar F Generate 2 Bar Ending for This Song F Use 4 Bar Ending for RealTracks L Start the ending 2 bars early Fadeout ending bars o Cade O Solos should have a bluesy feel M Allow RealTracks substitutions based on tempo f Allow Real Tracks Shots Holds and Pushes E Chapter 6 Banna Povetuide Tag Settings A tag or coda is a group of bars that are played in the lst chorus ofa song I you heck the Tag Exists field then the tag will play during the last chorus of the song The tag begins afier the bar you specify as Tag Jump After Bar The song then jumps to the Tag Begin at Bar and plays until Tag Ends After Bar At the end of the tag the song then plays a 2 bar ending as usual Generate 2 Bar Ending for This Song Defaut You can disable the ending for a certain song You ean disable the endings for by clearing the checkmark for the Allow Any Endings sening in the Preferences dialog
222. how long our song is how many times we want the program to play through the chords in what key and bow fast Framing the Song To tell Band in a Box where the start and end of the song is we look at the middle of the Box main sereen O Cina aaa cod O Gre zzz c eol aa a Locate the framing settings there are three af them The numbers 1 32 in brackets are the bar numbers for the beginning and the end of he Chorus The number 3 to the right of the brackets is the number of times the Chorus repeats In the example above the Chorus starts at bar 1 ends on bar 32 and is going to play 3 times You can change these settings to play more choruses or make the Chorus start later for example in the case Shere you want an intro to play Setting the Key In the example shown the key is set to C but you can choose any key by clicking on the key signature and choosing from a list Ifyou do change the key Band in a Box will Chapter 2 QuickStart Tutorial u offer to transpose the chondsbest for you IE you ve entered a progression hat you intend for a particular key and hen choose the key afterward you should say no when asked to transpose the corset Setting the Tempo I yon know the tempo value of your ong you can enter it in the tempo ox The song example bove has a tempo of 120 There ian even faster way to enter a tempo Locate the minus key and the equals key in the number row of your co
223. ications Band in a Hox RealTracks This option is discussed in the previous topic RealTracks Folder Archive The Archive button will erase the AIFF files in the RestTracks folder when there is a smaller MAA file available The AIFFs can be restored at a ter time by pressing the Install buton Cais rde OK Gam He Defaults sets RealTracks Settings back to default settings Save the new stings you have made in this dialog by pressing the Update button Most changes will take effect the next time you press Pla E Chapter Bands Povetuide Press OK to make your section and exit the RealTracke Settings dialog Press Camel to exit the RealTracks Settings dialog without making any changes Using RealTracks These are three ways that you can use Real Tracks with Band in Box 1 ReatTracks in songs The RealT rks toolbar button launches the Assign Real racks to Track dialog which alo displays the current RealTracks that are assigned to cach track This dialog is also available with a right mouse click on any Band in a Box part name Then select the Choose RealTracks menu command 2 RealStyles These are Band in a Box styles Style that have atleast one RealTrack For example the style called GEORGEP sty is ReslStle because it uses RealPedalStel for the Strings part as well as other instruments MIDI bas MIDI piano MIDI guitar RealDrums 3 RealSolo
224. ick on the chord When Edir Chord is selected a highlight cell opens at the chord location Type in Be name of the new chord using stundard Band in a Box chord entry characters and press the Enter key to make the edit h7 Bm 18 Bm Th edited chord name is luc in color Individual edits can be removed with the Remove Chord Edit command or all dis in the song can be removed with the Remove All Chord Edis command Part markers chord Symbols key signature and tuning setting are saved in Band in a Box and are passed Back and forth othe Chord Wizard The Audio Chord Wizard is a great way to leam the chords of songs You can add section markers and divide the song logically into sections so it is also a great way to lam the form of the song an essential part of leaming popular songs As well as the chords of he song the Audio Chord Wizard also the tempo of the file bar lines throughout the song fine tuning detection e g 5 cents sharp from A440 sou Nois Ausa Chor Wizard estimates ha chord progression Gan audi We Wie NOT an A dicie MID transcriber which would be a much more elaborate program Note Bars The Note Bars display is an altemative to the Chordshect window It shows many of the motes found in the ile This serves as a helpful guide to transcription and can also help to verify chon names Chapter 12 Wizards Tutors and lice The Audio Pano Roll is divided b
225. icking on the part name Change the desired parameter to affect the new setting E rne ERE MEAE E CO en nett roast E shows the current instrument for the selected part The Instrument Pan You can access your patches with ease through the patches popup mens To access this menu simply click on the instrument box you would like to change e Piano Bass Chapter amp The Main Sereen EJ Sol et move your mouse pointer over the instrament panel box i e Piano 1 Acoustic Piano and click anywhere on the instrument name Then select the new patch fiom the popup menu Clicking on the up A and down Y arrows will move up and down the list of instrument Patches one at a time C Yeas Tess trea neos The Fevorte Instrument Pane alloys you to assign upto of our fai Seleting Favorite Instruments Patches Tesdeca Ferris luat fr epar pat yot nc fo set de taataa part t i on deste pat Geri Cras Pao Oona Car Oita nba OR OT Then click on ne ofthe 10 Favorite tns ASAT AAAS s s s t0 one ofthe numbers between 1 and 10 will appear in the Instrument Panel Eeer Te Selecting Favorite Combos To send one of the Favorite Combo patch changes you ned ta select Q Combo i Comba part by clicking on the Combo bunan Then click on one ofthe 10 Favorite tons The Favorite DBGIEIEJGIEICIGIENG Comto ti was asigned toone arime sumbers between 1 and 10 will appear in Combe 1 patch changes sent f
226. iew Band in a Box Manual Panic All Notes Off Fl a Visit web site www pgmusic com stall menu Hems related to the search term in a Box manual opens a comprehensive pdf manual with bookmarks for ic AU Notes Om This sends a sweep ofall MIDI notes OME Use if notes are stuck On Visit weh site ww pgmusiecom Launches your Internet browser and loads die PG Music Ine hone page Keystroke Commands Hot Keys Is ofen faster to use keystrokes instead af picking up the mouse We ve added many tej hot keys to mute instruments oro adjust volume panning reverb horas or ank of instrument without using the monse Ia bot key is ot performing as expected it might be because the operating system hus assigned a different function to that key You can disable the operating system hot keys asignos by going to the Apple System Preferences Keyboard Mouse and clicking fn the Keyboard Shortcuts ab Seil dawn to find the key you are looking fr and check ii the Or column Then yout Bandi Bor ht key shoul work properly Keystroke List This is a list of keystroke hot key These keys are also listed on the pull down menus beside the funcion Play the song Ba Set the first bar ofthe Chorus sen m Chap 14 Reterence Copy Delete the Highlighted Chord Area Set the Last Ending bar ofthe Chorus Display and edit Favorite Patches Dialog Reset Sound Canvas and send BB MIDI stings Melody Har
227. if the Track Type is set t0 Multi 16 Channel in the Afelod menu Myou have such a MIDI guitar part that was recorded with separate pitch bend information on 6 channels you can import the 6 channels into Band in a Box Set the Melody tack tobe a guitar track Melad Track Type and then use the Guitar Settings dialoz in the Guitar window to set the Output guitar racks on 6 channels for this song o betre This has been done for the Nashville Salos files like NGOO1 MIGU available as an add on to Band in a Box When this option is set the patch changes Panning and soon will be sent on all 6 MIDI channels Import MIDI File Import which Channels BM M MM MEM MEM 12324 5678 9 101112 131415 I6 AL Chone 4 bars to offset from start g How Many bars to import 1000 blank b to insert at beginning G Include notes eariy by 120ppa T5 include continuous controllers and pitch bend E include Patch changes C Merge wih existing data on Tack GEOD Cai w Chapier caring Tracks bars to offset from start you want to sar reading from the beginning of the MIDI file select O as the ofset If you want to be read starting at bar 32 for example select an offset of 32 bars How many bars to import Leave this setting at the default of 1000 to readin the entire file unless it s longer than 1000 barst or set it to the number of bars that you are interested in if you don t want the whole file f
228. ile The chords will then appear on the ad sheet starting at bar I overwriting any chonis shat were there previously Jazz Up the Chords Jazz Down the Chords When switching genres liom Pop to Jazz or Jazz to Pop it s often necessary to change the chords from Pop Rock chords C to Jazz type chords Like CMaj7 Now you can quickly do this by new menu options called Jazz Up Jazz Down Choose the menu iem User Jazz Up or User Jazz Down a do this Jazz Up This funcion simply converts triads to 7 chords producing a lead sheet more suitable for Jazz Ifyou havea song with triad chords like C or Dm you San choose to Jazz Up the chords When you do this you get an option of Whether you d like to see Maj Maj6 or Dominant 7 for the major triads Jazz Down This function convents 7th chords to triads for a lead sheet more suited to Pop musie Applying Styles There are many styles available for use with the Band in a Box program For the purposes ois program sles refer ta styles o musi ie Jazz Swing Tango luc Pop Ballad etz Ether before or after you have entered dhe chords oa song You wil tae to pick one af these tle Once a siyle 1s loaded the sang wil be played hack in on Current Style Window Current Style Selection Indiana IGARNER STY Ab 190 1 32 3 The name of the current style appears under the name of the song in t
229. ile To save the current settings to a preset type in a name for your preset in the Preset Name field eseinane vA Briss icon the red Save a Preset arrow and choose location in the Preset is You can write over an existing name iy high Density s medium 1 Band in a Box Default Reverb A prompt will ask you to confirm that you want to save the preset Do you want to save the current settings named right Ran into he preset currently named P Default Chapter Bund io PowerCaie us Select Ves to save the new preset o the chosen location Auto Reverb BAsio Add Reverb to RealTracks Strength X 100 Enable Aute Add Reverb to RealTracks to mutomatically apply preset amounts of reverb to Real Tracks according o the instrament type No reverb is added to the Bass pan for example but most instruments get reverb you just want more or less reverb added overall you can adjust the Suengrh si For example the default Band in a Box reverb setting is 40 for most tracks If you set the Strength to 7536 the Band in a Box becomes 30 CSeve as Defauit Reverb you can save the current settings as the Default Reverb Restore Defaults Chick on Restore Defaults to go hack to the original Tac reverb setings for Band in a Box Default Reverb DAW Plug In Mode There is a plug in mode for your favorite sequencer GarageBand ProTools Logic Nuendo Reaper and more
230. ill Jazz Down the chordis by changing chords with Tis e CT to rinds e Chand sand 3s to 7 chonb Song embellishment is tumed olt Press OR Jaze Down to proces Chord Substitution Dialog choose your own a given song to have a preferred number of This allows you to see a list of possible chond substitutions for the current chord progression Auto Generate Chord Substitutions This will automatically pick chord substitutions for all r part of the song Chord Builder Allows you to build up chords using mouse clicks You can enter chords by ear without having to know the actual chod names or any music theory This feature also illustrates the differences beween various chord ypes lay Current Chord Click on any chord and use this command or press Shift Return to instantly hear how it sounds Chapter 14 Reference mw Melody Menu Import Melody from MIDI File Import Melody from Clipboard Record Melody Record Melody From Bar Step edit Notes Quantize Melody Humanize w stralght feel Humanize w swing feel Humanize Melody Transpose Melody Copy 1st chorus to all song Kill entire melody Kill Melody Choruses Adjust Level of Melody TimeShift Melody ticks Insert Beats In Melody Delete Beats in Melody Copy to Soloist Track Move To Soloist Track swap Melody and Soloist Track Melodist Generate Chords and Mel Melody Maker Track Type V Embellish Melody during playbac
231. in a Box Just Dm load an sudio file to instantly see the chords AON Using the Audio Chord Wizard is a great way to leam and practice popular songs as you play along and sec the chords Launch the Audio Chord Wizard with the toolbar button or with the Windows Ram AudioChodWizunl menu commands am 6 c E amp gm A Am g Gr n Tem A Ao H3 e m Em7 j Audio Chord Wizard Window The Audio Chord Wizard window shows an overview ofthe open wave file with the bar lines and chords as interpreted by the wizard below Controls and settings are found in the toolbar at the top of the window and the chordsheet in the lower part of the window shows chords and bars as interpreted from the wave fle Use the minus and plus zoom buttons at he bottom of the sereen to adjust the seale of te display BE e 24 Chapter 12 Wan Tutors and Ulis Primary Program Controi Stop C SetBarone C Tap tarine rab 7 C ok send to mias lAvg Tempo M ratte Auta vive Dupuy 47 jls amp Keyboard Shorteuts Jy Panic Space bar or multimedia key Stop play rewind to start with Ese key or multimedia Stop key Press the eter W to rewind without Stop Set the Bar One location The Audio Chord Wizard works best if you do this first before any other actions on Tabor Moves nearest ar line to current play posi F8 keys also set bar lines
232. in the Pay from Chorus 1 Bar 17 Preferences n Chapter 7 Nan and Printing Notation Modes There are 3 modes to the Notation window 1 Notation Mode To display or print notation and enter chords 2 Editable Notation Mode To enter or edit notation and chords 3 Staff Roll Mode To emer edit notation duration and velocity EN Ye ean tante between cach ofthe modes by pressing the Notion Mode button on the Notation toolbar Shiftteliek on the IN buton will back up one notation mode Standard Notation Window The Standard Notation window is for display entry of melodies and chords or any truek You sce the melody chonds on sereen just as you would in a lead sheet You can ven display the Bas Drums Guitar Piano or Strings tracks in notation Handles Jazz Sighih notes and triplet figures corectly Automate options ike auto durations clean notation mono display minimize rests and engraver spacing produce very musical and readable notation Notes can be entered in step time clicking withthe mouse on the staff or on the onsereen piano or in real time from a MIDI Keyboard Editable Notation Mode This allows you to enter or edit notation Usually the Melody and Soloist tracks are the only ones youll want to edit Note Alhaug yeu could edit he cher racks eg Bass Fack your adie wouid De lost when tha song is re composed when you press Play unless you make a MOI fi to c
233. includes RealStyles with audio tracks generated from live recordings of top studio musicians Built In MIDI Styles For a quick generic choice that will give you a good general idea of how your arrangement sounds you can use the original Sivles menu to pick a builtin style 106 Chapter Band ios Povertiuide The es 24 styles that we made were built into the program and are stil referred to as Built in Styles These styles are no longer built into the program making them liable like all other Band in a Box styles The built in styles may be selected from the Ses pull down menu They are a convenient way to quickly apply a basie style to a song User MIDI Styles The other styles that we make ane called user styles because they are editable The er styles may be selected by clicking on the Style button or Io from the Sy pull down menu or Io by selecting Load Side fram Dis ftom the User menu or by pressing rn ReatStyles Audio Reales are styles that use Real Tracks and ResDrums with audio tracks generated from live recordings by top studio musicians There s also a category for Styler wi Reaffracks which use a mix of audio and MIDI wack Styles with ReaDrums use MIDI instruments wth audio ReilDrums Styles canals be selected by mouse licking directly on the name of the style in the Title window The Select Style window StylePieker will appear The StylePicker SiMe Me Select Style window also k
234. indow you can create a Song Til change the Style of the song change the Key Signature the song is using define the Tempo of the song define where the Chorus begins and ends and how many Choruses the song has To change these settings click on the setting you wish to change Favorite songs button CF Sang MCCURR Style Demo Favorite styles button F Siig R CURR STY CURR Nashville Rock The two F buttons activate dialogs with Favores and Recently Played Radio button that toggle between a list of your recently played songs or styles and your favorite songs or styles O Favorites 9 Recently Played layed allows you so quickly load songs or styles that have been used in your last sessions with Band n a Box You will find this to be u convenient way ta load songs or styles into Band in t Box since the list generated will give you instant access to the ones you are most likely to be laying with regardless of where they are stored u Chaplet amp The Main Sereen aad Ea The favorites ist will start off as empty one but you can Add Favorite aid songsstylesas your favorites by clicking the Add Favorite Bon Tis button is also found in the StylePicker Check OK To Add recent files o allow your recently loaded songs to be added to this list File Open Favorite Songs or Shift F3 also opens this window rSengi
235. ing Volume Panning Reverb Chorus Bank Freeze Tracks Saving Songs Preferences User Settings Other Editing Features MIDI Setup The JukeBox Chapter 7 Notation and Printing Notation Printing Chapter 8 Automatic Music Features Automatic Songs The Melodist Automatic Solo Generation The Soloist Automatic Guitar Chor Solos The Guitarist Chapter 9 Recording Tracks Real Time Recording Step Edit Notes Entering Notes Manually in the Notation Window Recording with the Wizard Feature Importing Pre Recorded MIDI Data Reco using The Melodist Additional Options far Melody Solis Track Chapter 10 Audio Features Rendering Audio Files Render MIDI Track to AIFF File Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions The StyleMaker The Harmony Maker The Soloist Maker The Melodist Maker The Guitarist Maker Chapter 12 Wizards Tutors and Utilities Audio Chord Wizard Chords from MPS MIDI File Chord Wizard The Reharmonis Chord Breaks s 248 ES The Guitarist Guitar Tutor Chord Substitution Wizard Chord Builder Animated Drum Kit Drum Kit Main Window Chapter 13 CoreMIDI and Apple DLS Synth CoreMIDI and Apple DLS Synth Tutorial Chapter 14 Reference File Menu Edit Menu Song Menu Sayles Menu User Menu Melody Menu Soloist Menu Harmony Menu MIDI Memu GS Mem Windows Menu Help Menu Keystroke Commands Hot Keys Chor List PG Music Inc Inde
236. ing new chord progressions You can also improve your harmony ea training by figuring out the chords as they are being played without looking at the chard symbol display Generate Melodies only over existing chord progressions Using Melodist Jukebox Use the versatile Melodist Jukebox feature to Generate Songs Chords d Melodie in succession Generate Solos only over generated chord progressions Generate Solos over the same chord progression to practice blues soloing for example Automatic Intros The Melodist will automatically generate an introduction for the songs it creates Itis also possible to generate an introduction for any song from the Edit nro Bars Auto Generate menu option Ctet Shitt B eres aT BRETT Chord Types he eene asan ins othe ona nr tea ain NET III ned Makes SERE aee E Chem Se murine or was nap D This wil creta chord progression that ges inserted as an into to the song based on the optional settings you choose Chord Types can be Jazz or Pop Intro Length can be 2 4 or 8 bars to suit the tempo of the sang Starting Chord after intro is ets the intro lead in to the song correctly Pedal Bass has a list of pedal bass options based in the key entered in the ox Pres the Re Generate Intro Chords button to auto generate chords for an intro Press the Remove Intro button to remove the intro from the song Automatic Song Title Generation The Melodi
237. ing the M button allows you to choose from the full listet harmonies The FIV key disables the Melody harmony The T button is for Thru harmony Whatever you play along on your MIDI keyboard while the song is playing will be aut harmonized in real time in this ease using a Tenor Banjo type harmony Pressing the f button allows you to choose frm a list af only your most frequently used harmonies Pressing the T button allows you 1 choose fom the full list of harmonies The keystrokes Ctrt F10 disable the Thru harmony Chapter 4 The Main Sereen Chordsheet Area Chord Entry The basic way of entering a song in Band in a Box is by typing in the chords to the song using the computer keyboard Chords are typed in using standard chord symbols like C or Fm7 or Bb7 oc BbIS 9 E Chords can be cut pasted and copied from ane location to another Another ay of entering chords is through MIDI chord recognition Play any chord on Your MIDI keyboard and Band in a Box will recognize it instantly and insert it onto the hordsheet This allows you to enter an entie song without having to type in any of the chords To use this feature select the ser current MIDI chord from the M menu Cirt Return is the keystroke combination for this function The chord you choose will be automatically inserted into your song chordsheet or notation viw at the current cursor location Then Band in a Box is read
238. ing will appen Moving a note in time you want to change the start time af a note drag the note with the left mouse button to the new location This is simple way to move the note Alternatively you could edit the note numerically with an option click on the note Changing the pitch of a note Similarly you can drag the note vertically to change the note value and release it when you re on the nate you want Hold down the shift contral or 36 key to have the note inserted as a sharp flat or natural respectively Editing a note s values Click on a note while holding the option key This brings up the Note Edit dialog box hat lets you change any values about the note in numerical daa us Chater 7 Nation ind Printing Note Edit 120 ticks 1 beat Channel T Time s s 85 Bar Beat Tick Note DES Velocity 55 Statictxt F 1 32 Duration Beat Tick 120 ticks 1 beat C OD e Staff Roll Notation Mode EAD isk or the Notation Mode button apain to enter Stal Roll mode twi Took like this Ab Gb7 F7 velocity Lines Duration Lines This mode is similar to the Editable Notation mode execpt the beats begin right on the Parlin You can also sec the durations of the notes visually represented by horizontal blue lines Similarly you can see the velocities of the notes displayed as vertical lue lines Note Myou cant coe frese ines press ihe Opt baton to ensure
239. ists These are Soloists that are generated on the Soloist track by pressing the Soloist bution on the main sereen RealSoloists using RealTracks begin at 361 in the list of Soloists There is a Real racks button in the Select Soloist dialogue that jumps directly to the list of RealTracks soloists Using RealTracks in Songs Assign RealTracks to Track Dialog The Assign RealTracks to Track dialog assigns a RealTracks instrument o any ofthe Band in a Bon instrumental tracks It also shows any RealTracks that are assigned o This dialog is launched by either right clicking or Ctrislick or double click on an instrument name at the top ofthe Band in a Box main Screen and clicking on Choose Choose RealTracks Real Tracks in the menu Generate RealTrack Save MIDI track as AIFF file Egl Realtracks Picker Dialog Shift Click taris Realtracks Preferences Ctrl Click Pressing the Real rk toolbar button and selecting ReulTruck Picker Dialog Chapter Bund io Poweue EI The dialog allows you to assign a specifie RealTracks instruments to a track ina song T also displays any RealTrocks that are currently TE sign to this track IO sass lO Piano D Drums cuitar Song 484 Guitar Rh Jazz Bal v 085 O strings O Melody soloist Use the Realtracks below for this song only Ths will assign a RealTracks to the curent song
240. ists w song Enable this option if you want Soloists to be automatically loaded with a song that was saved with Soloist information Allow Soloist Harmony on THRU Enable this option to permit the Soloist to utilize the Harmony features This will allow the Soloist to make a harmonized solo withthe harmony of your choice See the Select Soloist dialog far additional details Edit Soloist Track This menu command opens a sub menu of editing options Import Soloist from MI I File allows you to import MIDI dta ftom a into the Soloist tack Import Soloist from Clipboard allows you to import MIDI data that has been pasted into the clipboard e from a sequencer such as PowerTracks Record Soloist records a MIDI part to the Soloist track instead of recording to the Melody track Record Soloist From Bar ihligh ce Step edit Notes allows you to entered a solo in step time from an event list Quantize Soloist opens the Quantize dialog The Humanize feature is an advanced version of this function Homanize w straight feel Humanize w swing fec Band in a Box uses intelligent bumanization routines which ean humanize a Soloist from one fee to another from onc tempo to another and vary the amount of swing in Sih notes but not randomly Te results are very musical with natural sounding MIDI solos Homanize Soloist opens the Soloist Quantize to New Tempo or Feel dialog The humanize effect is broken down into 5 main categories Te
241. ith it If you don t want Melodists to change the curent style that you have loaded then deselect this option The Auto Titles option will generate a new titie for the son The Form selection box allows you to choose between a song generated witha specifie form AABA 32 bars or no form The AABA default to 32 har form Which is the most popular song form Box to generate a title for your song select the Auto Titles Nous Weiss may atematusWy be sel 1o 64 bars e g Melodist TE Cal Gd Bar orm The song orm refers to the patie that the verse and chorus repeat An AABA 32 form has satone of 8 bars each ihe a section ie the verse and ne is the chorus or bridge of the song If you d prefer far the song to have no form you coud set the song to ho form This wouldr bo a very musical seting but might be useful for practicing or sar ung The choruses setting determines how many choruses ofthe song orm Melodies are to be generated For example ise to 5 the Melodist will generate 5 choruses enough for an intro chorus ending chorus and 3 Middle Choruses The choruses Setting defaults to the choruses present in the current song There are convenient buttons that will set these settings to papular presets For example pressing the Chords amp Mel button will set the checkboxes to Generate Chords amp Melody but not Solos The AI button will generate Chords Melody and Solos The Chords button sets th
242. ive Internet Ch www pam com Bo sure fo vis the FAO pages at wana pamusie cam or formation abaut known troubleshooting issues as well ths latest technical support busine Pa Mase tne ES Index 2 bar ending carly 87 senerate A2 Transpose alterate rot m2 anticipations m Apple Audio MIDI Setup 263 Assign RealTracks to Teacks 67 Audio locate r rendering 186 Audio Chord Wizard aute cstimat fine tuning 236 chord detection 232 chords from MP4 chordsheet chordsheet overview controls E cm m fine tuning 235 key signature E more features ET note bars ET opening fes 232 special eases drastic tempo changes dd length bars window Audio Reverb parameters presets senings us Auto Chord Substitution dialog senings auto sibitution Band in a Box guitar chord solo 167 ba stings s Bar setings E Bar Beat senings 103 Bass pa type ES build chonds 102 Builder button 256 change patches a change sy Channels Sering 136 chord w2 outputting to external device 139 Chord breaks Chord Builder dialog Chord disi chord options Chord Preview w2 chord progression ass chord root as Chord settings E chondshorcus 1 Chord Subs burton 256 Chord Substitution Wizan 254 anto subsituon 254 comments 234 chord substitutions 254 256 range of bars ndo Chord Substitution Dialg 254 sn 255 chord tones im Chord tr am Ch
243. ix the track and save it Note Number The note is played out through the MIDI driver so you can hear it The note is also drawn on the Keyboard at the top ofthe sereen so you can see it Input the MIDI Note Number There are 128 MIDI notes Every C note is a multiple of 12 which makes middle C called CS for the 5 octave note number 60 For example CS 60 C 5 61 DS 62 ec Inthe example above therefore the note 64 would be 4 semitones above middle C an E Velocity Type in a velocity to control the volume that the note is played at Change the velocity to aero to stop a note from being played Note that you can globally change the volume of amp melody tac from the melody pil down menu Time Represents the total time in ticks for the current event fom the beginning ofthe song At 120 pq resolution a quarter ote equals 120 ticks and a bar of 4 4 time is 480 ticks This number includes the lead in bar o 490 ticks L Chapter Recording Tracks Bar Beat Number Tick The Bar Beat and Tick show the time that the note is played Ticks are the smallest unit equal to 1 120 ofa quarter note Duration This is the length of time that the note is played 120 ticks of duration 1 beat quarter noe Previous Next Event Use these arrow controls to move through the MIDI track one note at a time Insert Before After This allows you to insert an event before or after the currently displayed event No
244. k Embellish Melody Dialog Convert Harmony to Melody Track Generate Guitar Chord Solo Rechannel to Guitar Display Utilities Remove Harmony or guitar solo from Melody Track aoz ers gt gt XE XL gt Import Melody from into the Melody tack IDI File allows you to import MIDI data from a fil MID Import Melody from Clipboard allows you to import MIDI data that has been pasted into the clipboard e g roma sequencer Record Melody launches he Record Tracks dialog to record a MIDI melody Record Melody From Bar lets you click on any bar to start reconing there Step edit Notes allows you to entered a melody in step time using an event list Quantize Melody This menu command opens the Quantize dialog wher can be quantized all or part ofthe Melody tack Quantize Resolution per bar Starting at bar Chorus 1 Bars to quantize 999 Quantize durations X 50 M Quantize start I quantize Durations E Ge Choose the division you would like the track quantized to Choosing 16 will quantize to Teh notes ing at Bar and Chorus Quantization will begin at the place you select and applied for the number of bars Bars to quantize Leave at 999 to quantize the entire trach Quantize durations Choose 100 ifyou want the notes quantized exactly to the division Otherwise the oes will be moved the toward the target quantization
245. ker with a blank new style ection loaded This allows you to cdit style can then be saved with the same SiylcMaker with the current style Styl from disk The resulti same or a different name Current Style This shows the file name ofthe curent style in use Style Information Shows a summary of information about the current style OK to Load Styles w songs Normally this is checked so that songs lud with the associated style But let s say we ve discovered a new style and want to iry it out on many different songs In that case We would ensure that this tem is NOT checked Then when a song is loaded it will play in The new style we are trying out lute Melody during middle choruses This gives the Solois s chance to play on a given song during the middle choruses ogg this option On it you would iks the melody to be muted during these choruses Ki Melody in Middle choruses his command will permancally erase the mide choruses ofthe Melody Force song tob choruses Toggle this option On if you would i chores Anto Generate Song Title Band in a Box will generate an infinite varity of tiles or your songs Jaze Up the Chords This wil Jazz Up the chords by changing chords ike C and Cmaj to 7 and 6 chords Song embellishment wil be tumed om for the song Select the type of is fom the ist Box then click on the OK Jazz UP burton Jazz Down the Chords This w
246. ks are now saved with the song We ve added Multiple Undo support up to 999 levels of Undo There are new Reveth and Bass Treble controls foreach track allowing you to add these to individual ReaTracks All setings are now saved with cach sang And many more The Details The New Features in Band in a Box 2010 for Mac tosh are Theres now a Plug in mode for your favorite sequencer GarageBand ProTools Logic Nuendo Reaper and more With the new plug in mode Band in a Box is open as a small window and acts as a plug in for your favorite DAWisequencer so that you an Drag n Drop MIDI and audio AIFF tracks from Band in a Box to your Favorite sequencer Work in your favorite sequencer type a progression in Bund in a Box and then simply drag the tack from Band in a Box to your sequencer tack atthe desired track and har location No more long waits for RealTracks to generate ReafTracks generate much faster 4X faster on average A typical song with ReafTracks that took 20 seconds to generate will now generate in about 3 seconds And if you freeze some or all tracks in the song sce below playback of RealTracks is almost instantaneous Time for generating MIDI arrangement is much faster now instantaneous less thun I second Freezing locking MIDI tracks or RealTracky RealDrums Any track MIDI or Real can now be frazen When frozen it won t be changed or re teneratd This saves time when replaying
247. l Option or the Embellisher grace note button on the main sereen Embel aoa ee Ive Auto embelish during every playback seine mee Es 5 Beaman es numm Mima Ted Norer 481 Trumps Octave adj0 Bais Cet Mi ptt els 70 inr Noes pee m Takes Doubled Notes l Grace Notes 5 S Aad Notes 42 Reed Ant essaniceaions 4213 Vato Nores 27 Roc notes EI Mise as Ube Caren Eriein Miara Note To CS rete us Ces beth NOW Permanent Riva Curr iere Par Bin ee enira to Melody Tracka use ma Chapier 9 esoring Tracks IV Live Auto embellish during every playback ring every playback is the same setting that is on he main page checkbox If enabled embellishment will occur durig every playback If disabled embellishment will not cur unless you choose the Re Embellish NOW Permanent button in the dialog Embe Live Auto embellish r Presets Preset Custom id The presets lw you to choose a combination of common settings for the Embellisher quickly The Embellisher Memo describes the curent embellishment with statisties counting the number of embellished notes Nemo Total Notes 481 Trumpet Octave adj 0 av pitch 67 ideal 70 Extra Notes 1 Turns 5 Doubled Notes 1 Grace Notes 5 Anticipated Notes 42 Reduced Antic 13 Vibrato Notes 27 Update Current Embellishment
248. l style before or after you have entered the chords to song Once you toad a style the song will be played back using your chosen style AII tyle files have a Style extension Besides these built in styles there are many mone styles available for use with he Band inco Here are other ways to access styles Style Y Pressing the Style burton will bring up the StylePicker window with Style infonnation on ali the styles found in your Band in a Box folder The F button brings up the Recently Played Favorites dialog where you can choose from the styles that you use most ole Chapter 14 Reference E User Menu Load Style From Disk U Load Favorite Styles Save Style As Make A New Style STYLE MAKER Edit Existing User Style any Current Style JAZQUINT STY Style Information v OK to Load Styles w songs Mute Melody during middle choruses Kill Melody in Middle choruses Force song to choruses Auto Generate Song Title 05 Jazz Up the Chords Jazz Down the Chords Chord Substitution Dialog Choose Your Own Auto Generate Chord Substitutions Chord Builder 0H Play Current Chord te Load Style From Disk Go to the file dialog and open a style fom the Styles folder jad Favorite Styles Opens the favorites list of the most recent styles selections je Style As Save a new style or and edited style or rename an existing style ke A New Style StyleLE MAKER eMa
249. lDrums are enabled in the RealDrums Settings dialog There are also additional volume controls here To make your overall dB setting a bit higher or lower for this particular Band in a Box style you can enter a setting here There are also fields for adjusting the a or Subsection volumes only you remove the check mark from either Allow a substyle RealDrums of Allow substyle ReslDrums the one with the checkmark remaining will be used for the emire song regardless of what substyle is currently called for in the song Choose Vary styles with each play to hear a different variation cach time Play is pressed so the song sounds fresh cach time One time you ll hear it with brushes the ext time with sticks and ride cymbals ete Long Name 32 chars A long style name can be stored in the style up to 32 characters and this will appear on Screen and in the StylePieker Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions w Jazz Style This les Band in a Box know ifthe style you ve made is a Jazz style or not It s Jazz style it will use the Jazz Snars aes Drum instead af the Pop SnareBass Drum and also makes some other decisions based on this setting Tempo This allows you to set the default tempo for the Style This is stored with the style You an also change this tempo by the tempo button on the StyleMaker main screen Tempos Son also be changed by he and keys When creating a new song the te
250. lays In addition to the note names being outlined in the colors as discussed above when the note is played it is highlighted in green if it is scale note and yellow if it is an ou of scale not Guitar Window Toolbar At the bottom af tbe Guitar Window is the toolbar These are the Guitar Settings See below for details The position button toggles between the 2 popular positions lt POS gt displayed with note names IE eo Guitar Window the first thing you ll want to do is choose the track that you Want to display Usually this will bea Melody track ora Soloist tack In the illustration here the Melody track is the curent track and it has a rd rectangle around io indicate this To gett the Soloist tack click on the S bution or use the keystrokes CirleFS Similarly you ean display other tracks ike Bass Piano ec Chapter 12 Wizards Tutors and Les w The Guitar Settings Dialog wie Civ __Fratboare Orave D7 show Notes at Aeolian Position Hiceew an ua Se eave B snow ote at Phe Fon Forties ue index Pinger Potion hanc nose ote names Sme cmane HE Anse oon ret cor Bato swich Postion Gom show out ot range nores Gor With et 5507 J37 Bie Netes to Nin Widow CIT Rate Display B Current Track B MDI Thru Options I MIDI Thru is selected Defaut On the Guitar will display Note Di jn the the musie played on a MIDI keyboard If Current Track is select
251. ld will be filled in for you Call ihis one Bebop Saxophone For the memo you can put in information like Basie bebop Sax slo will wore with most swing styles Check Double Time if tempo is slower 4 Choose the typeof soloist ie Swing Rb notes Even Sth notes Swing 16th notes ete This should be set 1o Swing Sth 5 This style uses the default S12 database J SWING ST2 Another choice could be made from the Soloists folder by clicking on the LST2 button 6 Press the Choose bution to select the instrument he soloist should play i Tenor Saxophone Tolar You may alsa sec an natant fom the Patch Grange window but selecting an tumenl win na choose button also fd nthe note range information specife ta that Instrument Youl notice thatthe correct range for tenor saxophone has been fled in to the Nola Range setings aw Chapter 11 User Programmable Funcins To Modify if required the phrase length space length and outside range parameters X Change the Legato Boost to 10 to add 10 to the duration of the notes 9 Increase the Lateness by 5 This wil play the notes more on the beat than other jazz soloists 10 Increase the Rh Note spacing by fel than other Jazz soloists This will play the 8th notes in a more even I your sereen looks something like the one shown press JOK Then give Band in Box a few moments o load its knowledgebase of solo ideas and new parameters and an addi
252. lder in alphabetical order This allows you to freeze any or all racks so that Band in a Box will not overwrite them with new arrangements Tracks play back instantly Vou can still edit the tacks yourself This launches the Reverb Settings dialog with setting for the type and amount of reverb to use These settings apply only to the RealTracks as there is a separate MIDI reverb control Chair The Main Sereen EI The Reharmonst creates a chont progression based only on the AIA melody of the song It ean also reharmonize existing chord vor gresions sebum PO The grace note button opens the Melody Embellsher dialog for customizing the Melody Embellishr mba Press the Chao button to launch the Generate Guitar Chord Solo a dialog Based on the existing Melody track this generates a guitar hort sla using correct guitar fet positions cxesole lai St This button connects to the scs pamusie com web site Eg The Song Title button auto generutes a song title pr the current song Title Each time it is pressed a new tile is generated pr s ite This lunches the Chord Builder window Chords may be auditioned i and then entered into the chordsheet by clicking in the menus in this dialog suider lE emen o the next page in she chondshest Each Bp remm Title Window CE Gam CER Sra Dune CE Cty ctun sms CURR ete Rock A uwa In the Tide w
253. le or any of the units that have a patch file Tor higher banks PAT file listed for them then press the buton on the main sereen to choose the PAT file from the Synthicts folder 2 Chapter S Guided Tou of Banda Box This is an especially useful feature if you have a synthesizer or sound source that has patches on bi Bat appears when yon click on this button looks like this er banks beyond the basie 128 General MIDI instruments The window Patches on Higher Banks GSPAT Variations of include Family Ems AE Duned EP 2 Coupled Hos PUNO MSB Bark LSB Bank TM Acmunt Crand Pare um x tri Actum Piana m a n CM Electric rand Pano edo ows CM Honky tone Pane CM Rhodes Pano Send Fah OPen 9A CM Chorused Plano Create Copen oor CM faros Buse 1 based patch tng Roland Ever pe ME Qs tan utis Ga This will provide you witha and where the patch is located patch bank on the right Add RealDrums tof all the patches available to you by name on the ed The RealDrums feature replaces MIDI drums with audio drums recorded live by top studio drummers ReslDrums can be set to replace MIDI drums in all songs or they can be assigned o just one song at a time RelDrums Picker Use the RealDrums Picker to choose RealDrums fr the current song only RD button RealDrums menu command Chapter S
254. le style fom the file dialog Select the Strings button to display the String patterns for this style Select an bent String pater to copy and press the COPY bution Choose the LOAD button Select the ZZLITROK Style style Press the OPEN button to open this style Choose an empty beat b String pattern because that is where the String pattem was recorded in and press the PASTE button Press the SAVE button to save the Lite Rock style with Strings The strings will play in the 6 substyle only because that s how they were made in the Miami Pop style You could now impor the Guitar from the ZZCONTRY Style for example using the steps above Itis quite easy to quickly add instruments to styles by importing instruments from other styles Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions m Intelligent Guitar Styles Would you like to hear some realistic accurate MIDI guitar from Band in a Box styles with strumming picking and accurate fret fingering You ll get it with Version 11 Guitar Styles are styles that show strummed and picked guitar parts accurately on the guitar fretboard and they sound great These styles also play accurate guitar v icings in Your choice of Pop Jazz Country or Folk Guitar chording There s even a walking guitar comping style that plays guitar that emulates the famous Basie Big Band Jazz style The Guitar Styles play like any regular style and when you view them
255. lected lay Regular Notes Theres now an option to play regular non smari notes for those of you upto the ask of poking out actual melodies on your QWERTY keys In the Song menu toggle Wizard Uses Smart Notes OF unchecked to have the Wizard provide you acess to achromatic scale and toggle on to have Band in a Box provide you with notes based on the chord key of the song Soloist Wizard Additionally you will ind another great Wizard feature in the Soloist menu the Salo Wizard Toggling this option or enables the Soloist Wizard As you play motes on the MIDI or QWERTY keyboard the program will play correct notes in the style of the curent Soloist This means that you can play a perfect solo every time simply by pressing any key on your MIDI keyboard or QWERTY keys Beyond impressing your friends with your newfound improvisational prowess this feature has practical implications as well For example you can concentrate on practicing your solo phrasing and playing in time without concerning yourself with Chapter 4s The Main Sereen which notes to play Band in a Box will supply the correct notes for details Recording Using the Wizard To second the Wizard pres the Record button to record and play the Wizard This willbe recorded You can use the feature of recording the Wizard to enter music without 2 MIDI keyboard that doesn t sound as stiff s most music en
256. lly also forces MIDI drums ic no RealDrums for the style cher Ser f es ge A eer PlayNow lads dc selected RelDrams and staris playback Tae Ra es wg ri NR The Audition button doesn t load the style but instead uses Media Player to play a demo AIFF file f r the style setines rebuild Defaults Settings opens the RealDrums Setings dialog Chapter Si Guided Tour of Band in a Box RRebuit builds he list of RealDrums present as folders in he Drums folder If yow add new drum styles press this button to update the list RealDrums made by you or others that you add to the RealDrums folder also appear in the RealDrums Picker dialog Defaults returns the dialog to default settings which will show all available styles Press OK to make your selection and retum to the song Press Caneel o return to the song without making a selection Add RealTracks Just as RealDrums replace the MIDI drum track with live audio recordings of top session drummers Real Tracks add veal instruments recorded by top studio players and recording ars ReslTracks can play shots holds and pushes as entere in the chordsheet Many of them play 4 bar endings instead of 2 bar 1 allow for the natural decay of be instrument and ere are free patches adding this feature to earlier RealTracks sets They are avai yc wipemasiecom support macintosh resldrums um GR Defeitosk or buon opens e Ana R
257. loist Menu Generate and Play a Solo fra Start a Soloists Fil Edit a Soloists File Fdit Current Soloists file Refresh Soloist or OK to Load Soloists w song v Allow Soloist Harmony on THRU Edit Soloist Track gt Track Type gt lost dialog where a preset Soloist style ind imporing exporting saving Soloists Chapter 14 Reference as Edit a Soloists File opens a file dialog where you can select any Soloist file Soloist to edit If you have not created any of your own Soloist files or if you want to edit the ne you are using use the Edit Current Soloist File command Band in a Box comes with over 100 Soloists built in If you want to make your own or modify an existing Soloist use the Soloist Maker edit module The Soloist Maker allows you to define the parameters essential to a soloists playing such as instrument Tange Le tenor saxophone extra legato playing playing more on top of the beat than most jazz musicians and playing straighter Rh notes than usual swing th notes In addition you can set phrasing options such as how long the phrase should be and how much space to leave between phrases You can also set how outside the playing should be Edit Current Soloists file Soloists file Refresh Soloist allows the Soloist full access to all solo ideas contained in its database Use to refresh after several Soloists have been made OK to Load Solo
258. m na Chest Ea The Guitarist ts selected fom the Num Bild You can title the Guitarist using the Tite field The Memo field allows a 100 characer memo about the Guitarist The Guitar Patch is selected using the Guitar Patch field Frets To Move field If set to zero the guitar chord solo will be limited to chords that can be played within the curent position If set to 5 for example the chords will be limited to chords that can be played within the current position and up to 5 frets away from the current position Force Open Position forces all of the guitar volcigs to the open postion The exception i when the melody notes are so high that they can t be played using open position volcimgs If the melody is in a high runge and you want a forced open Postion you should likely tanspose the melody to a lower octave prior to generating the slo Chapter 11 User Programmable Funes On new chord S6 Judo 30 eat 1 fS dde 30 Beat 2 iso uicks 70 feat 3 HID ticks Tu Beat 4 150 ticks 70 Passing Note 50 ticks D The senings for Note duration thresholds to get a chord refer to the length that a note must be before a chord will be generated Looking at the settings above or Guitarist 2 these would be interpreted as follows Ifa note occurs and it is the First Note of a New Chord and the note is not followed by another note frat least S0 ticks 120 ticks 1 quarter note then a
259. m to the Record Track dialog and press the Record bution or the eter R again to begin recording Tip H youe sua thatthe satings are coved Jus press R Ies and you want have To aes the Record Track alg When the reconding is finished you have several options 110 Melody Notes recorded Options C Copy 1st Chorus to Whole Song C Overdub Underlying Notes C Retain Past Last Recorded Ce Cake Again C Camel LOK Keep Take wil save the take that was Just recorded Copy Ist Chorus to Whole Song Clic 9 Recording Traci us I you have record one chorus o he song checking this at the end of the recording will copy the same recording to all of the choruses Overdub Underlying Notes You have the option to merge the recording with existing melody there is no underlying melody this option will be grayed out Retain Past Last Recorded You have the option to keep or erase any melody after the last recorded noe Step Edit Notes You can step edita recorded track or create a new track in the Edit NoteTime Ete dialog Select Step edit Notes ftom the Melody menu Edit Note Time Ftc Note Vel Time Bar keat Tick Duration gt o 106 e 1024 2 lea er EE UIDES E E I9 Next Event Delete Event Tu This feature i very useful I you have recorded a good take with Just a minor plich Rather than serap the take you can use the step dit feature to f
260. mony Inset bars in the highlighted chord area Jukebox play Previous jukebox song Nent jukebox song Open Main Settings dialog tile key tempo Set the numberof choruses in a song Display and edit the MIDI Settings New song Open song from disk Print curent song Quit he program Replay already constructed song Save already open song to disk Thru Harmony Load style from disk Paste Set the number of lead in bars Cu Load a SETUP DK file from disk Undo song settings Send General MIDI mode On Panic All notes Of Additional Hot Keys Press 4 times to set tempo and play a song ress to just set the tempo Records a melody to the currently loaded song Plays the song from the current cursor position Enters lyrics in the Lyrics window Moves the cursar to the right Moves the cursar to the left Heip Save song Chapter 14 Reference c o Rr er c su i on x s E EN Xo xr o EM xs r E ay ew xx ay x x H H 1 tah Stit Tab FI Shitt l Cut Fl r Save song with patches an Open song n Load favorite song Shines Load songs with melodies Bers Play song FA Select Soloist shina Quit end program Bere al current bar options rs Melodist Generate Chords Melody shiners Save MIDI file F Open filtered by style Gi Refresh Soloist Site Jukebox stritop E Load next song shines Choose a ser style t Choose a favorite style sins Edit user gem Allow Melo
261. mpo Latenes ih Note Spacing Legato and Fee opens the Select Soloist dialog with the currently installed cvm records at the current location of te ae Clap 14 Referense Import Soloist from MIDI File Import Soloist from Clipboard Record Soloist Record Soloist From far Step Edit Notes Quantize Soloist Humanize w Straight Feel Humanize w Swing Feel Humanize Soloist Transpose Soloist Copy 1st Chorus to Entire Song Kill Entire Soloist Kill Soloist Choruses Adjust Level of Soloist Time Shift Soloist ticks Insert Beats In Soloist Delete Beats in Soloist Copy to Melody Track Move To Melody Track Swap Melody and Soloist Track Convert Harmony to Soloist Track Remove Harmony ar Guit Sole from Soloist Track Generate Guitar Chord Solo Rechannel to Guitar Display Utilities 180 Transpose Solos allows you 1o transpose the Soloist track without affecting the other tracks in the song Copy Ist chorus to all song stretches the Soloist track out aver the entire song Le first last and middle choruses Kill entire Soloist erases the soloist track and any daa that was contained therein Kill Soloist Choruses eliminates the Soloist from the First Chorus Middle Choruses or Last Chorus as selected from a list box Adjust Level of Soloist lows you to increase or decrease the volume velocity ofthe Soloist rack without affecting the other
262. mpo will be set to the default tempo for the style Resolution Styles can ether have Triplet swing eighth notes Straight even eighth or sixteenth notes resolution RiP voicing type uses chord tones This is an option for piano guitar and string patterns Ifselected voicing modifies to match the chord and seale Deselect fr a simple transpose ignoring chord type Assign Soloist MIDI or RealTracks audio to style Styles cun contain RealTracks and RealDrums or MIDI soloists To assign RealTracks to a style set the Instrument to use and the RelTracks In the example we are using RealGuitr for the Guitar track Assign Soloist MIDI or ReaiTracks audi to style Instrument Cuar SEZGutarAcStumming Ev 85 M Soloist RealTracks to use 8 offset leach or Volume offset MDI rack s note 6 dB change is about a 32 change of MIDI volume Styles can have multiple ReaTracks For example you could have RealPedalStecl and RealAcousticGuitar And also RealDrums Styles can also use MIDI soloists For example make a style with a banjo part that has the same quality asthe Band in a Box Banjo Soloist Here we are assigning an Ear Scruggs Bluegrass slo to the Strings par Assign Soloist MID or Realracks audio to sive Instrument Soloist RealTracks to use 197 BusCrass Ear Scruggs Band 7 Use the dB or volume offset to match the level of the Soloist or Real Track to the other inst
263. mputer keyboard they are usually next to cach othe If you tap the key 4 times at your tempo Bani Box will set the tempo automatically for you If you tap the key four times Band inva Box will set he tempo and begin song playback Press Play When you re ready just press the Play button or the Fd function key and Band in a Box will immediatcy generate and play a professional arrangement af your song using he stings and the style you selected More fun with Band in a Box 1 s that casy to start making musie with Band in a Box but there are many more powerful features far you to discover For a start you could add a human element to Your arrangement with RealTracks and RealDrums Add RealTracks and RealDrums RealDrums and RealTracks add accompaniment by top studio musicians to your songs RealDrums replace the MIDI Drum track with real recordings af top studio Jazz Rock and Country drummers These are not samples but are fall recordings lasting from 1 to 8 bars at a time and playing along in perfect syne with the othe Band in a Box tracks RealTracks instruments include guitars piano bass saxes trumpet trambane pedal steel fiddle banjo mandolin and many more These racks replace the MIDI wack for hat instrument and can be controlled just like the MIDI instrument volume changes muting etc Best of all they follow the chord progression that you have entered so that You hear an authentic audio accompanim
264. ms volume levels patches and harmonies Play from Chorus 1 Bar 17 Song Settings allow rests and pushes and also control ags endings and fadeous Global system settings are found in the Preferences Preferences opt P Choose a Style The chords and other information that you enter in the chordshcet tell Bandi what to play as well as the tempo and the number of repeats Box The style you choose tells the program how to play it and there are thousands of possibilities Once a style is loaded the song will play back in that style With so many Styles to choose from i s good that Band in Box offers ots of help make your choice The Style Picker window allows casy selection of Styles by Category Full Style Title Memo and examples of songs that work in that style This list may be printed out For example you can select Jazz styles and see all the Jazz styles in Band in 2 Box displayed Then you can selec a style such as GARNER Style amd sce a full title description of the style and examples of songs appropriate to the style You won t have to go hunting for the style you want any more This information may be printed out Chapter S Guide Tour af Banda ox E Yon get to the SiylePicker window by pressing the te bution or Style curro rus lanches the SiylePieker window Choose the Show Styles filter to display all styles or only styles that match the prototype p
265. ms volume Sang Settings patches and harmonies iaaa 2 ost Song Settings allow rests and pushes and also control tags endings and fadeouts Global system settings are accessed in the Preferences Play from Chorus 1 Bar 17 Chair The Main Sereen Chapter 5 Guided Tour of Band in a Box You can arrange recor ave and print your own song ideas with Band in a Box Just type in the chords to any song choose a style and press Play to hear the and play a full arrangement Have some fun by changing to different styles For even more fun record MIDI Melody or have Band ins Hox write a Melody for you Add Harmony an automatically improvised Soloist an Into and print out a Lead sheet and play along Loading and Playing Songs Band in a Box bas a number of menu commands to open song files such as the Fe Open song with several different llers or Song Go Open and Play The SangPicker pene with te Fite Open Sang by Tile menu command which lunches the Selet Song by Te dialog Bandi Box songs with the SGU file extension are backup arrangements with no melodica Songs with MIDI melody tack have the fle extension MOU Select a folder and open a song in the Open Song dialog It s even more convenient to just click on the main screen Song Open ong bution to Select Song by Title from the list of songs in the E curent Tolder This SongPicker list can include up to 25 000 songs
266. n harmonization and even songwriting Its musical content embraces literally thousand of musical idioms and styles all taken to new levels of quality and professionalism with the addition of RealDrums and RealTracks live recordings by top Stadio musicians that add the human clement to Band in a Box arrangements bringing your work to life As well as essential features like on screen notation and professional ead sheet printouts Band in a Box supports your musie making with unique and powerful features of its own The Audio Chord Wizard has the amazing ability to analyze extract and show the chords from audio recordings on screen for play along and then wrie them to the Band ncs Box chondsheet The MIDI Chord Wizard does the same thing for MIDI files The DAW Plug in Mode makes it casy to drag and drop tracks from Band in a Box into your favorite sequencer GarageBand ProTools Logie Nuendo Reaper and morc Output your Band in a Box songs in print or as a graphics file for web publication o to mail to a friend And when you re ready o let others hear your composition you can Quickly and easily render your sang to popular audio formats for burning to CD or uploading to the Internet There are many many more features for song creation practice study and fun waiting for you in the one and only Band in a Box Let s get started A nate about this manual TH baak e your everyday rearence and guide toi p
267. n standard displays use superscript for the chord display When in the Notation window or print out so they look best in the Notation window Tip Pant aut a song ih Nashville Neigiog or Roman Numeral nalaban Then Team the song this way Le 17 4majr 3767 You then discover that itis much easier to play ta song in any key Part Markers Part Markers are placed on the chondsheet to indicate a new part ofthe song They are used to change substyles or insert drum fills B These are part markers They typieally occur every 8 bars or so but may be NE Placing Part Markers Move the highligh cell to the bar that you want the part marker at Then press the leter p on the computer keyboard Repeatedly pressing the letter p will toggle between the a and b part markers er no par marker Or you cun position the mouse arrow directly over the bar line or existing part marker Repeatedly click the mouse button to toggle between a b and no part marker Changing Substyles The part markers also represent the two available substyles variations for BAL The song continues to play in one substyle until it encounters a new part marker There always be a par marker at bar 1 so tht Band in a Box knows what substyle 1o be with Sobstyle ais usually used for the Verses ofthe song Substyle b is usually used for the Bridge ofthe song and fr soloing in the Middle Choruscs All of the middle choruses of the song will au
268. n the song might be F7 but he guitar plays a walking chord pattem of F7 Cm7 G Abdim FTA on cach heat There can be finger picking styles that have a lowest note alternate between root and 5 Guitar parts use channels 11 to 16 for the notes corresponding to strings 1 to 6 of the guitar When the notes are output to MIDI they are re channeled to the Guitar channel So that it only uses 1 channel When you make a MIDI file the notes will all be writen on the single guitar channel Same other sequencers will recognize guitar pars on all 6 channels so if you want to write the MIDI file from an intelligent guitar style you ean Set Band in a Box to do this from the Preferences Write Gutar part on 6 channels option As previously mentioned you don t need to be aware of the details of how this is done you just play the styles as usual Let s Examine the Intelligent Guitar Styles Load in the song Freddie MGU from the Songs folder This is a demo song for the siyle Freddie Style The exclamation point in the name of a style is a convention to indicate that the style is am intelligent guitar style This means that the patterns on the guitar part will play with correct guitar voicings on the fretboard Play the tFreddie MGU song Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions Open the Guitar window and click on the G button to view the Guitar track onthe guitar fretboard As the song
269. nched and more progress messages will ash on sereen as the file is analyzed and imported As well as interpreting the chords the program is also inserting bar lines and setting the tempo Chord Detection Chord Detection accuracy depends on he accuracy of the bar ines Ibar lines are not m Chapter 12 Wizards Tutors and Ulis well aligned then the Chord Detection can be expected o be rather poor 1 casy to align the bar lines on most songs once you get the hang of it The first task is to locate the beginning of Bar One Since an audio file could have an arbitrary amount of silence at the beginning of the song and many songs begin witha pickup partial bar ACW cannot easly guess the first bar without a hint fom you The shortcut keys and mouse playback contrals make it easy to find Bar One Tap the Space bar to begin play watch the Location Cursor and listen for the downbeat Ifthe Location Cursor passes the downbeat and you were not completely certain of the location you can tap the W key t rewind to the song beginning and replay the first part of the song to audition the downbeat as many times as necessary to make sure of its locaton s quick and You can also spgl clic in the Chords panel to jump the playback position Ifthe rhythm is unusually complicated near the downbeat you could repeatedly click just a lite before the suspected Bar One location to zero in on the exact downbeat In the following example song we have disc
270. nd during a Melody pickup Kasita Drum count if drums mated is great for drummers who play along with Band in a Box and mute the drum track Previously when the drum track was muted or disabled ina song the couman drum click wouldn t play Use this option to play the drum countn in all circumstances Metronome During Recording Select this to hear the metronome while recording Allow Any Endings song endings can be turned off for all songs or on a song by song basis To um song endings off for all songs uncheck the Allow Any Endings option To uum the song ending off for a single song select the ddtional Song Settings option fiom the Song menu and uncheck Generate 2 Bar Ending for This Song Limit Sereen size to Use this setting to choose the size ofthe sercen you want to display SpaceBar Key Enters no chord deletes current chord Plays from current position Ctrl Spce from start Plays from start Ctrl Spe from current pos m Chapter Band ios Povertiuide These different functions can be assigned to the spacebar The default is to play from the current position which will also stop play when the spacebar is pressed during playback OK to Load Harmony w songs H checked the harmony settings for each song will be loaded and saved with each son se to NO the harmony setting wont be saved or loaded with the songs If you are using a certain harmony you should set this setting to NO other
271. nder where the dropped files reside When you drag a file to your DAW the file is created on disk and store in the DragDrop folder inside the Band in a Box folder Erase DragDrop Folder This will erase trash all of the dragged audio MIDI files in be DragDrop folder Note that some DAW sequencers require these files to reside permanently or until you use a consolidate command in the DAW so don t erase these files unless you are sure that they are not needed Other Editing Features Shrink Expand The Shrink command will reduce durations of chords by Y cz 4bents gt gt 2beats 2beats gt Ubea spand doubles the durations of chonds e g Theat gt gt 2beas bcatsssdbcats m Chapter Band ios Povertiuide Unfold convert to 1 big chorus If you have a song with 3 choruses and want to convert it toa single command unfolds the song into just that one BIG chorus This is useful for When selected Band in a Box will display all choruses and verses of song without loops or repeats This is a useful command if you wish to make use ofthe Path Harmony change at any bar feature or if you are going o generate a MIDI file use with sequencer or sequencing program Slide Tracks This dialog opens with the command Edir Slide Tracks It allows you to move any of the bass drums piano guitar strings melody or the soloist track aad or behind by a Allow Any Slides Setting these numbers will sli
272. ne if you hear that the audio is licking or not keeping up asa Treble Tone Control has been added for individual tracks with RealTracks or ealDrums so you can easly adjust the bass treble EQ for any Real Track The settings are saved with the song Choose an instrument bassdrums pano gutarsrings melody and then use the TONE control o adjust the tone from 18 maximum bass 10 IS maximum treble Default is 0 Chapter 3 Band in a Box 2010 for Macintosh a Timebase and Tempo Controls Double me and half time support for RealTracks Now you can play any RealTracks at half time or double time This allows you for example in a ballad at a tempo of 70 to add a RealTracks Sax solo with a tempo o 140 and play it as a double ime which will match the ballad tempo of 70 So now all of your existing RealTracks canbe used at 3 different tempos normal halftime double time You can control over when how RealTracks would play To do this open Assign ResTracks to Track dialog and use Timchase combo box v Normal Time Half Time Double Time Timebase Tempo swapping of similar ReaTracks You can use this feature either automatically or manually If you set Auto ReafTracks substitution based on tempo to tuc in RealTracks Settings dialog or Additional Song Settings dialog Band in a Box will automatically choose the best one o use M Auto RealTracks substitution based on tempo For example if you have a
273. ng rom a MIDI file just read it into Band in a Box and youll see the chord symbols and then learn the melody You can also read tracks into the Melody and Soloist racks You can import the chords from a MIDI file To do this first blank the chordsheet by choosing Fite New ES Chapter 12 Wan aos and Ulis Then select the menu item Fite Import Chars from MIDI File oc press the keystrokes CirlcOption l This launches the Chord Wizard dialog ECCL Green Cr r p i Cos Fere Cara ae rer et tom Me Creta Cerere etn m pon Rapide 1 ete 3 Chart Cre SS erie ah ion mama Fine Et m vse Rms ohan rues bom More Alor sun chord pene Lope ttn nt pod jr un BERATEN GNE Gaal TRE Ax Peete Ope Ching ton oaks te Open Change BAN sirm is tat youd lite to impor Myou elser the AII checkbox then al ils wil be displayed you deselect the AII checkbox then aniy filenames ending with MID will be displayed Note Ray Bandia Bax song can quickly Ba converted iia a MIDI Tie by pressing he MID button or with the keystrokes Options or rom the manu Fil Seve Standard MIDI Fe Tha sang wi b saved in e Bandam a Box folder with the Same flo name but the Ho type wil ba MID For example ine Bangin a Box song Volet MOU becomes tne MIDI fle Violet MID Once youve selected the file you an res the TNTERPSECT CHORDS NOW
274. ng that yau don t want 1o lose unless you ve saved the song amd have a backup cop Saving Songs H Save SweAs Save Saving a Song Once you have made a song or have made changes to a song you can easily save the song if you Click on one of the Save buttons or Press the F2 function key or Choose Save or Save song As ftom the File menu or Press Bas Then type the filename for the song Don t add the extension Band in a Box ads it for you The extension SGU indicates a Band in a Box song the extension MGU indicates A Band in a Box song with a melody Chapter 6 Hand inBox PowerGuide in Saving song with Patches You ean save your song with patches and other settings This is done by selecting the Save button or the Save song with Patches option from Soe the File menu This allows you to save the instrament patches MIDI controller settings harmonies Soloist mixer settings and RealDrums style in a particular song You can also save the instruments as On or OF foreach song For example you could havea song with no piano par Usually these settings are set to On as you would normally like all members of your band to participate To change a patch click onthe down arrow beside the patch name and make a selection from the General MIDI pateh list Leen Forgot the number of the patch you wanted No pro
275. nown as the StylePicker is opened by pressing the Style button 1 lists all of the styles that are present in the Band in a Box folder The SilePicker window opens up at the current style Chapter undi Bax PowerGuide wr The StylePicker allows casy selection of styles by category or from a complete list of all styles For example you can select Jazz styles and see a ist of ll of your Jazz styles Then you can select any style to sce its full title description and examples of songs appropriate to the style cL Style Prato FAS The current style of the song is sted at the tp ofthe window in this cas itis the Jazz Swing style ZZIAZZ Style This is referred to as the Prototype Style The prototype style can be changed to the curent selection that is highlighted in the list by pressing the Change Prototype Style burton Thore are filters to display only styles of a certain Feel or Tempo ar only the styles af a certain Styles Set number as well as displaying the name of the Styles Set To select this open the StylePieker and choose the option you want with the Show Styles Show Styles IF Fest and Tenpo Match Prototype Y When you pick Disk amp you can hen se only dat Styles S category you are n Tisted regardless of the Disk 68 Requested 8 RealStyles and Styles with RealTracks ReafTracks
276. nstrument that you want for this part in the style Note Ts Tst ala cludes slate the RealTracks lang begins a ASET oloist RealTracks to vse EE Styles can have multiple ReaTracks For example you could have RealPedalSteel and RealAcousticGuitar And also RealDrums Styles with RealTracks There are many existing Band in a Box styles that have been made with RealTracks The style names begin with an equals sign ATE ow X 8B Jaze Quarter GC bass CIO RT RealStyles are styles that usc only Real Tracks and no MIDI instruments These style names begin with an underscore HALE cs EIN Jor Swing Cabo HU RS RealSiyles and Styles with RealTracks have their own categories in the Style eat Seyles RTT Classic Reaistyles iyles with Reo Tracks ALU Styles w Reai Traces 022 Styles w RestTraces Blues Styles w ReaiTracss ace Soytes w Rem Tracescountry styles mith ReziDrums Soloists in Styles Siyles can also use MIDI soloists For example make a style with banjo part that has the same quality as the Band in a Box Banjo Soloist Here we are assigning an Earl Scruggs Bluegrass solo to the Strings part Assign Soloist MID or RealTracks audia te style r Soloist RealTracks to use EE Volume and Timing Offsets The volume and the timing of the Res Tracks or Soloist paris ean be adjusted to match the rest of the style di offset ealTracks or Volume
277. nt The location but once you do the Audio Chord Wizard con accurately mark the rest ofthe bar lines this You can insent your own bar lines by clicking Tap Barline Tab punon or by pressing the Tab key This is called appIng Tr bar Tine Bar Tines can be tapped in as the song is playing or when it ix stopped You ll se that if yow tap a bar line near to an existing bar line the existing line willbe moved to the location of your tap Click on the chordshee and the musie will jump t that location Now let s define some sections in the song Ia bar begins a new section click on the bar on the chondsheet or press the P key to put ina part marker Pressing P again will change the part marker and then turn it of IRR Now the song is divided into sections with space between each section and each section E Chapter 12 Wan Taos and Ulis den rmt EM insert Gatling place that we would like to be bar 1 and choose Delete Bar 1 Set Bur One from the context menu Change Bar 1 Time Sig Reset Barlines Jump To Estimate Tuning To change the of bars per row or the row height right click on the chordshet Chord Sheet Bars Per Row ge The buttons at the bottom right Chord Sheet Row Height p geie vinden abo chang te ow Edit Chord Remove Chord Edi Remove All Chard Edits Chords may he edited in the Audio Chord Wizard with a right mouse cl
278. ny Key the program will randomly pick a key Any Key for the song weighed more heavily toward the popular keys like Cand F nore d The Minor Key setting determines what of songs would be generated in minor keys vs major keys set to 20 then 20 ofthe songs would be generated in minor keys You can also set the Song Key Pop up toa specifie key or set it to use the current key of he previous song Cea The next section of the Melodist Sereen allows you o EEEE select whether you want to generate the Whole Son Q Whole Song Se just part ofihe sons 1f you select part of be song You can specify whieh bar and chorus to start at and pPartof Song bow many bars to generate An casy way to set the range of bars is to select the bars by dragging the mouse over the chord area prior to launching the Melodist Set Range dialog Then the Generate form will be automatically ur Set to Part of Song and the range of bars will be set to the selected arcs Chorus 1 Bas 2 I you were generating a song from scratch you d want to set Generate Whole Song Aller you listen to the song you might want to improve on a certain section of the sang say bars Sand 6 of the first A section To do this rom the chondsheet window select bars 5 and 6 and press the Melodist bution again You ll notice that the Generate Part of Song radio button is set with
279. o box wi only the best substitutions or all of them The reload Recompile button is anly used if you have edited the chordsub txt file to add your own substitutions Once you see a substitution that you like you can enter it onto the worksheet by pressing the Do Substitutions now button or double licking on the substitution line You can then move the current bar to the next part of the song that you need a substitution for and repeat the process You can undo the substitution by pressing the Restore or AM bution Auto Chord Substitution Dialog You can quickly auto generate substitutions for an entire song or portion ofa song using the auno substitution dialog accessed from the User menu For example we can generate substitutions for the Freddie MGU song Here is the original chord progression ter the substitutions to include By using the auto substitution dialog we can generate substitutions for the whole song and we get this resul You can see that Band in a Box chose the substitutions for about 70 of the chords in he song dafs what we told it to do in the dialog It began by replacing the F7 chord wi a Cm7 F9 progression Some ofthe substitutions chosen are more advanced than hat replacing an F7 with a BI3 for example Here are the settings in the auto substitution dialog that produced this result Chapter 12 Wizards Tutors and lice ES Chord Subsitutons for
280. o enter or display chords in Roman Numeral notation Nashville notation Solfegio notation or Fixed Do notation For example the chord m in the key of F would be displayed as I in Roman Numeral Notation 2 in Nashville Notation and Re in Solfeggio In laly and other pans of Europe chords like C7 are always referred to by the Solfeagio name Do 7 for Ey regardless a the key signature These systems are very useful for learning or analyzing tunes because they are independent of the key signature You can take an existing song and print it out in Roman Numeral Notation so you can study the chord progression You can also just type a chord in any af these systems like 4 which will enter the amp chond in the current key and switch between systems without having to retype the chords hissing s made by sclesing from the Chord Display Type Pref incPreferencs dining To open tie Preferences sles tie Pre Bel stm me pre Option or Comana teaman D Chapter Band ios Poweude CEST tos an choose onde tle v Normal E wins Roman Numeral Lo Normal Nashville Notation 2 Roman Numeral Solfeggio Notation 3 Nashville Notation Fi Do Solfeggio Notation Fixed Do When a new notation mode is selected a message will report the change onthe main sereen Click anywhere in the message box to close i The Roman numeral and other no
281. o use this feature load in any song in 3 4 time Then loadin a 4 4 style I there s a Melody or Soloist present you ll be asked it s OK to change the Melody from 3 4 to 4 4 you click YES to that the transformation will occur and you can listen to the Melody in 4 time Answer Question OK to change Melody from Walz to 4 4 SSD Cito Coane Ifyou click NO w the offer to transform the Melody you can stil conver it later by choosing Melody Edi Cres Transform 34 1o 44 Note ha if you choose the Manual command the Melody prior to transformation should have 6 beats before bar 1 beat 1 of the Melody begins as it normally would in a 34 tle Transpore 44 Melody amp Soloist to Waltz You can automatically transform any 44 song melody to a Waltz 3 4 feel To use this feature lad in any song in 4 4 time Then load in a Waltz style here s a Melody or Soloist present you ll be asked if i s OK to change the Melody from 4 4 to 3 4 Ifyou lick YES 1 that the transformation will occur and you can listen 1o the Melody in 3 4 Answer Question OK to change Melody from 4 4 to Waltz E Ce Come you click NO to the offer to transform the Melody you cen still convert it later by choosing Melody Edit Unites Transform 4 4 a 3 4 Note that if you choose the manual command the Melody prior to transformation should have beats before bar 1 beat 1 of the Melody begins as it normally would in a 44 style So
282. of a song and modify itto suit you The Melodist will also generate a melody over an existing chord progression A Melodist Juke Bow mode creates and performs new compositions in succession Aside from the compositional values of the Melodist he features can be used asa powerful practicing aid improving sight reading by reading the melodies generated in Various keys and car training improving your ear by playing along with the chord progressions in the generated songs Launching the Melodist To launch the Melodist press the Melodist button on the main screen or use the Shift FS hot keys TA po n Mareena Chore Matos Cassa 3 erwin C E mins e Sere Mendy Xe Omne sena oso Vace a srepiamriece Sse matec o pre o pop ier ber Aloe SM Changes P IB ung Trumpet C i Hee une gy CUm Caner Ekru Oone 1 m shown 5T aaa ree 3 Munters n z CEE Meme O omab MLCT Rr i RR aei IRL Cares mm memmen ere ERR oa Coa E CR em SS te rack EE se aport slams ha rma 3 E Chapter St Guided Tou of Banda Box Import a MIDI File With the amazing Band in a Box Chont Wizard you can convert any MIDI file into a Band in a Box song complete with Melody and Solo parts MIDI File Chord Interpretation Wizard Many people who play musie by ear think of songs in terms of Chords and Melody However many MIDI files lack chond symbol
283. of the Latin hand percussion plus the clectronic tones Drum Kit Main Window The Drums main window can be resized to tile with other windows of interest On 256 color displays the image dos not look its best The window looks its best ifthe computer is in Thousands of colors 16 bit or Milions of Colors 24 bit video mode E Chapter 12 Wan Taos and Ulis Drum Transport Controls Place the mouse cursor on each control to see its function Place Band in a Box in Record mode so drum instruments can be Play Start Band in a Box song playback o Rewind Stop and retum to song star Stop Stop Band in Box playback Size Buttons 1 2 Vs Preset the window to fll size half size or quarter size the window has been changed to a size different from these by dragging a window border none of the size buttons will be down o Settings Dialog Adjust program behavior Drum Window Settings r Drum Window Setings High Velocity shift Key 19 Rf show Note Name Lo Velocity ino shift key I0 show MIDI Note Number randomize Range 20 S show Computer Key Display Query Chars On Drums Stow O show All instrument Cancel EB Come ossis Velocity When playing drums witha mouse or computer keys hc shift key tages between two levels of note velocity The default velocity is 90 with a default shift key velocity of 127 The two velocity levels can be set any way desired For instance if y
284. of the chord at or near the time when the chond changes But in solo piano playing or some bass styles the bass doesn t state he root until later on and this setting should be set to delayed in a solo piano style of this ype Method Jazz Leadsheet Method You can also set the primary style of the song to Jazz or Pop using the Lead sheet Method combo bor Using tbe Chord Options Presets to make settings for Violet Song MID For the song Violet Song MID we know it s Jaz Swing Jazz Standard ype of song so we press the preset called Jazz Standard By ding dis we sec tat the cor options lave then been set to Chord Resolution o 2 Beats no slash chorda walking bass sus chords 7 chords and Jazz lead sheet These settings look OK for our Jazz song if we wanted to customize it for example to allow slash chords we could do it at this point Char 12 When Tutors and Uli So to recap using the Chord Wizard is a 3 step proces We loaded in the song Violet Song MID Open Change Pressing the preset button called Jazz Standard we Jazz Standard then looked at the Chord Options settings for the various chants and they locked OK so we didit make any changes Then we looked at the Chord Options They looked OK so we dint make any changes there INTERPRET CHORDS NOW CHORDS Nowy tons seis the Chord Wizard to interpret the chords and write them to the chordshect
285. of the current Soloist as you play notes on the MIDI or QWERTY keyboard Beyond impressing your friends with your newfound improvisational prowess this feature has practical implications as well For example you can concentrate on practicing your solo phrasing and playing in time without concerning yourself with which notes to play Band in a Box will supply the correct notes Tip Tha Solos wi use the velocios you play or pek is own depending on The seting in the Soloist Prefs Use MIDI Volume fr Soloist Wizard checkbox Custom Generate Solo Tora Spaai Range oT Ears You can redo any part ofthe slo that you don t like with the ability anen to generate and regenerate parts of far s Cms TT isa Custom 7 Jeet Soloist calo Eyes dol E This launches a custom solo dialog toallow you to set a range for the solo olo Generation Wok to solo for an extra beat E Overwrite existing solo in range C cose Gane Tip You can hava these values preset to the values you d ike by Wat selecting Wa range af bars that you ike rom the Chordsheet sereen and then eicing on the Soloist buton s FMaj7 w G7 Usually soloists end a lile afler a bar end they play a couple of extra notes Setting the OK to solo for an extra beat will allow this you want to averdub a solo and have multiple solo tracks going at once de select Overwrite existing solo in range Once you press the Gen
286. offset MIDI tracks B nore 6 dB change is about a 32 change of MIDI volume Timing offset RealTracks or MID in tieks 120 per bea O MIDI Styles The simples style consists of 1 pattern cach for the instruments that you want in the style Ifyou like you can use options available to you called masks Masks are prions that you sct far a pattern to specify when you want the ptem to be played There is a list of masks below Masks Available for Patterns Complex styles can be made allowing pattems to be recorded that are played only at certum times These are referred to as masks Sobstyle masks Substyle A or Substyle B Chord duration masks On chords lasting 1 4 oF beats Bar masks On certain bar numbers Beat masks On certain beat numbers Chord masks On certain types af chords Roman Numeral masks On certain Roman numerals e g I choni Next interval masks Only when next chord of song is certain interval ez up a foun But the StyleMaker is Loaded with options and features that allow your styles o grow in complexity and number of patterns For example itis possible to input up to 600 patiens in a given style In addition pattems can be classified by many ways allowing them to be played only at appropriate mes For example pattems can be given varying lengths or can be assigned to certain types of chords or only to be played on even or odd number bars and many others We believe that the StyleMaker sati
287. oists file Refresh Soloist on V OK to Load Soloists w song Allow Soloist Harmony on THRU a Claper Guide Tour of Banda Box For example effect ofa fl rou could add a SuperSex harmony to a saxophone soloist to crete the saxophone section Harmonies Shoulda be any ao to and press Go To P Favorite Thru Harmony This option brings up your favorite 50 Harmony styles based on recent usage and allows you to choose one to use on the Thru or Soloist tack CT CF ono harmony gt Kran ee err reri Tin mie Favs menu item or by pressing either the F button next to the L Tii Harmony box or the Favs button in the Seleet Thru Harmony dialog Pressing the T button allows you to choose rom the f keystrokes Ctrl F10 disable the Thru harmony Normalize MIDI performing live or at a jam session it helps to have the volume of all of he songs be similar With the Normalize MIDI feature you can level the volumes to a range set in the program options For example you can set all volumes to be between 65 and 75 and the program will make cach song play within those levels This is done in the Preferences 2 th This button opens the Harmony Maker where you can customize This button is totum off any notes that are stuck on There Enter the number of the harmony you want to list f harmonies The Normalize MI
288. on on channels 11 to 16 on strings 1 to 6 if Multi Channel Mode is set to On default Channel 11 is referred to as the base channel defat 11 You can edit notes on the Notation to set the channels ofthe notes Guitar controllers will also record information in this manner so you can recond on a MIDI guitar and se the display onthe Guitar Fretboard The base channel is normally 11 but Sou can set it to any channel eg if set for channel 5 this would mean that channels 5 to 10 would be the guitar channel Tretboard Color Brown O Black The Frethoard Color can be brown or black default brown IM Use Inlays I you elect to not display note names you can select Use Inlays and a guitar inlays he displayed along the neck M Send Notes to Editable Notation Window IF Send Notes to Editable Notation Window is sct when you lick on the Guitar notes and the Notation window is open in Editable Notation mode or Staff Roll mode the note will gt inserted at the current time line on the Notation window Fretboard Octave 1v You can set the Fretboard Octave For example ithe music is very low and you need te boost the octave to display itn the guitar set the guitar octave to 1 r2 Caper e Automais Me Fetes m M Auto Set Octave There is an AutoSet Octave setting discussed elsewhere Isl ally IM Use Index Finger Position
289. on the lowest string Inthe key of F this is the Sh position beginning on an A note the third of the scale Because it begins on the third of the scale this position is referred to as the Phrygian Position since an A Phrygian scale is the same as an F scale Similariy the other popular scale is the scale beginning on the 6 of the seale in the key of F this is up atthe 10 position and is called the Aeolian Position There are note names displayed in color vit ellipses around the notes that are inthe scale The root note of the scale is highlighted in red the third and fifth ofthe seale are in purple and the rest of the seale tones are cireled in gray Automatic Settings for Guitar Display Band in a Box does many things automatically on the guitar window to insure that the notes are displayed intelligently on a guiar fretboard These include 7 Automatically setting the 2 positions that will display the note ames based on the key Auto Seanning the track to be played and adjusting the display octave on the guitar fretboard to insure that the best octave is picked to minimize the number of notes that wll be outside of the current position displayed on the fretboard Aner Auto scanning th track the est posto for displaying the music on the guitar is determined This is always one of the 2 positions Acolian or Phrygian as discussed above though you may over ride this by clicking on any fret positon Color coding noe disp
290. on the virtual guitar fretboard you can see exactly which strings and frets are used so it is a great learning tool as well Information about Guitar Styles for Playback Guitar Styles are identified by the exclamation point in the style name This is not a requirement but is usually present in the style name Guitar styles require Version 11 of Band in a Box With an earlier version the guitar track will play wrong notes For the typical user who is just using the styles for playback and ist making thcir own styles theres not much that you need ta know about the styles since they play normally like other Band in a Box styles Ciar Poston Key oF Track Displayed is Guitar Guiar voiding You can soe which tracks have intelligent guitar parts by looking at the title window of the Guitar fretboard when the track is highlighted Ii is a guitar style track it will say IGuitarvoicings afer the name of the track The usual track that has the intelligent guitar styles is of course the Guitar part Some of the styles have more han one guitar so he Piano and or Strings part might also have an intelligent guitar part In these cases you can also view the guitar on those tracks Tue styles can be set to use different types of voicings for guitar For example there are Jazz Pop and Folk open position voiings Also some ofthe styles allow the guitar to play advanced chords and inversions Some ofthe styles play chord patterns so the chond i
291. on the original style then select the syle you would like to load substitute in its place If you want to type in a style name that You don t have use the Custom button When you have successfully made an alias you will notice that there Will be a small arrow in the Styles box on the main sereen indicating that you have an lias loaded Chapter 14 Reference m FuESwLIBUASN g gnus no EE Comme ER Cmm Thala tete ho alias dened rere To alas defe o aias defined low Any Seve Alases E contr substtions E Ga Choose Patch from Higher Bank This will display alist of higher bank patches as found in PAT text files Choose a PAT file from the Synth Kits folder Insert Current MIDI Chord Enters the last MIDI choni played on the MIDI controller into the current locaton in the song Output chords to external device This is useful with an external arranger that can read chords in real time Band in a Box Will output chords in root position on the selected channel during playback Thru Transpose Settings Transpose the Thru part which is the live playing on the MIDI keyboard so you can play any song in any key Filter for Recording Used to filter the MIDI information that is recorded to the Melody track Return to Factory Settings This will retum program options to factory defaults exeluding MIDI Drivers and patch map set in the MIDI Settings dalog What add ons do 1
292. on the toolbar and then choosing Fradi Which tracks that you want to freeze or ped unfreeze Soloist p Pano Drums There are a number of reasons that you would freeze a track Reasons to Freeze a RealTracks track audio Frozen tracks will play back instantly not requiring time to generate They play back the same way cach time so if you like a solo you can freeze it Ifyou send a song to a friend as uzen they will hear the same performance I For the Soloist track if you generate a solo it can now be saved by freezing the track Reasons to Freeze a MIDI track You can edit the MIDI data o customize the performance to match a certain song and this will be saved Use the Notation window or Piano Roll to edit the track More reasons to freeze any track Frozen tracks play back instantly without requiring time to regenerate 7 They play back the same way each time 7 You can change the chond progression af the song and have one part playing a different chond progression than the rest of tbe band For example type a blowing Thord progression generate a solo freeze the soo tack then type a normal chord progression and generate the rest of the instruments bass guitar ete that will play the normal changes Have different instruments play different styles For example the Bass could be generated using Reggae then Frozen and then the rest of the instruments generated ising a Techno
293. ong starts and allows you to control the tempo of the song See options below Set Cue Tap Options Hide Song Name This feature is used to play the Guess the Song game When checked the titles are hidden until you click the title When someone guesses the Song Tile you can click in the Title box to verify if else is correct You ll probably want 10 restrict the Jukebox to only songs with melodies unless you can guess songs without melodies Random Play Alphabetical sct to Random the songs will be played in random order without repeating songs If set to Alphabetical the songs will be played in alphabetical order from the Songs folder Change Harmony wieach song Ifsclected a harmony will be automatically selected for cach song that plays in the Jukebox Use the Harmony range settings to choose fiom a particular section of the Harmony list Generate Solos Set this option to On to permit the Soloist to play a solo over all the songs selected for Jukebox playback We have created a special Jukebox directory of songs that showcase the many Soloists available Take a moment to bar this showcase by following these steps 1 Change to this directory by loading opening a song from the SoleisODEMO folder bur instead of playing the song you have loaded press the Juke bunan 2 Ensure that the Generate Solos checkbox is set selected checked 1fyou enable Auto Choose Soloists the program will select an appr
294. ong with a melody in it We suggest the song GIT_TEST that should be in your Songs folder If it isnt there choose the song Old Folks at Home or any other Sang with a melody sss Open the Guitar window Cirit Shift G Launch the Chord Solo funcion with the Ch Solo button or select Melody Generate Chord Salo Select Guitarist Window Once you pres the Chord Solo button youl es the Select Guitarist window od Conte Cher Sus nwt sila 1e Takwa Wiki or QM m Mens Cue Fas ee Fee za um co pm pedi Mcr o p XE Eee MET Hares kuny na eee e chan taat Caan ala Cann Unano kencen ikh ha Po gen ox te change cuseng gurar ehan aOR Ce Here are the steps needed to generate your Chord Solo Chapter Kt Aunomatie Mose Feats ww Create Chord Solo in a syle smilar To 1Jazz Guitar 5 frets 0 2 Jazz Guitar single position x L 3Jazz Guitar advanced chords Select the Guitarist to Use Inthe main list at the left of the Window you see the list of Guitarists that is already defined For example you can sce that Guitarist 2 is called Jazz Guitar single position That will create chord solos that stick to a single postion on the guitar neck whenever possible Track to use Melocy Select Melody or Soloist track You d normally want the Guitar Chord solo t be written tote Melody track but you con alo select the
295. onontone one sot anty This seal formes a oniy Mono mode automatica ote on So have one noe playing at atime isa faster way to enter notes because the Notation Window will delete a note that is present tthe same location that you are putting a new if you hive mistakenly puta B note on as a C you jus click on the B note and if in mono mode the C willbe deleted automatically Clean Notation When music has been played in ftom a MIDI keyboard there are PA Clean frequently eects ike grace notes glitches and notes played off The Clean Ni It does this by eimi Notation display so it is more readable Clean Notation docsn affect the actual content of the track just hw tis displayed In general this should be on since it improves the display But if you want to scc every grace note or glitch hat was played then turn it off Looping the Notation Sereen ioation mode is an intelligent feature that Cleans Up The Notation for you ring the display of race notes and glitches and also simplifies the While a song is playing click the L Scr checkbox and the song E L Sern wit toop for the 4 bars shown onthe notation sereen For exampl the notation 4 bar phrase Xi you Jet the soloist creste a great sounding Jazz olo you can then lok at and sight read along with the solo When you reach a particularly interesting or difficult part that you would like to practice set the L
296. ony Ike 32 J Pass to a solo lasting four bars usually followed by a different melodie solo or drum solo for the next four bars I s fun to solo along with Band in a Box in 4 s mode letting the computer solo for four bars followed by Your solo C Trade 4 s In the Select Soloist dialog you can click on the button beside the Trade 4s radio control to select whether you want the first four bars or the second four bars If set to 1 the soloist will take bars 1 4 9 12 ete And set to 2 it will solo on bars 3 8 13 te The fours are based on the beginning of the chorus not the first bar of the song You can generate four bars trading off with each other in two ways The easiest way isto choose the Normal Solo mode and select the Change Instrument Every 4 bars option This results in different instruments ting four bar solos Change Instrument Every 4 bars Li w Chapter e Automatic Mui Features Another method is to choose the trade 4 s option generate 4 s using the first setting and then choose Solis Edir Soloist Track Swap Melody and Soloist Track and then generate a solo again using the second set of four bars This will result in 4 s with one track on Melody and the other on he Soloist tack Solo Wizard Additionally you will ind another great feature in the Solo mode list the Solo Wizard With this mode selected the program will play correct notes in the style
297. opped as AUDIO f a MIDI track iwal be rendered to audia using Apple Synth regardless ot the seting in Pugin options Plug In Options mupobPe Start DAW Plug in made Options for DAW Plug In To get to the DAW Plug in options press the DAW Mode button and choose the menu item Options for DAW Plein or 0 to the Preferences dialog and click the IDAW Plugin bution You will then sez the plug in options Chapter 6 andina PomerCie un Fl Allow Drag and Drop Drag individual MIDI tracks as audio Morag Combo Master track as audio l Drag Combo as separate tracks T Drag Audio as mda files Ti Hl St dung drag to orce mi Tie ol cooley ig dg ferc uo Allow Drag and Drop default true If disabled the Drag and Drop feature will not work There shouldn t be a reason to disable this Drag individual MIDI tracks as audio default false When enabled the chosen MIDI tacks get converted to audio using Apple Synth Drag Combo Master track as audio default true When enabled the entire arrangement gets converted to audio using Apple Synth If not selected the MIDI tracks in the arrangement get transferred as MIDI in a single file Drag Combo as separate tracks default false Iset to truc when dragging the Combo button the drop will result in multiple files one for cach race Drag Audio as ma files Ist to true the audio gets dropped as mia Show DragDrog Folder This will show Fi
298. opriate Soloist for eaeh Jukebox song Change Soloist weach chorus instructs the program to choose diferent Soloists for each chorus of a song For example if Band in a Box encounters a three chorus Jazz tune during jukebox playback the program might choose a Saxophone solo for the first chorus a Trumpet for the next and a Guitar or Piano for the last chorus 3 Whon you select Play Juke Bos the Select Soloist dialog will pop up witha suggestion to use a Soloist for the first song in the jukebox list This is normal Press OK to accept the Soloist suggestion The Jukebox will not bother you with the Select Soloist dialog again it will simply choose an appropriate Soloist far any given song in the Jukebox song list Preview Switch to next song after Jn Use this setting to preview the songs in a Jukebox list Band in a Box will play each song in the folder far the number of bars you enter into the box Use a setting of 9 bars o play one chorus of cach song Chapter Bond io Powertiuide n Chapter 7 Notation and Printing Notation Opening and Closing the Notation Window 9 To get to the Notation inside Band in a Box you nes to open the Notation window You can do this by pressing the Natation bution You can also open the Notation window from the menu File Notation Window or by Norn pressing Sv The Notation window covers the previous window the Chordshect and is fixed not movable Ie is sizabl
299. or 2 bars ofthe melody dialog you can choose from a list of reharmoniztins fr any 2 bar segment of the song Use the feature interactively by displaying a menu of possible chord progressions fora pontian of the melody and audition them to choose the best one using the Bar Reharmonist This allows you to hear some new chord progressions for existing melodies or brand new progressions for tunes without chords The reharmonization starts at the Bar indicated Use the 2 and 1 buttons to navigate to the segment to be recompiled amp e i7 C2 9C Chooses chord progression and press Do Reharmoniae NOW and the program will insert that progression Do Re Harmonize NOW Caper 12 Wizards Tutors and lice The progressions are sorted in alphabetical order or from best to worst depending on dis sting ison from best to worst Chord Breaks Insert Breaks silence in arrangement also called Chord Breas is Pref found in the Preferences 2 dialog This is a great feature for practicing tempo mes co F Insert Breaks silence in arrangement of bars to play 4 of bars to break 4 Select the of bars and Bandrin a Bax will play for say 4 bars selectable and then will rest all instruments for the next 4 bars Once set this feature works automatically with all songs until you turn it oft During the
300. ord Wizard 9 55 103 238 chond options dialog summary Chords List Typing in how to choris Chardsheet bar settings breaks chord entry color copy and paste delete bars crase chords font size hela chords inser ars port markers pushes shortcut shots typing chords chorus unfolding Clipboard comping Concer Pitch adjust copy chords Copyright CoreMIDI custom chord shortcuts Pisonis tx shortcut patches DAW plug in mode s 26 2a 29 24s w E 256 5 os 36 126 103 126 o0 E o 92 s 13 vs 1K 56 303 ES 89 E E 2 1 De Strauss comen 3 4 to 44 Digitech Vocalist doubled notes Drum window enhancements Drums Computer QWERTY Keys Malti Note instruments Sizing Window Transport Controls Edit menu Enbelisher checkbox Embellishment Endings Expand favorite instruments favorite songs favorite styles File menu filter styles Freeze tracks From button grace notes GS menu Guiar display settings launching Toolbar window Guitar Chord Salo about Guitar enhancements fict position Guitar fretboard Guitar Styles guitar channels 102 103 ES E 2 i2 E E 257 D as as 267 108 D us 3 2s w m w E 167 169 248 212 212 information patterns tricks voicing Guitar Tutor chord utor Guitarist 16 2 chord solo generate chord solo redo save solo
301. ord change to output 120 1 beat 4c output chords during Leadin write track to MIDI file output MIDI sync info Fi Display Output on piano This option is useful if you are using an external arranger that can read chords in real time 88 will output chords in root position on the selected channel Cm Click onthe Vocalist button if you have such a device connected to your MIDI system Band in a Box will then send t hc appropriate chord information automatically as your song is playing c4 toot position triads and the Vocalist will harmonize your voice according to the roo position chords that Band in a Box is sending to it For any other devices you will need to know a litle more information as to what your extemal device needs o see for it to function correctly such as channel velocity chord ype ete Then type the appropriate values in the spaces provided in the Output Chords To Enternal Device window shown above Chapter 6 Hand ina Bax owehide us The JukeBox Overview of the Jukebox The Jukebox will Load and Play an entire folder of songs Songs play continuously one afier the other The Jukebox will continue to play while you move to other programs so you can use the Jukebox to provide background music for your Macintosh 7 To play the Jukebox click on the toolbar bution press Command J or choose Juke Bax Play from the Song menu to open the Juke Box Options
302. ou don t have to worry about durations at all and can just click on the notes that you want at the locations that Sou want you want a specifie duration e over ride the auto duration you can do this by editing the note using by clicking on the note while holding down the option key and then you re in a dialog Box that allows you to type the exact duration that you want The purpose of auto urations is to allow you to enter a lead sheet style melody by clicking only once per note dramatically speeding up the entry of notation Inserting Rests You ean Inserta REST by clicking the Rest buton and then icing at Rest icine aiene you sostiene iced Tisatomatll chef e ton of te roves ois Banca Box dalikas rests lus han a quar pole co IS oaran Te you to sea rasts loss than a quarer olo make sur 1o de select he Minimize Rest check toxin the Notation Window Settings dilog box Notes can be moved via drag and drop To move a note place the mouse cursor over an existing note and then click and hold the mouse button down While keeping the mouse button pressed move the mouse cursor over o the location you wish to drop the note and Ben let go of the mouse button The note will be moved to the place you dropped t Certain areas of te sereen are not valid locations to drop a note The mouse cursor will change to a busy cursor to indicate an invalid location If you tr to drop a note inan invalid location noth
303. ou don t want o lose urless you ve saved the song and have a backup cop AN Tracks can be Edited and MIDI tacks for bas drums pano guitar and strings can now be edited and saved with the file Ifyou freeze a track edits can still he made to it because it is only frozen fi Band in a Box making changes to it you can still edit it so that the MIDI track will be saved to the file So you can customize the bass part to match a certain song and save it with a frozen bass part s that Band in a Box won t overwrite your edits This includes RealCharts if you wanted to edit the notation ofa Real Tracks solo for example ved n Chaper Band iH 2010 for Macintosh To edit a MIDI track bas drums piano guiar strings or the MIDI part of RealTracks that has a RealChart MIDI transcribed solo simply open up the Notation window or Piano Roll window and click on the track and edit it Make sure to Freeze the track by pressing the Freeze bution and choosing Freeze for that track or ight licking on the instrument at the top of the sereen and choosing Freeze Now your cated tracks will save with the song RealTracks Enhancements No more long waits for RealTraeks to generate ReafTracks generate much faster 4X faster on average A typical song with RealTracks that took 20 seconds to generate will now generate in about 5 seconds And if you freeze some or all sacks in the song sce below playback of RealTracks is
304. ou may find occasional devices that can get confused and malfunction if presented with GS messages In order to make sure you get the control response you expect and avoid possible malfunctions on some synthesizers Unless you know that your synthesizer understands GS messages make sure to specify MIDI control messages EI Chapter 13 CoreMIDI and Apple DLS Syuth Chapter 14 Reference Band in a Box Menu Descriptions File Menu New N Open song E xo Open Filtered by Style E Open Song with Melody xn Open Favorite Songs on Open Song by Title n Import Chords from MIDI File C1 re make Song Titles list E Save lt F2 gt xs Save song As Save Standard MIDI File xs Save song with Patches s File Utilities Play Song XA Replay Already Constructed Song 36K Notation Window N Page Setup Print P Lyric Window Si Nevis used to blank the chordshect and start a new song Open song is used to open an exiting song Open Filtered by Style lists only the songs in a folder with curent style Open Song with Melody lists only the songs in folder with melodies mg Open Favorite Songs opens the dialog listing the last 150 songs played Open Song by Title opens the Song List with the full tile file name and style ofeach song in the older A Find function allows you to search the title list far a wont or Phrase to find a title quickly For example type in Old
305. ou record a2 bar bass pattern For your bass pattern You will play a pattern based on a CT chord You ean use all 12 notes Dut should just play the pattern as you would if the chord was a CT You should cemer the bass pattems around MIDI note 48 C3 Tip Wyouareuncedam what to play sal another svi hal comes wh The program Ey pressing the LOAD button and selecting another siyle you can then play the bass Patiems by pressing tne PLAY button t see what pattems we used to make it and mitte tham in your sve Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions E Afer you have recorded the bass pattern a dialog box with options will appear This allows you to specify the conditions that must occur for this pattem to be played back in he song These are called masks Usually you can just accept all the defaults which allow the pattern to be played at any time Bass Patern Optio Bass Panem Recorded Relative Weight PlaySack Bar Mask PlaySack Beat Mask ll Roman Num Mask Chord Type Interval Next Chord Half Octave Range Play Pushed how often x v 4 Ticks to push 120 ppa Dok To Use Macro Notes Relative Weight Usual Seting Set this number higherilower if you want the pattern o be played moreless often than the other patterns on the same row This number is also displayed on the main StyleMaker A setting of 9 always is a special setting that instructs the patr to always be play
306. ou want the shift key to send quiet notes program the shift velocity lower than the non shif velocity Randomize Enables the Randomize checkbox o send random velocity levels when playing by mouse or computer keyboard Range Control the amount af velocity randomization Usu best around 10 to 3054 a small range works ID velocity is set to 27 and the random range is set to 20 notes would randomly vary between a maximum velocity of 127 and a minimum velocity of 102 Instrument Hints Customize appearance ofthe Hint line with Note Name MIDI Note Number and Computer Key Show Show All Instruments shows all instruments in the drum window Show Used Instruments displays the basic trap kit but does not display any extra instruments unless they are used in a song The drum window is cleared cach time Play or Stop is pressed Chapter 12 Wizards Tutors and Utes m Chapter 13 CoreMIDI and Apple DLS Synth CoreMIDI and Apple DLS Synth Tutorial Selecting a MIDI Driver Band in a Box offers two MIDI Output options Apple DLS Musie Device Built in Mac sounds and CoreMIDI EN Gs windows Help MIDI Settings 3M CoreMIDI Audio MIDI Setup CoreMIDI choose ports Select MIDI Driver or Apple DLS Synth MIDI Drivers Band In A Box has detected the following MIDI Drivers Please choose which you would prefer to use XD O Apple DLS Synth buil MacOS X CoreMIDI Mac sounds
307. oud use e hg with Patches dialog instead af this one Harmony Changes at this Bar You can insert harmony changes into the song at any bar and bet For example start the song with no harmony then have SuperSax come in on the bridge then Shearin on the next chorus ete This is also effective when used with the Soloist on the Thru par With this setting you can have multiple types of hom section solos i e Brass Sic or harmonized distortion guitar effects far guitar solos Clear Changes The Clear Bar button clar all changes from the Clear Bar current bar as determined by the location of the Tight cell on the Chordsheet Press the Clear all Bars button to remove all changes Clear all Bars in all bars in te song Chapter 6 Hand ina PowerGuide w Chord Preview Builder You can instantly hear how any chord sounds by selecting it in the chordsheet and pressing Shift Return or use the Chord Builder feature to audition different chords until you find the one that sounds best to you In other words you can enter chords by cat without having o know the actual chond names or any musie theory This feature also illustrates the differences emween various chond types Previewing Chords This feature allows you to hear chords as you to type them in When you are entering chords onto the Chondsheet or notation window afier you type a chord name press Shift Return
308. ould be the ZZIAZZ Style but using RealDrums instead SEHR reme rite ceo i tng Bote open up the Real Drums Settings dialog Try tuming off the RealDrums by de Selecting Enable RealDrums RealDrums Settings Use the RealDrums Settings to substitute RealDrums for MIDI drums in existing Band ina Box styles The RealDrums Settings apply o all songs Use the RealDrums Picker o assign a particular RealDrums style for just the one song you are working on log opens with the Tie eaibram 5 Gaming tne banon ie Renta Fior rh Rear the Windows RealDrums Senings menu command n Chapter Band ion Povertiuide With Enable RealDrams checked RealDrums may be used Bf Enable RealDrume a a MIDI This sening the song is playing so that you can compare MIDI drums and RealDrums E saonenn asume fer MO drum gt Sista says for even stie wen IO rms we beer TUS J Ths will substitute ReslDrums for MIDI styles in all songs where a suitable RealDrums style is available You can change the setting Bom 1 to 3 Subst se or even iy ven MID Drums wre beter ST Substitute treguentiy even when Drums are notas good as MIDI Drums 2 5 Subsute when RealDrums are as Conc ar Baner then the MIDI cums 315 Substutute when Rel Drums are Bener than the MIDI Drums D Sobsttute rarely only Rea Drums re Way Bete har the MIDI Drums 5 5
309. ould not apply for four beat pattems or the entire pattem would be blank Here is another example of chords with the durations ofthe chords displayed for you undercati dhcp FO JB CD dr shondduraton 4 2 02 8 Patterns may be entered fr chord durations of 1 2 4 and amp notes The Band in a Box program sorts out everything else about determining the length of the chord durations in he song and combining lengths for unusual lengths 3 2 1 t So ow we know what the rows are for they are for pattems of different lengths and different substyles A and B The columns across the sereen are used t contain multiple Variations of similar sounding patterns The program will randomly pick between the Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions i similar pattes on playback The number that is recorded and displayed on the sereen refers to the weight assigned to that pattern Normally if you hase three similar patens with equal weight they will be picked equally but if you assign lower or higher Weights in the range 0 8 you can fine tune how often pattems are played ole Normally wegh se m e ranga 0 6 A weight of may aso be assigned whan you have a pattem that oniy occurs under certain conditions but you want fo ensure that whenever tat conditon occurs that ihe pattern wil always bo picked The Bass and Piano Guitar Strings patterns are always recorded in two bar chunks regardless af the chord duration
310. ound the M button indicates that the song has a memo The keystrokes Option M will also launch the Song Memo Automatic Memo Generation the summary checkbox is selected you ll see an additional window that automatically displays a fall summary ofthe song tite tempo patchesuscd in the song as well as other special features such as substyle patch changes or harmonies This saves much ofthe work previously required to manally type in this information to the memo Enter Copy Move Lyrics Those Features enable the typing editing and exporting of song yis Edit Chord Shorteut txt This will edit the fle SHORTCUT TXT using Teach Text This is the chord shortcuts ie Make sure to save the file after editing Changes won t take effect until you choose Edi Refresh Chord Shortcuts you find a chord that Band in a Box won t accept like Csus2 when it expects C2 instead you can enter this on a single line without the quotes ss2 42 Then Band in Box will enter the chord C2 if you type in Csus2 These allow someone to type in Csus and the program will accep it You can also use it for shortcuts like if You entered j maj Band in a Box would let you type Cj for CMaj7 See the file peshore txt in the Band in a Box folder for examples of shortcuts Refresh Chord Shorteuts Aher editing chord shortcuts in the SHORTCUT TXT file you must use this command to save the changes
311. overed the downbeat of Bar One so we Control click on that location to Set Bar One Now the Bar One bar line is ed shown below The red Triangle bar indicator indicates that we have edited that bar line The Red Triangles are called Good Bar Lines GBL S The Insert Barline L Breen Triangle bar mdiearors are bar Delete Bar 1 ines which ACW has autoratieally Change Bar 1 Time sig emite ie aon enpo detection PLUS your edited Good Bar Lines We call the green automatic Reset Barlines c G bar ines Inferred Bar Lines IBL Y umo o P obmd On this example song the initial automatic tempo detection did a prety Estimate Tuning ood oo Simply sting Bar One has caused the first four bars to be properly aligned to the musie On some songs Set Bar One is the only action necessary to get good bar alignment for the ENTIRE tun Am G In another example loving were ate Ano Chord Wiad ar mad is ft trrrapproching Er S Ithscstinaied the tempo af Ba 4 to slow Titicasy o fix Ifyou prefer real time control just tap Tab or the FB key where the downbeat should actually be you prefer stopped time editing you can either mouse drag Bar 5 to its desired position or drag the Playback Location Cursor to the desired position and then tap Tab forthe FB koy Chapter 12 Wizards Tutors and Les MEE Sol ee aS RS a Pe EES FS cn id TEER ih n
312. ower Tempo Playback Drifts Ahead of Barlines Find Best Double Tempo Quarter Notes are Displayed as Eighth Notes Find Best Half Tempo Quarter Notes are Displayed as Half Notes Tempo Tracking Range gt Nota you wani to use the Avg Tempo Menu funciona use the manu very soo aer you sve opened s song before you have done much bar ding If you invoke ne Avg Temp Menu functions afer you have laboriously edited a lat of bar nae the automatic nature of hese functions can ruin your previous adiing Tn some cases there is a good reason to initially set the tempo artifici the Find Best Half Tempo function For example if the initial tempo estimate is considerably faster than the tempo that you want to tap in the Tap Bar line function can mistakenly think that you want a very fast tempo which fills the remainder of the song with unwanted fast tempo bars In that case if you initially set the tempo very slow ACW will be unlikely to misinterpret your Tap Bar Lines Set Key Signature Once the chords lok reasonable far instance if your song looks like it is probably in the key ofF set the Key Signature control to F for better chod spelling This only affects Be cosmetic display of notes and chords fats and sharps The Key Signature control docs not currently affect the basie accuracy of Chord Detection slow by using Adjust Fine Tuning Ifa song is significantly off from concert pitch the notes are
313. p hen the 2 bar lead in will remain in the fil Preferences User Settings Use the P ferences to set the user options for the program The settings are all saved in the Band in i Box Preferences folder in a file named Band inea Box Preferences X86 Ifthe file is removed the program will require the same setup as when it was Brst installed This can be a way of removing unwanted settings for arch sar Chapter Bund io Poweuie us Sclet he Pres iron or press Opion or Conmasdicomuma to go Pref ttt rretrenes logs Ther ae buttons for Preference reference Slt Pref Reviti Frets Gd DAW Plugin stings Preferences Dialog Preferences 1 Boost Vel of Pushes by The pushes in Band in a Box are he chords that get played before the beat Typically pushes are played a ite louder than other pattems You can leave this setting at 0 or set ito between 0 and 10 errem tuia 7 Bocu ans raran men Mpecotsssnrerdenan Stone na cared Frsreirina puinieieie Basis Socotra wt fare ones iste t qual moran no EY ed LETS Acer rence es i ce Tr nt parara ace roe Mica coon eap sein wane han acho tt Snare E98 at tii atime Eune varow nose ra nn ttum mt Seca ror Mower Rane Bi moas mabara E Baisan vaun Baana mutnim pasoa rn E cem Show Chords with pushirest chars The push character is the caret symbol So a C chord with a push s di
314. pen a new Paich ie by pressing e Open PAT bulo You can also customize he names and descaptons af the pateh fie list to suit yaur tastes by pressing he Edt butlan and eating a smali text fe Press the Update button for your changes to take efect Yau can also open this window by selecting tha M Chose Patch fom nor Bank menu tem at the bottom of the menu Description of the Wizard The Wizard is an imelligent play along Gar that uses your QWERTY QW keyboami 1o play along with Band in a Box This also allows you o Fee iot aty S solis roc who a ema ID yar sacas cien bred to tiger e nt Nom A ray shnpuig he Wand Canes harmony feature soy can play along ic om our QWERTY keyboard input Seaphonchamory orcum Tersin the Ward OwO Click on the Wal box totum the Wizard catre OORE or selee the A Wz izan Playalong option rom the Song menu or press Options W The Ward ia on eoi drin ac si the Wizard Tie Weard keys mre active dng lta The cbe wee ower2 mf tc Ben ASDFG HJKL lt thisrow plays PASSING Tenes Gne Fouth sith ZXCVBNM Thie row plys CHORD tones ont 20 Fith Seventh Changing Instruments Settings For The Wizard The Wizard is a play along instrument so is treated just like the THRU instrument Changing Instruments Volume Reverb et for the Wizard is therefore the same as forthe THRU instrument e Click on the THRU button then select instrument ete You can recon the Wizard and it will use THRU harmonies if se
315. plays you ll see and hear the guitar played on the fretboard using correct Jazz voicings For some chords youl notice that the guitar plays different Voicings on Sach beat in a walking pattem For example on an F7 chord lasting 4 beats the guitar might play FT Gm7 Abdim and FT A with each chord lasting one beat Just as a professional Jazz guitarist might do gj Show muted note of The rei MGU sit uses note shori uitar style comping voicings in order to emphasize the lower range guitar style comping o enhance the percussive rhythm efect Since in these cases the guitarist is usually fingering the note and muting it if you want lo sce what the 4 note of the voicing would e you can set this option by pressing he Setings button in the Guitar window and checking the box for Show muted note of guitar style comping in the Guitar Settings dialog ota Remember that Tor any sis you ses wit an exclamat poit n Fe siye name an inteligent guitar style you can view and hear Ina guitar part played on the guitar rboard as descrbed above The Harmony Maker The Harmony Maker editing module allows you to create or edit your own harmonies This can be used in the program to harmonize melodies solos or live playing on the Thru Fame Waker Giese Sarg Gare e Gorge eanna Quine tore Searing Gut Voie Qum Octave low Nigh ODoubie V Boost ira Orm Ez 6 m 7
316. po if that is closer to the tempo of all songs M Show message when better RT are available at this tempo yrsa a yellow menage appears whenever beter Real Tracks are availible at tbe curent epe To choose these RealTracka press the Real Tracka toolbar buton and choose Slot Meier Rea Tracks for his tempa in the dropdown menu Use this option i you don t vant Band in a Bor o omaia substitute your ReaTrack but you would ike o now if there are other choices available to you that might be more sull for the song M Use 4 bar endings for Songs with RealTracks i attows an additional two bars at the end of the ong for the ending on RealTracks to fade decay naturally If your RealTracks selection does not sapport tnis feature you can check w pemusie comm suppor to see if we have uploaded a free update F Auto add Reverb to RealTracks Strength X 100 Update This adds audio reverb to the RealTracks and RealDrums Enter the amount and clic the update button This uses some CPU cycles so disable on slower machines M Allow RealTracks Shots Holds and Pushes when set songs will support shots holds and pushes fr ReaTracks Not all styles have these available s0 Shock the ReaTracks Library Holds folder and the H column in the Assign RealT racks to Track dialog Custom RealTracks folder allows you to put your RealTracks in a custom folder other than Appl
317. r any song from INIO i untra tooibar button or the Edit tro Bars Auto Generate menu option Imro Ctrt Shift B This will create a chord progression that gets inserted as an mro to the song based on the optional settings you choose Chapter 6 Hand ina Bax PomerCie s TUTTI Getme e l pubem cian d Farbe t Dorn piarsa sang chord aarmt FE oot cht fran ci rsen or als Chord Types can be Jazz or Pop Intro Length can be 2 4 or 8 bars to suit the tempo of he song Starting Chord after intro is lets the intro lead in to the song correctly Pedal Bass has a list of pedal bass options based on the key entered in the box Press the Re Generate Intro Chords button to auto generate chords for an intro Press the Remove Intro button to remove the intro from the song The Metodist feature will also generate an introduction forth songs it creates Selecting Bars To Begin And End The Chorus cia Folks at Home lGARNER STY Ab t 105 1 32 3 Chorus chorus ret Begins Ends Choruses a Bar number for Chorus to begin Click on the chorus begin number in the Title window or select the Chorus hegins at option on the Sang menu or press E The message Click on a Bar will sart o blink in the Toolbar Mouse click on the bar number to begin the chorus The bar umber that you select wil then be displayed 32 Click on the chorus end number in the Title window o
318. r select the Chorus ends at option on the Song menu or press Be The message Click on a Bar will start to blink in he toolbar Mouse click on the bar number to end the chorus The bar number that you Select will then be displayed 3 amber af enoruses pla Click on the number where the number of choruses are displayed on the Title Key Tempo Chorus Window and select the number of choruses from the Pop Up Menu or select Total Choruses from the Song menu o press 36 The number of choruses will then e displayed Additional Song Settings CS Tis opens with the ISI button beside the Title window or with the menu command Song Additional Song Serrings ot from the More bution in Bar number for Chorus to end s Chapter Bands Powerade the Main Settings dialog Song Til Key Tempo Embel These additional song settings are saved with the song Vary Style in Middle Choruses Deka checked the song wil play in subsyle B throughout the Middle Choruses The Middle Choruses include all choruses except the first and last If not checked the middle choruses will play a and b substyles as set in the chordsheet with part markers For example in Jazz Swing since the b substyle is Swing all of the middle choruses have swing bass The a substyle is playing half notes on the bass low Pushes in Middle Choruses Default This is used if yo
319. rb to decay Reverb time is measured as RT60 the time it takes for reverb to decay to a level 60 dB below the dry signal level ux Chapter Bandi os Povertiuide LF Rolf gradually reduces the bass frequencies Ifyou ca because the sound gets too muddy try increasing the LF Rl between 50 Hz and 500 Hiz tad enough reverb shee H is adjustable HF Rollos the rate at which the high frequencies die away as the reverb decays Rooms with hand surfaces are typically bright but rooms with soft surfaces are usually darker Itis adjustable between KHz dark to 11 KH bright Density is the density of low level echoes near the end of the reverb tail High Density settings add a sheen o the sound Level adjusts the final level ofthe log in Typical Reverb Settings A large hall might have Long Pre Delay ong Decay and moderate Density A lard large space soch as a gymnasium might have long Pre and high HF Rollo A soft large space such as a concert hall with carpet padded seats hangings might have medium Density and low HF Rollo A small ard space such as a tile washroom might have short Pre De to long Decay high Density and high HF Rollo A small soft space such as lrg living oom might have short Pre Delay short Decay medium low Density and low HF Rollo Saving Settings to Presets You can save your reverb types as presets and the current settings will be saved with the song in a Preferences PReverbScttings bin f
320. re ay ime v You can play ReslTacks at half Timebase Normal Time time or double time This allows you for example in a ballad at a tempo of 70 to add a Real Track solo with a tempo of 140 and play tin double time which will match the ballad tempo of 70 A filter is available Type a GEI her ieni cs bass md C pdare Show AN press Update and you S will then see the lst filer 1o show only RealTracks that have the word bass somewhere in the tile memo genre ce Multiple search tems work with the Real Tracks picker Ifyou separate terms witha space each term is searched separately So a search for Country Guitar Ev 120 will find any Country Gunar styles with an Even feel that would work with a tempo of close 1 120 Adding a search term that has a number will fher for RealTracks that match the empo or within a compatible range out of range IV Show Error Messages Pressing Show AII will cancel the filter and show all Real Tracks again Generate Track will generate a RealTracks instrument on the currently selected tack ST This button will close the dialog and assign the RealTracks Clos instrument to the current truck Then when play is pressed the RealTrack will generate I caaea 3 ls on Cancel to exit the dialog without assigning 2 Cancel RealTracks instrument to the eurent track LI Chapter Bands Powerade Using R
321. re bout this feature There is also a feature hat automatically adds reverb to RealTracks according to instrument type No Reverb is added to Bass for example but most instruments get reverb This feature defaults to on but you can tum it off in Real Tracks Settings or Reverb Settings dialo Chap Band Hos 2010 for Macintosh M Auto add Reverb to RealTracks Strength 100 you just want more or less added you can adjust the Strength Y For example the default adds a reverb of 40 to most tracks but if you set the streng to 75 then 30 will be added You can also set the type of reverb The defaults a room type of reverb tim htm ea aaa Au Preset Name fand In a Box Default Reverb W al You can then save your reverb types as presets and the current settings will also be saved with the song The presets all got saved toa PGReverbSettings bin file in Band in Box Preferences folder M cebe Preset Name Band in a Box Defaut fevers VA Detant swap tand ination Deli Revert Sm Roam Med Room ares Room Hai Avena 1e swo so fone j mo A aw fax e 2000 1000 Pre Delay Decay LF Rollo HF Rao Density avto ad Raves to ReaTeacks Strength 200 Gave ae Dela Reve Restore Defui You can enable disable Reverb If you disable i his will save some CPU cycles sa this might be advisable on an older slower machi
322. rect place on the staff You ll hear the notes play as you drop them and the ames wili show in the note name box For sharps fats and naturals hold down the shift key contral key or icy respectives Youll end up with a melody that sounds like it was recorded live without the rigid fec of tracks entered in step time Tip you have the wizard On the spacebar wonT sip playback You need io press Exc key to stop piyoack when the Wizard is on Tha a lo prevent stopping na song nadverteny f you ristakery hit the spacebar while playing the wart Clair Recording Trai m Importing Pre Recorded MIDI Data Standard MIDI fles can be read in abe Melody or Soloist racks ftom MIDI files or from the clipboard You can read in all af a MIDI fle or selected chanel and a specific range af bars Use one of the following bwo commands 1 Melody Import Melodi from MIDI File to select a MIDI Gle from disk using the fil dialog 2 Melo import Melodi from Clipboard when the MIDI dta is already copied from another programa to the clipboard Once chosen the Import MIDI File dialog box opens Import Which Channel s You ll need to know which channel s of your MIDI file the melody is on You then select these channels for Band in a Box to read n If you select all of the channel Band in a Box will read all of the channels and merge them to the Melody track You an import and play he complete file on the Melody track
323. redo an undo Band in a Box window is now sizable When size changes chondshect notation and othcr windows redraw in proportion to the new size This allows you to have Bandits Box open as a small window on sereen with other programs and you still see a full chordshec The sereen size is remembered between sessions To resize the window just use the sizing control at the bottom right comer of he window Hold down the mouse button while you drag the sizing control Support enhanced for non concert instruments Bb Eb sax trumpet ee Now when the chordsheet is transposed you can type in chords in the transposed key and they will show up as you have entered them instead of requiring you to enter the chords in the concert key More Soloists are now available up to 2000 1887 Soloist 1987 1998 Soloist 1998 4 1998 Soloist 1999 H Many messages changed to yellow alerts a top right of sereen so you don t have 19 respond 1o the message thereby interrupting work lo Have fun Chapter 3 Band in a Box 2010 fc Macintosh E Chapter 4 The Main Screen Main Screen Overview The main sereen gives direct access to the major features and program settings of Band in a Bor for ease and convenience during a session There are five different areas on the main sereen l The Statue Bar is used to show program running status messages and path names of the currently loaded son
324. rmally would adding periods far shots and holds and the Real Tracks will play them Note that for his you aed the Libras Holds folder in your RealTracks folder NotallResTracks styles have shots holds and pushes available so check the H column in the RealTracks Picker wo see if the style has em the column is blank they are available and installed the column shows the letter n the Holds files are available but not installed Check he support pages of the PG Music web site va pnus com for Rea Tracks updates the column shows a dash no holds are available for the style Assuming that you have the Holds files for the Real Tracks that you are generating then you just use Band in a Box as you would normally and type chords with shots c2 C holds C or pushes C oF C for 8 or 16 note push ar combinations of push and told C o Chapter 6 Bandi os Powertiuide ote For example you can specify a chond to hs Chord Settings Dialog Box Chord setings conto the breaks in a song when onc or more of the instruments rests plays a shot or holds a chord These breaks are all referred to as Rest Types in Bond Bx and they can be entered along with the chord name or with keystrokes Chords can also be pushed which makes them play carly There is an altemative to the various keystrokes to put in rest types and pushes for chords You can use the Chord Settings dialog bor ins
325. rogram and its features Soo Help View Band in a Sax Manual for the full manual s Chapter 1 Welcome to Bondi Bon Chapter 2 QuickStart Tutorial Creating music with Band in a Box is as easy as 1 2 how easy it is to get Band in a Box making musie for you Step 1 Enter the Chords These are numerous ways of entering chords into Band in a Box We ll discuss five fast ways of entering chords Using the Computer Keyboard Playing directly on a MIDI Controller Keyboard Using the Chord Builder Importing Chords from a MIDI file 5 Loading an Existing Band in a Box Format Song On the main sereen ofthe program you ll sce an area called the chordshct i this tutorial you l see just BC Wr Bn ar c rer The seas G Dw og lm A am ee nd ov ow lw w wow or c c lw oc Li Fach of the numbered cells on the chordsheet represents a bar In this example you can se that there is an F6 chond in the first bar of this song Similarly one row down you can see an F6 chord in bar Sand later in the song a G7 in har 7 Notice the ax inthe first half of bar 1 This is the hig you are curently working on You can move the highlight ec keys or select a specifie bar using the mouse Enter Chords Using the Computer Keyboard To enter a specifie chord move the highlight cell to where you want to place the chord For example if you wanted to add or change a chond in bar 20 you would highlight bar 20 on the chordsheet
326. rs for quick reference Boost THRU velocity by When playing along on a keyboard to the Band in a Box band if the sound of your keyboard is oo quiet and increasing the THRU Volume doesn t help enough use this 1x Chapter Bandi Ho Povertiuide option to boost the THRU velocity and make your THRU playing louder For example non velocity sensitive keyboards are usually set t output a quiet velocity of 64 MIDI Output to an external device Output Chords to External Device Some external music hardware devices require chords played in root position to drive hem in real time An example of this is the Digitech Vocalist It will let you sing into a microphone and harmonize your voice acconding to the chords that are input o the device Band in a Box mow has the capability of outputting a separate channe with the chords in root position to Support such extemal devices automatically There are also settings such as complexity of chords output channel velocity and note ange Band in a Box will also drive Re Time Arrangers like the Roland RA series The best way to accomplish this is to access the M Oupur chord to external device menu item You will then be given a window like the following Output Chords to External Device D ouput chords C undae Channel B Velocty 0 Default Note Range to output 56 to 66 Roland RA Chord Types Triads Ts Only 7 C Vocalist ticks before ch
327. rt to Rhodes Piano using keystrokes L Press Crt to select the Piano part 2 Press Ctrt Shift 2 to select the Favorite 2 That is Rhodes Pian Chord List Commonly usd chords are displayed here in bold type Major chords C CMAJ Co CMAJ CMAJ9 CMAIIS C69 CMAIT S 5b Cang C CMAJ9 11 CMALI3 11 Minor chords Cm Cm6 Cm7 Cni Cant Cisl Cang Cms ChMATI Halt diminished Cms Diminished Chapter 14 Reference ES C m Dominant 7h chords C174 C94 C134 C13 CTbI3 CT IL C1311 CT LIBIS C8 C913 C9 1 1 C13 11 C9 11b13 C79 C13B9 CTHUDIS C7HO IL CIESH11 C7b9 11b13 C7 9 C1389 C7 913 COPI C1349 11 C7 9 11b13 C7 C1365 C7b5b13 CHbS CObSDL3 CTHSBP C13BSH9 CTHSHIBIS CTbS69 C13BSH9 C7HSHDDI3 C7HS CIS45 C7 5 11 C13 5 11 C95 C9 5 11 C7 Sb9 CIS45b9 CT Sb9 1 1 CI3 5b0 11 CT SH9 C13 5H9H 1 C7 SHO 1 C1385401 suspended 4 chords Css CTaus Cs ClSsus C7susb13 C7susi 1 C1Ssus 1 CTsus IIS Cosusb 3 C9sus 11 C13sus 11 C9sus B13 C7sush CLs CTousb9b13 CTausb9 1 CLBsusbo 11 C7susb9 11b13 CTsus 9 C13sus 9 C7sus 9b13 COsus l ClssusiS1 CTsust9 11b13 CTsusbs CISsusbs CTsusbSb13 Cosuss COsusbSb13 CTsusbsbo ClSsusbsto CTsusbSbUbI3 CTsushsH C13sus 9 C7susb5 9b13 CTsuss Clssusis CTsusiS 11 C13susis 11 Cosus s CosustS 11 CTsus 500 CL3sus sb0 CToustSb9H1 1 C13sus 5b9 1 C7589 Ciasusts 9 11 13sus 549 11 CTsus
328. ruc By defaut the rendered files are save to Applications Band in Box Song Renders in a subfolder ending in _ Render Folder This example shows the default location for rendering the individual tracks of the GeorgPG Demo file The GeorgP Demo_RenderFolder will be created in Song Renders and since Individual Real Tracks is selected it will contain separate AIFF files for both the pedal steel and guitar Real Traces rase eur iad tote Ore cick on this button to specify a different folder location far the rendered audio With the audio rendering feature you can save your files directly as audio files far use in other programs GarageBand Cubase ete or in Interet formats Render MIDI Track to AIFF File Any Band in a Box MIDI track can be automatically rendered to an AIFF audio file ftom its contextual menu The menu opens with a ight mouse click Controteliek or a double click on he part mame By selecting the Menu command Save MIDI tack as Mu AIFF file the complete Band in a Box track vill be rendered to an audio file solo The ik can then be imported ino anor audio program such as GarageBand or Choose RealTracks vida Generate RealTrack Save MIDI track as AIFF file Set Track offset 0 Erase Track Chapter 10 Audi Festns w Chapter 1 The StyleMaker The StyleMaker is the section of the pr oredit existing styles This is done by reco
329. ruments in the style The acceptable range is a MIDI sening of 127 to 127 When applying this offct to audio Real Tracks a value of 32 is approximately 6dB The Timing offset RealTraeks or MIDI in tieks 120 per beat setting allows you to m k song or style with a more laid back feel for a certain RealTracks dB offset fesiTracks or Volume offset MIDI tracks note 6 d8 change is about a 32 change of MIDI volume Timing offset RealTracks or MIDI in ticks 120 per bea O Malistles Mulistyes zajazz zzbossa sw Enter the name ofa style zzjazz or multiple styles separated by semicolons Zzjazzzzzbossa and these will appear as MultiStyles substyles cie etc You can click on the Style button to choose the styles for your MultiStyle from the StylePicker window Importing Patterns into a Style Importing a pattern into a style is a powerful feature that greatly speeds up the making of mew styles In the interests afnot re inventing the wheel with each new style this allows you to import a pattern from another style How to Importa Pattern into a Style A pattem can be copied from one style to another by copying and pasting The Miami Pop style has a nice Strings part in this example we ll import the Swings from Miami Pop style into the Light Rock style ZZLITROK Style Let s import the Miami Pop strings into the Light Rock style Choose the LOAD button Select the ZZMIAMI Sty
330. s Copying chords to the clipboard Select the region to copy Place the mouse cursor at the bur to begin the selection Then holding down the mouse button drag the mouse over the region As you do this you ll se that the region will be highlighted white on black Chapter Bandi os Povertiuide When you have selected highlighted the proper region of chords to copy you can copy the selected region to the clipboard with the keystrokes 84 or by selecting Copy from the Edit menu Pasting chords to the chordsheet When you have copied some chords to the clipboard you can then paste them into the chorishect by Moving the highlight celo the destination bar where you want to begin the paste of chords This can be done by clicking that bar with the mouse or by moving the highlight cell with the cursor arrows on the computer Keyboard Press Biy or select Paste fom the Edit menus ip Remember that the copied section remains in the clipboard and can be used repeatedly Example If you re inputting a song with verse Verse bridge verse you can just copy the first verse to the Clipboard and then paste in the other verses The clipboard remains even if you lod in a new song so you can copy and paste between songs Copy Chords and or Melody You can copy and paste the chonds melody and solo fora range of bars in the Copy Chords andor Melody dialog Pros the Cory ution launch this dialog box or selec
331. s so they become difficult to learn without the user having to figure out the chords in a time consuming process Hox and Band in a Box will Now you can open up any MIDI file in Band automatically figure out the chords of the song far you Tt automatically analyzes the MIDI file figures out where the Bass Piano Melody and other tracks are and then figures out the chond changes far the song The chords are written onto the Band in Bos chordsheet like any other song This allows you to quickly learn how to play a song rom a MIDI fle just read it ino Band in a Box and you ll see the chond symbols and then Jea the melody You can also read tracks into the Melody and Soloist tracks To import the chords from a MIDI file blank the chordsheet by choosing File New Then select the menu item File Inport Chords from MIDI File or press the keystrokes CurlsOption 1 This launches the Chord Wizard dialog Ange compite song oe Ses B ve imerpre settings Frm MIC fe Eremit Coena Pop Csotrejacr ies Pate ERE mmm med iate Connes cote npn pM Camara SS Cea eue eta 10 0 TE Select your MIDI file to import withthe Open Change button The Chord Wizard will automatically detect the settings for your song choosing a Preset will help the Chord Wizard make the correct choices for the type of song you are importing Chap S Guided Tour of Banda o ss Make Your Own Songs Now th
332. s Povertiuide COMBO MASTER TRACK If you want th entire performance dragged io Finder drag the Combo bution to the drop sation Then whe it tums green drag o Finder M Drag Combo Master track as audio wit be drugged as auc unless you have seit be drugged as MIDI in login Settings lo ME Drag Combo as separate tacks orally singe ile is dropped with the entire arrangement but if you want all racks transfered as separate fles you can nable this option in Plugin Settings dialog Net that your DAW wili need to suppor dropping af multiple ies and will typically put them on consecutive ines 4 SINGLE TRACKS t you want a single tack transferred drag that track button to the drop sation For example drag the Bass button to transfer the bass track Then when the drop station turns green drag that to Finder H the track is a Real Track green then it will be transferred as Audio Iit isa MIDI track black then it will be transferred as MIDI Note E Drag incvidual MIDI tracks as sucio you want MIDI tracks transferred as audio you can set this in Plugin Settings dialog SELECTED RE ET rere Bo labana ie le h aeaiia et at te gang eck nunon DES he drop Stone gt ser reso il en et el nr Fr Tig you had the SHIFT Key during ha drag hen he fle wi be dropped as MIDI FE Js MIDI rack regardless af the seting in Pugin options Tip I you hold the CONTROL key during the drag then the fle wil be dr
333. s are pattems thar are played fore the chord begins Jazz styles typically are pushed patterns for the piano Patterns are recorded in the normal way non pushed and then you assign the of time and amount in ticks 120 ticks 1 beat to push the patern Pushed pattems only play pushed in the song not in the StyleMaker Use Macro Notes usual setting No Piano Macros are special notes that you record When they are played back they are replaced by a function as listed below List of Piano Macro Notes same as Gi z ariString macro notes MIDI Note number 83 B Pop Chord Diatonie Below MIDI Note number 4 C Pop Chord MIDI Note umber 5 C Pop Chord Distonic Above MIDINote number 8 E Jazz Chord Chromatic Below MIDI Note number 9 F Jazz Chord MIDI Notenumber90F Jazz Chard Chromatic Above Remember to get Macro Notes Working you must Hit he right note number you may be out by an octave Cheek the Use Macro Notes box Playback the patter by pressing the CHORD button Pressing the PLAY button gives you an as played playback with the strange sounding high macro notes Transpose Root Pattern usual setting No This is a rarely used setting It only is relevant when voice leading is set t0 smooth see below It determines where the cemer of the putter is considered to be If checked the center of the pattern will be moved to the song s key Embellish Pattern usual senting No checked
334. s hear our Shearing harmony playing as we develop it To do this we need a song with a melody to be playing before we enter the Harmony Maker So let s exit the Harmony Maker and start a song with a melody playing like Old Folks at Home my Now go back ino the Harmony Maker Voices Ws Youll see the voices down the left side af the dialog box Bimel Mel is the melody S Voice 2 is a chord tone below the melody Ep mfa Voice 3 is 2 chond tones below the melody Cu Voice 4 is 3 chond tones below the melody Sue voce s rarely used is an aditional chord tonc usually the 9th or Lh in Sues ihe seale Cus Mel2and Mets are used to double the melody For the Shearing Quintet harmony The Piano is part harmony so it will use vole 1 2 3 and 4 on Channel A The Vibes will double the melody so will use the Mel2 voice The Guitar will double the melody so will use the Mel3 voice Settings for Each Voice Voie Chan Otave Low High O Double V Boost Sms AA i Lux E a Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions Channel is described above A linstrument harmony will use Chana Additional instruments can use Channel B and C Acaly Fote These channel are set to numbers nthe Harmony Channels dialog bax avaiable Inthe M MIDI Setings dialog box For the Shearing Quintet harmony we will set the Piano to Channel A the Vibes to B and the G
335. s song S To e getar Tutor en nee Guitar window and press the Tutor come bunion aes Bl Enable Chord Tutor Display on fretboard F Play chords through MIDI Guitar Patch Type of chords to display Walking jazz 4 Note Chords SetEnable Chord Tutor Display and Play Chords through MIDI Select the Walking Jazz note chords tutor type and press OK Yol now hear and see guitar chords and patterns of chords played in a Jazz style long to the song In the example above the chord is an Eb7 chord and the tutor is showing common Jazz voicing for an Eb7 chord Tum the tutor off by disabling the Enable Chord Tutor Display setting Chapter 12 Wizards Tutors and Utes ES Chord Substitution Wizard Reharmonizing a song with the Chord Substitution Wizard is a fun and educational way to perform or practice a familiar song in a brand new way This feature is very easy t use simply highlight an arca of chords and select Chord Substitution The possible chord substitutions are instantly displayed for you For example it you had chords such as Dr G7 Cmaj a list of substitutions including the tritone substitution D Db7b5 Cmaj7 would be offered o you for use in your song There are also helpful comments associated with cach substitution showing you why a given substitution might work in each case c is the melody compatible with the substitution et Or you can enable
336. s time By pressing this button youll now see a dialog with substitutions selected for the chord progression that begins with F7 for 2 bars up chords by 26 Chapter 12 Wan as and Ulis 3 c n LIC Ment Amr deessent 3 the Gi hord oniy one Melody Ge RE These nores E Was Tor Farz Chord TIT e 8 3 Che stn nri icona Be Chas B Jazz substitution Bless Chords S roprcounv E chords ach neat C nu GD Gad Ga There are a numberof substitutions that have been identified For example the first substitution replaces the two bars of F7 with a Cm7 F7 progression The program has also looked at the melody of this song which contains an 4 note and commented in the Memo tht this a melody note is not compatible with the Cm7 so doesnt advise this substitution Choose one ofthe substitutions that you would like and press the Do Substitutions now button ar double click on the substitution This will enter the substitution to the hordsheet and the dialog will show substitutions for that new progression Press Close if you are happy with the substitution or Restore to restore undo the substitution Press Al 10 undo all of the substitutions that you have made Chord Builder The Chord Builder is launched with the menu item User Chord Builder or with the keystrokes CITESSBREHI Chords are previewed as they are built
337. se it should be rue ir below by Sets the position ofthe bar numbers below the staf The range fom highest to lowest position is 1107 is Chapter 7 Nation nd Printing Hin Options made M Chords A Trebie Clef M Notes O Bass Clef First Chorus Etar es below by I Cefsspit FO O tast Chorus No lyrics 7 Eelef sign Every Line O Whole song Dincude Lead n Bar Lyrics Below By 2 JkeySig EveyLine Staves per page TTT 7e ee OS me Tez Quiner mwme 7 Tempo T Tempo 120 Composeri Copyright lean 025 Music Font Size Ger 2 ight Margin 0 25 ORE Smp Coa Lyries Lyrics can either be printed above the chords below the staf or not printed at ail Normally lyrics are printed below the sta Lyries Below By Positions the lyrics below the staff with settings frm 1 highest 107 Cowes Treble Clef Normally you will want 1o include the treble clef I youre printing out the Bass part you probably don t want the tele cle Bass Clef For Melodies you likely won t want the bass le printed For other pars Piano Bass you will want the bass clef printed Clef split at This determines where the notation wil split the treble and bass les Middle Ci Key Signature Every Line Default NO Most modem fake books dont include he key signature every line If you would ike histo happen then select this Print Range First Chorus Last Chorus Whole Song You
338. ses 157 sein an 184 Preset Burtons 157 e p Replace Thru Form 158 Visio psi Selection Dialog 155 Melody cic 2m Solo in Middle Chonises 187 Melody tack m Tempo 157 memo 61 134 Using 160 ste Write To Tack 159 Shh P Melodist Maker File 267 Anticipations in Pheses 223 as 205 Cross Uns Chad Pogson ney 25 Chord Substations Throughout the E m ricas pA Melody 280 Dialog ET M m Force Long Phrases m famasi i Mix Minor and Major Chord Song m Progressions Sis m Number of Variations User E Simple 1 and 29 endings Windows E Tempo Range stot Transpose A2 Section Channels nique Themes Sening 136 w drivers Files Standard Noc Of setings setup syne MIDI chord entry MIDI drivers Apple DLS CoreMDi MIDI file choose tracks options Save vs us E bs P n ES 265 262 us us us MIDI File Chord Interpretation Wizard MIDI menu MIDI normalize MIDI Thru MIDI tacks Mulistyls making mute tacks Nashville Solos New features convert 3 4 to 4 4 next siyle previous style New Features tutorial mew song Notation citable mode modes options sta roll mode standard mode tootbar am 55 238 E 126 253 us 109 37 m vs ES 268 268 B 1 56 w m ns us uas ur ns m note colos Noe Off Otavas omit lead in opening styles output chords Pan Panic Button panning Panther parameters song Pur markers part senings Part setings paste chords pa
339. sfies both the need to create simple styles with repetitive pattems and the ability o create complex styles intelligently To create a style you will be creating Bass Piano Guitar Sings patterns in the key of C and Drum patterns Once made the styles are saved to disk and are then ready to be used by the program for playing any song in the selected User style Styles end up as files with a Style extension different from song files which have a SG or an MG The StyleMaker has been designed to be as flexible as possible A simple style would consist of three pattems one cach far bass drums and piano but more complex styles are created by using more pattems The styles consist af two substyles a and b Typically the a sub style would be the more laid back portion ofthe style such as a verse or in the case ofa Jazz Swing ste a two beat part The b subsyle would be a chorus section bridge or Swing part in reference toa typical Jazz Swing style On the StyleMaker page you ll see rows of dots that line up with their respective instruments substyle length in beats ote These are locations for your pattems that you ll be recording In onder to create a Style youll need a MIDI instrument of some sort keyboard MIDI guitar drum controllers with a MIDI Out port Styles are made by catering Drum Bass andlor Piano pattems in the desired style Drum patterns Are entered in step time Tap mode and Real Time from a typi
340. show all RealDrums agai Chapter Bond io Poweue These are additional settings to define your selection in the RealDrums Picker show if Tempo is out of Range F Show RealDrums that are not favorites Show if feel does not match C Show RealDrums that are N A For this song oniy force MIDI drums Show if Tempo is out of Range will show styles that wouldn t work well at the curent song tempo The sccepae ange is shown in the ist of styles Lor 9 and 10 columns Show if Feel docs not match will show a song where the drums are in Even fel andthe style is Swing or vice versa Show RealDrums that are not favorites You can assign a style as one af your favorites by clicking in the first column Then you can sort by favorites ar use this option to see only favorites Show RealDrums that are NA These are styles not found in the Drums folder likely because they are add on styles not purchased yet Press the Rebull button and check he RealDrums Settings to confirm that you have the correct drums folder selected For this song only force MIDI drums Set this if you want MIDI drums and want to override a RealDroms that is set inthe style Blues shuffe style deal ternpo is around 120 bpm Each ofthe 7 variations uses a diferent comination of 2 drum substyles fer the A and B sections in your song Chapter Band ion Povertiuide Memo
341. sk Nuke it Delete Current song from Disk Load Previous Style 0 Load Next Style E Open Next Song and Open Previous Song will open the next previous song in alphabetical arder For example ifthe song loaded has a file name of Paul choosing Toad next file will find the next file in alphabetical onder afier Paul maybe it would be eter The hot keys for this are SEE and Ctrl Ses FR Auto rename IBM songs will rename all song files in a folder using the song tide as the Rename any files mg on Disk or Rename Current Song on disk allows you to rename Delete a Song from Disk deletes u song file without exiting the program Nuke it delete curent song from disk deletes the current son Load Previous Style Load Next Style This function analogous to the Load Next Song function loads in the previous ar next style in alphabetical onder of the file name To load the next style in alphabetical order choose the menu item File File Ut Load Next Se or use the hot key Command Shift FR Control Command Shift F8 for the previous style Play Song generates an accompaniment and starts playback of the current son Replay Already Constructed Song plays an existing song arrangement fom the begining without regenerating a new arrangement Notation Window opens the Notation Page Setup takes you 1o the setup dialog for your printer Print opens the Print Options dialog Lyric Window
342. song with the Edit Bar Settings dialog box Press FS or the keystroke combination Option B or go to Bar Sertings in the Edit menu to open the dialog The tempo change you enter takes effect at the beginning of the bar and remains until a new tempo change at another bar i inserted Song Intros Choruses and Endings A typical song has the following clemens Introduction Intro If present is typically 4 bars long Chorustes Typically 3 or 4 choruses in a 3 minute song Ending Typically a 2 bar ending following all of the choruses Nata We use tha erm chorus as commonly used n Jazz music A chorus hareore means once though the entra form ofthe song A typical length fa choras is 32 bars A song may have the form AABA where the A sectione are verses andthe B section is the Bridge Tris entire form AABA called one chorus Adding An Intro You select the beginning and end bars ofthe chorus Ifyou select a bar greater than 1 for the first bar of the chorus then Band in a Box knows that you want the previous bars for Example 4 bar intro to a song Type in the 4 burs of intro chords starting at bar 1 ofthe chondsheet Then at bar 5 you begin typing in he chords of ihe chorus Set the beginning of the chorus to bar 5 y Slestng the Chorus begins at option on the Song menu and then clicking n the measure of the fast bar ofthe chorus Auto Generate Intro Bars Band in a Box will automatically generate an introduction fo
343. splayed as AC merschancierisapeiod so C dima C chon witha rest you prefer not to see these characters displayed hen set this to false These characters wont show up on the printout regardless o this setting Show Rests in color checked pushes are displayed in GREEN and rests are displayed in RED This only applies to the Chordshce not the notation Allow any Rests You can disable the rests feature You might want to do this if you ve gota song with a otof rests in it and are then having difficulty recording a melody because you dort hear m Chapter Band ios Povertiuide he drums providing the beat due to the drums resting so you can temporarily disable the rests so that you can record and listen to the drums Allow any Pushes 1 far some reason you don t want a style ora song to have pushes you can uncheck this box Allow Style Pushes 1 for some reason you don t want a style to have pushes you can uncheck this box This box allows for non standard display af chords on the chordshect area The options here allow for Normal standard notation Roman Numeral notation Nashville notation Solfepgio notation and Fixed Do notation When a new notation mode is selected a message will report the change on the main Sereen Click anywhere in the message box to close it Allow Lead In Bars People who use Band in a Box far soloing practice will ikely tum the allow endless looping uninterrupted by the le
344. ss RECORD in Band in a Box and play along Nis V you wan to recor drum pat a the Melody Wack yout have sal the Melody channel to 10 using the M MIDI Setings menu tem Acoustic Bass Drum Bass Drum 1 Side Stick Acoustie Snare Hand Clap Electric Snare Low Floor Tom Closed Hi High Floor Tom Pedal Hi Hat Low Tom Open Hi Hat Low Mid Tom Hi Mid Tom Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibeaslap Ride Cymbal Hi Bongo Low Bongo Mute Hi Conga Open Hi Conga Low Conga High Timbale Low Timbale High Agogo Low Agogo Cabasa Maracas Short Whistle Long Whistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves Hi Wood Block Low Wood Block Mute Cuica Open Cuica Mute Triangle Open Triangle Some percussion instruments are triggered by multiple MIDI notes When controlled by more than one MIDI note a percussion instrument will show different behavior in response to the different notes For instance the Hi Hat responds differently to Close Hat Pedal Hat and Open Hat MIDI notes The on screen instruments may be played by mouse click or computer keys When playing by mouse lick or computer keys the shift key adjusts velocity between two user specified levels Drums that you play show up in blue the computer played drums are red There is an option to display al the QWERTY names on the drums at the same time so that you can see what keys to hit without having to
345. ssa sw Enter the name of a style zzjazz or multiple styles separated by semicolons _2zjuzzzzbossa and these will appear as MultSiyes substyles cde et Yon ean cick on the Style button to choose the styles for your MulStye from the SiylePicker window Category Techno World Ethnic Matistyles Utility Miscellaneous Styles with RealTracks There Le v many existing Band in a Box styles that have been made with ReafTrack mes begin With an quals sign jAZQT_B sw 8 160 Jazz Quartet cc bcss 160 RT styles are styles that use only RealTracks and no MIDI instruments These style names begin with n underscore JH GE w 158 Jazr Swing Combo 149 FS RealSiytes and Styles with RelTracks har aTstytes ATT Classic Realstyles yles with RealTracks Al Styles w RealTracks Jazz Styles w RealTracks Blues Styles w RealTracks Rock Styles w RealTracksECounzry iyles with RealDruns Finding all styles that have RealTracka Se Open the StylePieker and locate the categories called Reales and Style Styles with RealTracks Click on a category to list all of the styles that are present tat include RealTracks Using RealTracks in Solos e their own categories in the Style Goto 361 Typing 361 and pressing Go to n Clap Banda Power 2 CEE choosing Favorites to etum toa recen x
346. st the ocave to display it on the guitar set the guitar octave to 1 or 2 There is an auto octave setting discussed elsewhere If selected the Guitar Octave will get set automatically IM Use Index Finger Position Une Index Finger position If set the scale will use the index finger to play notes that are one fret outside of the normal position instead of the litle finger F Show out of range notes Show vutat range notes Iset any note will be displayed on the guitar regardless if it isthe range ofthe guitar or nat Show Notes at Aeolian Position IM Show Notes at Phrygian Position Note Names ScaleTones cs wil ge displayed in up to two positions depending on the settings for ion and Show Notes at Phrygian Position Defauli Troc 50 934 Guitar Height def 80 136 100 150 200 The Guitar can be sized using the Guitar Width and Guitar Height setting or the preset buttons that set the size F Auto Switch Posit Chapter 12 Wizards Tutors and lice 2 The Autos itch postion setting allows the program to automatically switch the display ofthe guitar when a new track is loaded in This auto chooses the best position to display the track Set to Defaults The Set to Defaults button sets the Guitar window to factory defaults Guitar Tutor Use the Guitar Tu
347. st will optionally give a title to the songs it writes Song titles can also be generated on demand with ihe Use Auto Generate Song Title menu command CtrleShitisS The song titie will appear in the Title window CF Gong Visit to kenya CP C Style WYNT K STY F Repeat the Aut Generate Song Title command unti the program comes up with a suitable tile for your song Band in a Box will keep generating new titles for as long as it takes to get the right one Chapter Kt Aunomatie Mose estares 11 Automatic Solo Generation The Soloist Pick any song or chon in any style and choose a Soloist Band in a Box then creates and plays a professional quality solo in the style of your choice In addition o great Band in a Box accompaniment you can hear sensational solos as well showing you exactly what notes are played Choose fram soloists in a style similar to great Jazz musicians such as Django Reinhardi John Coltrane Country Pop soloists and others or create your own soloists using the Soloist Maker Select a Soloist To select a pre made Soloist click on the Salis button on the toolbar press Shift F4 or choose Soloist Generate und Play a Solo This will launch the Select Soloist dialog rinm vet ESSRTESSERES Eni Gu seem eeen Tj Cour me moe C Com a E Oma Mah o Rn Mert t pe Now select the pe of Solois
348. sthe slowest tempo for which the RealDrums style is suited Hi is the fastest tempo recommended for the style X indicates a style with a tempo that is out of range fr the song N A are styles not found in the drums folder You can type in your own comments about any style in the User comments field and they are saved Chapter Bund iB Powertiuide User Comments Update J RealDrums styles ending in a caret have variations available They are listed here Where there are two instruments shown such as Brushes Sticks the Brst one plays in dic a substyle and the second in the b substyle variations Oi Sticks 02 Brushes 03 Ride RideLd 04 Crstk CrSETR 05 Brush Sticks 06 Brsh 2088 07 Brsh St 2a 8 8 Sticks Zats Play Now Stop Audition PlayNow loads the selected RealDrums and starts playback The Stop button stops the song playback Click on PlayNow to resume The Audition button docstt load the style but instead uses Media Player t play a demo AIFF file for the style Settings Rebuild Defaults Settings opens the RealDrums Settings dialog Rebuild builds the list of ReslDrums present as folders in the Drums falder I you add new deum styles pres this button to update the list RealDrums made by you or others that are added by you to the RealDrums folder also appear in the RealDrums Picker dialog Defaults retums the dis OK
349. t Soloist Type list box and choose the appropriate style This will bring up a list of Soloists in that style Then simply choose which one you wouid like to hear and what instrument you would like the Soloist to play TEA Wiest AI bos is checked sot wilt be displayed bu hose that do not conform to the Soloist Type box will be in parentheses If this box is ot checked only Soloists that conform to the Soloist Type selection will be displayed Ce Gama Gare o The Fav button opens a Favorite Soloist list af the fify most recently used Soloists with the most recent the op The RealTracks button moves the Solos list to 361 which is the start o the ReslTracks Soloists These are Soloists that are audio not MIDI Soloists generated with RealTracks are saved with the song so you will hear the Real Tracks play the same Solo when you reload the song D Chapter e Automatic Mosi Fetes When you generate a solo using ReslTacks Band in Box will remember this and when you go to save the song Band in a Box will ask you if you want to save that slo and thereby freeze the Soloist track I you say yes then the solo will play instantly the Same way when the song is reloaded Of course you can freeze the Soloist rack yourself tay time Note that only onc solo can be saved You can t generate a bunch of different segments of solos only the last one will be saved Use the Search button to search the Soloist
350. t r Copy J Cin Fram o ot press Options Copy Chords and or Melody M Copy Chords F Copy Melody Copy From Bar 1 IM Copy Soloist Bars to Copy Chorus 1 Copy To Bar The senings allow you to specify the location to copy from the number of bars to copy the location to copy to and the option to copy any ar all of the chords melody andor soloist Copy Rests The Copy Rests dialog is opened with the Eidir Copy Rests menu command With this feature you can copy the atributes ofa chord aver a range of other chords Rests also include shots and beld chords Chapter 6 Hand ina PowerCiuide os GoyRessFomBa T Bat M faenc E Copy To tar f oe Coni The senings allow you w specify the bar and beat to copy from the number of bars to copy and the location to copy to Erase Chords and or Melody To erase chords with additional control for erasing the melody andor soloist choose Edir Erase From To or press OptiontK to launch the Erase Chords and or melody dialog box Erase Chords and or Melody Erase From Bar 13 M Erase Chords Num Bars to Erase IV Erase Melody Chorus Erase Soloist E Ga As you can se you can erase a number of bars of chords andlor melody andor soloist 1 you re erasing the melody andar soloist you need to specify which charus you re crasing Support for Non Standard Chord display types In addition to the Standard Notation window you can als
351. t the pushes o play Mies Rests in Firs Chas sa I pes to Hess in ite Chorus vsu This s used if you have put rests into a song but dont want the rests o play n the middle choruses The middle choruses are usually used for soloing so you may not want the resis to play A Rests ia Last Chars pesu This is used if you have put rests into a song but dort want the rests to play in the ast chorus to Fea asin Mie Chris vesa Thiel he Pl as ff bene in mile shonas Aton Eablet Chris sas 8 The Jazz styles include embellishment of chords This means that if you type a CT chord the piano player may play a C13 ora C7H9 This makes the arrangement sound more authentic Tips you ara hearing fat and fa mbelhmen on a G7 chord hate ashing wiih the melody you should rename the chord CD or C13 which wil ensure natural and 13 embellehments To catis the embellatment for a certain song uncneck this option There are very few situations that you wouldnt wan it on especialy you name soma chords as CO instead of C7 n situations where tha melody cashes with ns embslishment as discussed above You wouid need to uncheck it for any song that you dont want ton Tag Settings A ag or coda is a group of bars that are played in the last chorus ofa song Ifyou chek the Tag Exists field then the tag wili play during the last chorus of the song The tag begins afier the bar you specify as Tag Jump Alter B
352. t Guitarist dialog or generating a guitar chord solo Rechannel to Guitar Display Chapter 14 Reference m This takes a melody and converts it to Guitar Channels 11 to 16 When it encounters a chord i will determine the fret position that its most possible to play that chord with Otherwise if it s a single note it will play it at he current position at the guitar neck If you want to convert an existing melody to a customized Guitar part this command is a ood starting point and you can edit the track further to achieve a better result Utilities A Utilities sub menu has utility functions to eliminate note overlap and transpose the Melody Eliminate Note Overlap Preserve Double Stops Eliminate Note Overlap Remove Double Stops eliminates note overlap While double stops are either preserved or limina Transpore One Octave DOWN Transpose One Octave UP transposes the Melody Part one octave in either direction This 1s ofen useful ifthe Melody instrument has been changed Transposing can be done while the song plays Eliminate Note Overlap Preserve Double Stops Eliminate Note Overlap Remove Double Stops Transpose One Octave DOWN 7361 Transpose One Octave UP 7x2 Transform Waltz Melody amp Soloist to 4 4 Transform 4 4 Melody amp Soloist to Waltz Transpose Waltz Melody amp Soloist tw 4 4 Ifyou have a song ith 3 4 time signature you can instantly hear it as a 4 4 feel T
353. t a part marker at bar You can rein the curent substyle or change the substyle 1 or 87 when you place the part marker Edit Bar Settings Bar settings let you change meter tempo styles key volume levels patches and harmonies at any bar They are a powerful tool for adding variety and dynamics to create a highly professional finished arrangement in Band in a Box Alec you have selected a bar press the FS function key or the keystrokes Options or Select Bar Settings from the Edi menu to open the Edit bar settings dialog Settings such as number of bents per bar tempo changes style changes pateh changes and harmony changes can be made in this dialog Tip iss FS key or FE key does nol peronm the expocied funcion in Banda Box you wil need to gato the Apple System Preferences and uncheck he system setting in the Keyboard Shortcuts ist o Chapter Bands Povetuide Keone LIS ey eon SSE e e 7 meer ST Rey at T a When making any changes toa measure using the Edit bar settings dialog bos Bund in Hox will place a colored indicator box around the measure number of he edited Settings apply to Chorus is a setting that lets you apply the changes at the specified bar in all choruses o just in the chorus you choose Change the Number of beaibar The inital time signature of the song is determined by the style eg Jazz 4 4 Waltz 34 In cerain songs you will want o ins
354. t in an alter From the Drum Pattern Entry screen pres the EDIT button This displays the Alternate Drum Notes dialog box Select the Alternate Drum Note type such as Open High Hat or Bass Drum from the Alternate Note drop down men sithe time oF Aiemmat Drom Notes ernate Play 0 Akternate Velocity 0 Alternate Note Cm Ga When you ext the box you will see that the box has a border indicating that an alterate ote is located there Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions 19 Playing the Drum Patterns Play the drum pattem by pressing the PLAY buton Stop playback by pressing the STOP button or the lt Spacebar gt Press the PLAY button again to hear the pattem again if you have made changes When the pater is sounding like you want press the EXIT button Drum Pattern Options Drum Pattern Recorded Mane wem 7 Playback Bar Mask Drum Fil on Substyie Any J der eT 3 um Ga Relative Weight USUAL SETTING 5 Relative Weight is the number that you assign to the pattem from 1 9 Numbers from 1 indicate how often you want the pattem to be played in relation to the other pattems on the same mw A weight of 9 is a special setting that ensures that the pattem will ALWAYS be played Patterns assigned a weight of 9 usually have other options set which instruct the pattem tw oniy be played at certain times bar after a drum fill for example Playback Bar
355. t styles by clicking on the Style button to choose ftom the StylePicker The current prototype style is shown in the title bar The prototype can be selected with the Change Prototype Style button Another option isto have he prototype default to the current style by selecting that checkbox Styles with a similar feel to the prototype will be indicated with an asterisk These would be styles that have be same fec ples eight sixteenths and a similar tempo Tange Styles that have a similar feel but a diferent tempo range are marked by 2 caret symbol Choose the Show Styles filter to display all styles or only styles that match the prototype partially or fully With the Disk fiter you can view just the styles from on styles set disk Change the Sound Band in a Box has several instrument parts Bass Piano Drums Guitar Solo Strings Melody and Thru You can change patches on any part The casos way to change patches on a part is to select the part by clicking on the desired pan 1o change Onie Cus Cs OD Oar sings Wed saisit Oa Click on the Instrument Panel box You will then see a menu of 128 instrument names This list is the General MIDI patch list Scroll down the list to find your patch Fiano 5 Rhodes Electric Piandfe Or click on the numbered buttons below the Instrument Panel box to choose from the 10 most common instruments chosen for that particular par you havea General MIDI modu
356. t the Strength 7 For example the default adds a reverb of 40 to most racks but if you set the strength to 75 then 30 will get added 3 gne aere ee Te dasa mon ype To do this press the Audio Reverb bution and adjust the various parameters Preset Name Band in a Box Default Reverb You can then save your reverb types as presets and the current settings will also be saved with the song The presets all pets saved to a PGReverbSettings bin file in Band in a Box Preferences folder i WA D Sa Gai ten m OC Rm e Bay Decay UF Fatt MER Density ie Manohari iReTacks sirenat OH Gareas Defaut Revet rene oes m You can enable disable Reverb If you disable i this will save some CPU cycles so this might be advisable on an older lower machine if you hear that the audio is clicking or not kesping up Chapter andina Bax PowerGuide us Freeze Tracks Freezing locking MIDI or ReafTracks RealDrums Any tack MIDI or Real Tack can be frozen When frozen it doesn t get changed or re generated This saves time when replaying previous songs and allows you to feeze an arrangement that you like Ifyou Freeze all racks _ not frozen freeze the whole song you don t have Un Freeze al tracks not frozen to wait at all for the song to regenerate Next time you play itis ready lo go You can make tracks Frozen by pressing the Freeze button snow Take coer
357. t the user plays along with using your style will be the Thru pateh that you set If you re making a heavy rock style you might want to set the thru patch to be Rock guitar if you expected that the user would want to always play along on Rock guiar a Chapter 11 User Programmable Funcins Melody Patch sett other than 0 all melodies will be played on the specified instrument Ifyou making a Grover Washington style for example you might want any melodies tobe automatically set to Saxophone Volumes You can set a default volume for each instrument in your style The default volume is 90 The volume range is 0 127 ReslDrums Settings RealDrums Settings Audio Drums Instead of MIDI drums CI style uses RealDrums audio drums RealDrum style name D Vary Astyles with each play Volume adjust of Audio Styles in dB decibels sub Overall sub MA Allow a Substyle RealDrums F Allow b Substyle RealDrums ReslDrums are actual recordings of studio drummers pieced together by Band in a Box to create a unique real drum tack that is played along with the MIDI tracks created by Band in a Box styles ReslDrums Settings Audio Drums instead of MIDI drums Enable Style uses RealDrums audio drums in arder to designate a RealDrums style then press the RD button to select your RealDrums style Whenever the curent siyle is played it will use your ReslDrums style provided that Rea
358. t to hear your MIDI Keyboard doubling the notes that are being played However when you ext Band in a Box you might want the local on setting for your synthesizer tumed back on This option defaults to tue Set Panning to Mono Set Panning to Mono Stereo menu options are available to easily switch all parts to mono or stereo Also if your current settings are mono the program will affer to convert to sterco when You exit the MIDI Driver selection dialog system on message when the Band in EI Chop 14 Referense Windows Menu Notation Window N Drum Window 0D Guitar Window 0G List Editor Window Switch to Next Track s Switch to Previous Track anrs Chord Reharmonist Dialog choose your own Auto Generate Chord Reharmonization RealDrums Settings RealDrums Picker RealTracks Settings RealTracks Picker Run Audio Chord Wizard standalone Run AudioChordWizard with Audio file Read chords from AudioChordWizard Plugin Mode for Sequencer DAW Notation Window toggles between the notation and the chordshect views Drum Window launches the animated Drum Kit Guitar Window launches the on screen Guitar fretboard List Editor Window launches the List Edit utility for editing MIDI events The Event List Editor is not present in the OS X version though it should be added in the Future Switch to Next Track Switeh to Previous Track selects parts in the row of Notation buttons
359. tacks TimeShift Soloist Part ticks alloys you to move the Soloist forward or backwards in small increments relative to the rest of the song tracks Measured in tieks or parts per quarter PPQ Insert Beats in Soloist allows you to insert a blank beat ar beats into the song relative to the current time signature Delete Beats from Soloist allows you to relative to the curent time signature lete a beat or beats from the song Chapter 14 Reference Copy to Melody Track copies the entire contents of the Soloist rack tothe Melody Track This is useful for a temporary holding arca for your soloist or for bouncing mas Move to Melody Track copies the entre contents of the Soloist track and erases the original daa from the Soloist ack preparing it for a new track or data Swap Melody and Soloist Track performs a double copy move so that the data that was in the Soloist track is transferred to the Melody track and vice versa This is also known as track bouncing Convert Harmony to Soloist Track convens a singi include the current harmony selection Remove Harmony or Guit solo from Soloist Track removes a harmony fiom a rack providing that the harmony was put there by Band in a Box in the first place using the Comvert Harmony to Soloist Track command Generate Guitar Chord Solo opens the Guitar feature dialog for generating a guitar chord solo Rechannel to Guitar Display converts channels on a track to channels
360. tch changes Patches Allowing Change at Bar ty higher banks saving with songs searching Patches popup Patents Pause song PG Music chords PG Music lnc piano display play play along Play bution Play from Play from any har playing songs Playing songs Plug in mode us 3 D 136 m 139 137 E 178 ass 19 D 3 n us 56 178 os 101 us a us 2 E n3 105 303 us m an D 43 D 3 n2 130 options Plug in setings possible substitutions Preferences Preferences 2 Preview button preview chords Printing print options read in chords RealChars ReslDrums how to hear ReslDrums Picker RealStyts RealTracks 3 ways to use Assign RealTracks auto substitute folder in Band n a Box saving settings shots holds pushes using in solos using in songs RealTracks Settings recently played songs recently played styles record melody Recording sep edit Wizard ReFresh Soloist Registration Form Reharmonist teharmonizing ni m EJ us D m 256 n 152 us 45 68 o2 m s 45 63 3s 47 60 v 176 17 166 312 245 E redamonizing Rendering audio normalize Rendering MIDI o audio Rep Replay buton Reverb parameters Reverb presets Reverb Settings Roland RA Save MIDI file select MIDI file Select Song by Ti sequencers settings song shorcutixt solo around melody Soloist steps custom solo demo phrasing
361. te Yau can get bater resus by using the Nolaon window to sdt notes elead cU indow To da th you open the Notation window and mouse ck on a noe wills hong own the option key n Sta ROI or Editable notation mode Entering Notes Manually in the Notation Window You can enter melody notes directly to the track in the Notation window in either the Editable Notation Made or the Staff Roll Mode Ermar the abe Notion mde fom the Saar Noon scr with CN Sgio moe siise oa tie EN ts In the Editable Notation mode you can enter move and cdit notes and rests using standard mouse techniques point and click drag and drop and Option Clic t open the Note Edit dialog box Recording with the Wizard Feature This is a very helpful feature if you don t have a MIDI keyboard but you want to recond with a live feel Use the Wizard to recond notes from the computer s QWERTY keyboard for a track that s more natural than step time Here s how it works E Wa entte ie wiz etsit Press r key to recond AS the song plays play the melody on any keys on the bottom two rows of the QWERTY keyboard in the rhythm of the melody The wizard notes wont be the correct melody of course but don t worry abour that as you recond When you re finished lookin the Notation window You ll see notes in the right places and with the correct dations ut withthe wrong piches deo Drag the notes with the mouse and drop them on the cor
362. tead To get to the dialog box you can select Chord Serzmgs from either the Chordshcet right lic contextual menu or the Edit menu or you can press Option Ths allows you to select the various breaks Rests Shots and Held Chords and pushes by clicking on the relevant Chord Settings Chord Settings Beat 1 OQ Os O4 Preview C Buder Chord angst Update Chord Subs m Rest Tyee O Push by 1 16 Al Instruments O Posh by 1 8 All Except ClGwtr strings Pedal Sass co Pedal ii F on for 0 bars E Ga Beat and Chord First you nce to pick the beat in the bar where the setting will be appli type in new chords on the different bents Pushes You can also Pushes sometimes called anticipations are chords that are played before the beat For example in Jazz Swing the piano player ofen pushes a chord change by playing he chond an eighth note before the beat Depending on the fecl for the style in use chords can be entered on either 16th ar ih ote resolution You can specify a chord to occur a 1h note before the beat for example and all instruments will play this including drums Rest Types The Rest Types are No Rest Rest Only Shot and Hold Chord Chapter Bund io Powertiuide EI Rest Only Shot Hold Chord Rest Only Ress can specify any some o all instruments to rest at any bar For example you could res all instruments except the bass for the fist 4 bars then a
363. ted Notice the Bossa style of chond DD progresion wit 2 3 progressions and other pial Bossa chords Flap Revisit the Reharmonize dialog and wy generating a new chord progression in a new Genre Emm For example EZ listening Pop will generate a Pop style chord progression very different from th Jazz chords in the Bossa version m wm AT up Ry Ej fe pe es nr EA rar ror or cg TY eon Pmr o Lowy ie mc This dialog can also be opened from the menu command Windows duro Generate Reharmonize Part of a Song Now let s use the Reharmonis in an interactive mode where it gives us choices of various chord progressions at cach ba Let s se if we can interactively improve on the chord progression acconding to our own tastes The first 2 bars generated originally are ia Dm Make sure that the currently highlighted cell is bar 1 Now press the Re Harm button but this time choose Part af Song and under Set Range enter Bar 1 Chorus 1 and the bars as 2 Char 12 When Tutors and Uli C Whale song part ot song ar 1 Cherie 1 Wars z Here are two of the possible variations the Re Harmonist has suggested for the first two Gili F69 Gm Bv 3 See a List of Possible Reharmonizations This could also be done with the menu command Windows Chord Reharmonist Dialog choose your awn In the Reharmonize melody new chords f
364. tered in step time This i how it works Press Record to record As the song plays play the melody that you want on any Wizard key using the same key foreach note in the rhythm of the melody The Wizard notes won t be the exact melody but don t worry about that as you record When you re finished go to the Notation window You now have the notes with the correct durations and times but the wrong pitches One by one drag the notes up to the correct melody note holding down the Shift Control and Command key far sharps ats and naturals respectively You ll then have entered a melody that sounds like it was recorded from a keyboard without the stif sound of a melody entered in step time Note you hava the wizard on tha SPACEBAR wont siop playbook You need ta pas ESCAPE to stop playback ithe Wizard is on This ie because people mistakenly hit ine Spacebar while playing te wizard which wold stop te song Inadvertent The Embellisher When musicians see a lead sheet that has a melody written out they would almost never play it exactly as written They would change the timing to add syncopation change durations to achieve staccato or legato playing add grace notes slurs extra notes Vibrato and other effets Click on the Embellisher checkbox to enable live embellishment ofthe Emb Meloy or Soloist pr during playback you enable the Embellisher any Melody will get embellished as it hear a livelier mor
365. terns Nota Tr you are nor able to play pairs real ime ING hem you should record hese Bass Piano Gutar or Sings pattems You cannot enter tnem in step time Only Drum pattems can be entered in step time If you cant enter them in real time import an instrument rom existing styles as described above Recording a Bass Move the highlighted cell to an unused Bass pattem If you re recording a pattern lasting 3 beats record this on the top line A 8 beat This pattern will be used when the song has chords lasting 8 beats or more without a chord change Press the REC button to record the bass pattern You will need to wait during a2 bar lead in Then you record the 2 bar pattem Play the pattem on a CT chord You can use all 12 notes just play a pattem that you would have normally played in the song ifthe song were on a CT chord C E G Bb Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions Lr When you re finished recording the pattem ov see a dialog box listing all ofthe options available Just accep all af the defaults by pressing the OK button Press the SAVE button to save your new style Press the EXIT bunion to close the StyleMaker window and exit Make sure that you have saved the style first otherwise edits will be lost Creating New Styles Making Drum Patterns There are 2 screens in the StyleMaker associated with making drum pattems 1 The StyleMaker screen with drum pattems 2 The Drum Patt
366. tes Press the PLAY buton to audition them Let s create a new drum fil Move to an empty location on the Fills line Press REC to open the Drum Pattern Entry seren Type a drum pattern in the drum grid Save the patter by pressing EXIT to exit the Drum Editor Accept the generic settings in the Drum Pattern Recorded dialog box You will sce your new pattern on the Fills linc as represented by a weight number Let s use COPY PASTE to simplify creating a new drum pattern To make another fill move to an existing fil Choose the COPY button to copy that drum Move to an empty pattem Choose the PASTE button to paste in the previous drum fil Now press REC to launch the Drum Pattern Entry screen and step edit the drum fill You will anly need to change a few notes of the fill make a variation of the one you have copied Save the style by pressing the SAVE button Save allows you to rename the style so you dorit affect the original ZZLITROK Sy Change the Patches that are assigned to the Style Esch style can have patches assigned to it For example if you want the styles Piano part to use a Rhodes piano you can select the piano panch of 5 which is the General MIDI number for the Rhodes Electric Piano Press the PATCH button to the clipboard 196 Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions This displays the Misc Style Settings dialog bos Select the Set Patches
367. tes where you are The different drum instruments are named along the left side andthe 4 beats are displayed along the top Tempo Changes Tempo changes are done using the TEMPO button or pres be Land keys from the main StyleMaker sereen Entering notes onto the drum editor sereen A typical pattern may look like hs This pattern is in a timebase of 12 you ses 4 beats with 4 divisions per beal Ina Timebase 12 only the first three divisions of each beat are accessible The numbers are velocities Move around the Drum Pattern sereen and type in the numbers as above These are velocities and should range between 0 and 127 The fastest way to put the numbers onto the screen i to use the hot keys en the bortom row of the typewriter keyboard XCVBNM or the velocity buttons 0 80 60 70 80 90 100 TIO 120 and 127 at the bottom right ofthe Drum Pattern Entry screen Using Alternate Drum Notes What are alternate notes Alternate notes can be entered for any note This tells Band in a Box to randomly choose a different note to thie one specified For example you might want a note to be a closed high hat 80 of the time and an open hi Ae of the time you might want a note to be high conga 60 and low conga 40 7 high tom 30 of the time and NO note the other 70 This allows one drum patter to sound like many because it will be played different ways depending on which of the notes are picked How to pu
368. th messages Now that computers have beter speaker systems a simple beep when an incorrect key is pressed can seem loud enough to wake your neighbors Setting the silent beep option allows Band in a Box to visually flash the window title bar to get your attention instead of generating an audible beep OK to prompt to reduce expand H a style is changed with a different fel 16th notes instead af Sh notes Band in a Box will automatically offer to expand or reduce the duration af the chords and change the empo to accommodate the new style This also works as the song is playing Lowest Bass Note E2 default Styles wili normally play bass notes down to the low E if the pattem won t go below a Jow E This happens with all styles automatically but there is also an option to set the owes bass note real low so you can get a low C if you want to My soundeard or MIDI doesn t have brushes remap them Most GM modules have brushes available on patch 41 on the drums On some you need to load a GS sound font for this to occur On the Yamaha XG you likely need n send a GS mode on message from the GM menu in Band in a Box But if your module just docs have brushes available then you can set this option and the style will remap the notes to diffrent drum instruments that don t have brushes Chapter 6 Haina PowerCuide us For Roman Numerals in minor keys use relative major Option for minor keys base roman numer
369. th the selected Soloist ar you can Clear the selection so Bat no style is loaded Change Instrument determines if and how frequently the Soloist instrument wi change This could be each chorus every part marker every substyle change o every 4 8 16 or 32 bars Chapter Auomitie Mane Features a Solo Modes Sol Mode As well us the normal mode of soloing for a Normal umber of choruses while the melody is silent the Soloist has several other modes Oris 6o For example Fils wil nodi over the changes far a percentage of tme Other modes O Around Melody sic Se Aroni Meloay Tride A Solo Wizard and Custom Solo for a Spic Range O Trade 4 s is O Solo Wizard O Cm Around Melody option This option for the Soloist part creates a solo around the melody that is at times when the melody is silent To solo around the melody do the following 1 Open up a song that has a melody preferably a sparse melody with some space in it that a Soloist might be able to jump in Press the Soloist button Select the Solo Mode Around Melody Set the Soloist to play in Al Chorus and uncheck the Mute Melody in Middle option 4 Press OK and the solo will be generated playing riffs at times when the melody isn t playing Tip For added sfaci add a gatar chard cbs he Solos par uang he Chord Sio button on the Guitar and choosing Salo as the destination Or simply chaose a Guitar Harm
370. the Auto Substitution feature and the substitutions wil be selected according to the general preset preferences There are 2 ways to get chord substitutions you can let Band in a Box show you a list of possible substitutions to pick rom yourself User Chord Subuition Dialog or you Son let Band in Box pick them automatically User Auto Substitutions Chord Substitutions Dialog mcs rmm Pie PaaS nth Gi chr onus Hear does ave ese nes E Work To EE chord ished Type ot be ruis 81 S EIS Show subtiutons ariy Mel Compatible ore choras Sazz substeasons Ckecompie Bless cheras ree couney uS chord ach veat Coor y EB Coad Gam The appearance of this dialog depends on what chords are present at the highlighted bar This bar number is shown in the dialog and may be changed Inthe example above the chord is an F7 chord so the substitutions shown are fr an F7 chord The substitutions Shown may work for up to 4 bars depending on the substitution Inthe examples above the substitutions work for 2 bars 2 Chapter 12 Whe Taos and Ulis You can control what types of substitutions to see by using the JazzPop checkbox Some Substitutions include more chords than the original some simplify the progression and hese can be viewed using the checkboxes You can elect to exclude substitutions that have a chord on cach beat The Types of Substitutions o include comb
371. the Spood of the sirum to say ms then the guitar chord will bbe strummed over a period of Oms Strum Delay Ifthe Delay start time is le at zero the strum will nd at the original time of the melody note Ifyou set it to 50 delay the strum will be in its midpoint at he original start time of he Melody note and ii sct to 100 the strum wont start until the time of the original note The most musical setting is about 50 delay A delay of 0 also sounds good and has the added advantage that t doesnt shift the actual time of the Melody note relevant if you keep regenerating the solo on the Melody track The Placked or Strummed button sets these settings to reset values Chord Types to Include You can decide which types of chords should be Chord Types Best Good Advanced Unusual Barre Oper Best chords are the most commonly played chords by pro guitarists Good chords are popular alterate chords Advanced chords are chords that are difficult to play or have advanced voicing Unusual chords are voicings that should be avoided in most cases but have some Barre chords are chords that require the index finger to be played in a Barre position Include Open Strings can be st to Never Sometimes Favor Iset to Never no chords that require and open sting will be played If set o Favor it will play pe strings Whenever possible and sometimes is a middle ground setting Chord pe
372. the range set to bar Sand 6 Pressing OK at this point will cause only bars Sand 6 ta be regenerated preserving the rest of the song This allows you to repeatedly generate te gencate parts of the melody and or chords until you get the Melody Chord progression that you re Tooking for V Replace Thru Form lyon have set the Melodist o Generate Part of Song this would in the example above generate only bars 5 and 6 of the song form in the A section ofan ABA form Ifthe form of the song were AABA you d normally is Chapter e Automatic Mosi Features want the regenerated section to be repeated throughout the form in all ofthe a sections The Replace Thru form will set the Melodist to copy the generated bars 5 and 6 to the other a sections bars 13 14 and 29 30 youd like to remove the current Intro Melody or Soloist Track press the Kill Intro Kili Melody ar Kil Soloist button You can press the Search button and then type in part ofa CE elogis ame memo style name or other text associated with a ae ent Ti wil ca tas the Melos ecco change CueTes in the next hem containing he text Similarly you can ype ina CU i st Mala md ps Ka to aon Memo Database MELLST2 Swing Tenar octave below 459 anticipare autoioads J EASY STY No transpose on 2nd amp The Memo area displays a Memo for the current Melodist as well as the name ofthe database eg Melody ST2
373. the toolbar and then choosing which tracks that you want to freeze or unfreeze There are a number of reasons that you would freeze a track Reasons to Freeze a RealTracks track audio Frozen tracks will play back instantly not requiring time to generate 7 They play back the same way cach time so if you ike a solo you can fineze it Myou send a song to a friend as frozen they will hear the same performance I For the Soloist rack if you generate a solo it can now be saved by freezing the wack Reasons to Freeze a MIDI track You can edit the MIDI data to customize the performance to match a certain song and this will be saved Use the Notation window or Piano Roll to edit the tack More reasons to freeze any track Frozen tracks play hack instantly without requiring time to regenerate 7 They play back the same way each time 7 You can change the chord progression af the song and have one part playing a different chord progression than the rest of the band For example type a blowing chord progression generate a solo freeze the solo track then type a normal chord progression and generate the rest of the instruments bass guitar ete that will play the normal changes Have different instruments play different styles For example the Bass could be generated using Reggae then Frozen and then the rest of the instruments generated ising a Techno style Un Freczing a Track s Chapter
374. then press OK Nota This does nal apply to dium paterna since dium paterna dont play any direi n diferent chords Miscellaneous Style Settings RealDrums and RealTracks From within the StyleMaker press the PATCH button The Mise Style Settings dialog box opens which allows you to set some miscellaneous settings for the style These include settings to assign RealTracks and RealDrums to a style Waltz you want to make a Waltz style check the Waltz checkbox Then the StyleMaker will record and play pattems in 3 4 time The beat row will recond 6 beat 2 bar patterns the 4 bear will record 3 beat 1 bar pattems The 2 beat and L bcat still Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions w record 2 and 1 beat pattems The new style is made as a waltz and will play with a 3 4 lead in There is no need to put a 3 4 time signatre change in bar 1 You will also notice that any style will play better if set ta 3 4 time This makes songs like Take Five sound better which are written as 3 4 2 4 bars Try out the Swing number demo of 5 4 time signature So if we haven t made as Bossa Walz for example you can set a time signature of 3 4 in bar 1 and get a Bossa Wi stera Pushing Patterns can be pushed individually or on instrument basis random of time Pushes can get a Velocity Boost so that they are played louder than other patiems Usually a setting of 10 is a good boost to
375. tional few moments to analyze the chords Playback will then begin automaticaly Enjoy the solo Jen E T we io pum sse tengin A o bes eo O inen spaces beraren phrases Saves LomwGste SH RR paet Lama y Ma S ene ms Ossido tange To 7 emot nd pneter 3 meane Tw Ci vosen waow 9 pcm ien Miro spacing dtp T Cage aaa Ress Sp GS kevecWdedyby iri 1D Change Seto CER lew Mosman notes in 1 beat as sm rth cs The Melodist Maker In addition to the 50 Melodists supplied with the program this module lets you define or edit your own melodists You can choose the parameters to control he type of chords melody and miro to be generated as wel as a numberof settings controlling song form heme continuity endings type anticipations feel style harmony soloist patch changes and more Launching the Melodist Maker Melodist Maker The Melodist Maker is launched from the Melodi MEIDGISE Maker sriscion dialog Press the Melodist Maker Edit bution to launch the Melodist Editor dialog Chapter 11 User Programmable Functions 2m Melodist Editor Dialog messes rs Tenes s sms one Una cbr run ete Fore tona Paes E Mamo e eoo son o T change mairuen re S 57 Mamer of Vanarions Come From i proton 8 Borea t bu tm puces rere j Posse e127 4127 T Waoane Ranse E lu E CO Cs Cher o
376. tions for DAW Plug in Press he DAW Mode button on the Toolbar then choose the menu item Start DAW Plug in made or go to Windows menu and choose Plug in Mode fr Sequencer DAM When you do this 1 Window size of Band in a Box changes to a small size you can resize it to the size positon that you want and it will remember that O tomis Oiss Oars Boum Our Osuna OWelsdy Osea You can now easily drag ichs fom Bandia Box To your DAW in wep Fir drag the track button to the drop station blue rectangle and then when it tums green drag that to your DAW s tack 6 Chapter 3 Band Bo 2010 for Mac You can also drag files to other programs besides DAW s if they accept a drop of audio files AIFF MAA or MIDI files For example Finde allows this Please se the DAW Plug In Mode chapter for a full tutorial Freeze Tracks Freezing locking MIDI or RealTracks RealDrums Any track MIDI or RealTrack can now be frozen When frozen it won t be changed or regenerated This saves time when replaying previous songs and allows you to eez an arrangement that you like If you freeze the whole song you don t have to wait at all for the song ro regenerate Next time you play i is rendy to go JO Freeze all tracks not frozen Un Freeze all tracks not frozen Bass Piano Drums Guitar Strings Melody Soloist You can make tracks Frozen by pressing the Freeze button snowflake on
377. titles and memes Check the AI bution to search all Soloists otherwise only the type selected will be searched Go to will go to the specifie Soloist number that you enter in the box Memo has information about the selected Soloist and notes about using it The There are additional settings that let you customize the solo Double Time Instrument Trumpet Y Choose Clear Harmony 9 ro harmony gt 7 Crear Style JAZQUINT STY Choose Clear Change Instrument None When Double Time is checked he Soloist will lay twice as many noes in a given space of time This is useful for ballads or other tunes with slower tempos The solo instrument is set by default according to the selected Soloist but you can override that instrument by clicking on the list box and choosing fiom the General MIDI patch list The Choose button opens a list of instruments that typically play in the same register as the default instrument You can choose a new solo instrument from the list Clear will clear the default or chosen solo instrument useful if you want to keep a previously used solo instrument Some Soloists have a harmony assigned You can use this setting to override the selection oro add a harmony of your own choosing Use Clear to remove he harmony Ia selected Soloist autoloads a new style that style will be displayed here You can IChoose to load a new style wi
378. titles you to fie unlimited technical support advance notice of product upgrades and news about new product releases If yon havent registered your PG Musie sofware yet please take a few moments and do so nov How to Register Mail to PG Music Ine 29 Cadillac Avenue Victoria BC VEZ 1T3 Canada Fato 1 250 475 2037 or toll free to 1 877 475 1444 Online at scs pemusie com Telephone 1 250 475 2874 tole in North America at 1 800 268 6272 or toll free at 800 4746 8742 with Universal International Freephone Service acces Name Ad ress ciy State Province Zip Postal Code County Telephone m E mail address Computer check IBM MAC Model Operating system eg Windows XP Vista Macintosh OS X What MIDI interface are you using What primary synth sound card do you use Favorite Styles Jazz Rock _Pop_Country_Other Purchased from Date of purchase Comments Suggestions m egisraion Form
379. to enter Staff Roll Notation In this view you can enter or edit notes as well as the note velocity and duration The note heads are shown with editable velocity and duration lines This mode is similar to the Editable Notation mode except that the beats begin right on the bar line You can se the duration of the note visually represented by a horizontal blue or green line and the pots velocity displayed as a vertical line of the same color Tip you cant ses Tess Tines press he Opt ution to creck that Show Nole Durations Show Velocity Lines and Show BariBeat Lines options are enabled Chapter S Guided Tour of Bund ox s Using the Mouse to Edit Velocity and Duration Place the mouse cursor on the not head and hold down the Option button on the computer keyboard Thea starting atthe note head drag the cursor horizontally to set e note s duration or vertically to set the not velocity Let s print the song OLDFOLKS MGU Press the Print button on the Notation wind or the Print icon an he main sereen or press Ctrl P to launch the Print Options dialog box Iis very likely tha Band in a Box has made all the correct settings for you mede E Michores M Treble Clef notes C Bass Clef Fist Choros inar ds below by 1 Cessoit C4 5 Q Last Chorus Telet sign Every Une O Wnole song includ Lead In Bar Lyrics Below By 2 C key Sig Every Line Sta
380. tomatically play in the t Chapter andina owehide substyle This is great for Jazz songs allowing you to play swing throughout the middle soloing choruses and revert to the 4 substyle far the last chorus Notez Tou want to keep the same subsiyie re middie choruses you would need to uncheck the Vary Style in Middie Chonuses option in tna Additonal Song Satinge phon on the Sang menu Adding More Substyles You ean add more substyles to an z individum song with rightclick on any no nange o susme bar number This opens the Suhstvle 3 Moon Change Mem where you can defineup ve UA2COOU 1024 substyles from a io QATTOURA Iset in the song 4 UAZFOUAA iset in the song f UAZZFAST set in the sona i QAIPAST set in the song MultiStyles Band in a Box MultiStyles have four substyles a through sory in the StylePicker that opens a list of availa There is a MultiStyles ct Maltistyls Standard Pop song form with 4 substyle Mu Asa general rule for styles with 4 substyles ta substyle is far the verse isle C sibstyle is for the chorus me substyle is for the intro or first verse CAP substyle is for the break or interlude Placing Drum Fils A one har drum fill wll play in the bar preceding leading into a part marker just as a live drummer will play a fill to accent the transinon between sections of a song want a drum fill to play in bar 7 of a song inser
381. tor to analyze any song This feature will show the chords that are playing on the vital guiar fretboard in your choice ofa Jazz Pop o Folk perspective The Guitar Tutor is a fun way to eam about new guitar chords while playing along with your favorite Band in a Box tune The Guitar Tutor is most useful on styles that aren t guitar styles This would apply to styles that don have an exclamation point in the file name This is because the guitar styles already have a guitar part that you can learn from on the Guitar part Using the Guitar Tutor you can see and optionally hear guitar chords played on the guitar fretboard This teaches you how to play the chords on guitar ems cu Teron launch the Guitar window and cuter pres the Tutor bution z Curtar Tutor enable Chord Tutor Display on fretboard fray chords through MIDI Cuitar Patch Fon Sing Guitar 7 Type of chords to display Walking Jazz 4 Nore Chords 7 When Guitar Chord Tutor is enabled guitar chords will display on fretboard and optionally will be heard through MIDI on the THRU pari Show muted high nate of 3 note comping Ee T E GD Enable the Chord Tutor display by setting that checkbox This wil silently display the ston on the guitar fretboard If you would also like to Aear the notes select the Play chords through MIDI checkbox 2 Clar 12 When Tutors and ies The Tutor part uses the MID
382. tronome four times in tempo t set it automatically ature and tempo fora song and the Band in a Nain Settings Title nivea Key Tempo Ex Bbm F 680 500 120 C Transpose iie I Embellish Chords T Set Tempo ee The Title Key and Tempo settings can also be made in the Tile window on the main Chapter Bund io Powertiuide Old Folks at Home IGARNER STY Ab as 1 32 3 Transpose you change the key you can transpose all ofthe MIDI pars to the new key by checking the Transpose box This is especially useful when loading in new songs and transposing them to other keys you ve entered a progression that you intend for a particular key and then choose the key afterward in order to show the correct key signature you would leave Transpose unchecked Then the key signature will change o the new key you type in but the chords you entered will stay the same Embelish Chords The Embellish Chords setting enables live embellishment of the chords The More button opens the Addition More Settings dialog box CS Jnd hax also opens vi the 1S1 buron on tte main sereen or by S choosing Additional Song Setings fom the Song menu These are the additional song settings for options like rests pushes chond embellishment tags endings and more that turn a standard Band in a Box song into an
383. ts relative to the rest of the song tracks Measured in ticks or pas per quarter PPQ Insert Beats In Melody Allows you to insert a blank beat or bests into the song relative to the current time Delete Beats in Melody Allows you to delete a beat or beats fom the song relative to the current time signature Copy to Soloist Track Copies the entire contents of he Melody track to the Soloist Tack Useful for a temporary holding area for your Melody or bouncing tacks Move to Soloist Track Copies the entire contents of the Melody track and erases the original data from the Melody track preparing it for a new track or data Swap Melody and Soloist Track This performs a double copy move so that the data that was in the Melody track is transferred to the Soloist tack and visa versa This is also known as track bouncing Melodist Generate Chords and Mel launches the Melodist feature Melody Maker These sub menu items allow you to edit Melodist files using the Melody Maker Track Type Normally you d leave the tack type set to Single But you can setit to Guitar Channels 11 to 16 will display on the guitar as strings 11 to 16 TAB will show the notation vill be up an octave and the MIDI ile wili contain the channels preserved Chap 14 Referense 0 Multi All channels are preserved and output on the channels This would be useful for importing an entire MIDI file and playing it from the Melody channel
384. tton if you don t like the results For example ry changing the tempo of song fo see the changes that this will make to the Sth note spacing and lateness ig Usual Wan a maan SVS ASST Enpo Rams pays he eng BT maius closer together and a Wte ater These categories are very straightforward and you should have no trouble achleving the desired results Remember to apply such parameters as Legato and Lateness sparingly Insert Beats Delete Beats in Melody For example to insert 2 bars in the melody at bar 5 Choose Melody Insert Beats In Melody and select ar 5 and select 8 beats 2 bars to insert Additional Copy function for Chords Melody This allows you to Copy Chords and or Melody for a range o bars Copy Pre the Com button to lunch the dialog box or select he Copy From To option from the Edir menu or press option 0 Chapter caring Tracks Copy Chords and or Melody copy Chords M Copy Melody Copy From Bar 1 F Copy Soloist st Bars to Copy 8 Chorus 1 Copy To Bar 1 Melody Embellisher When musicians see a ead set that has a melody writen out they would almost never play it enaetly as writen They would change the timing 1o add syncopation change Aurion to achieve succ or legato playing ad grace notes siura extra mats Vibrato amd other effects Now you can have Band in a Box do these automatically ising the Melody Embellisher If you enable the Embellisher
385. u get to the instrument screen by mouse clicking on the instrument name button Thsrewistr subse A paters tings netes eg nsns Tstevisfor sue B patterrs istingctes The important rows are indicated with an asterisk meaning that if you are making a simple style youl only have to use these rows The a and referta the a and B Substyles found in Band in a Box The numbers 1 2 4 8 referto the length ofthe recorded patterns in terms of number of beat Far example a2 bar pattem would be 8 beats Explanation of the numbers on the StyleMaker sereen The StyleMaker sereen is fll of patterns mostly empty indicated hy a period When a pattern has been recorded there is a number in place of the period for example 5 These numbers indicate whether a pattern has been recorded at the location A period indicates no pattern and a number from 1 9 indicates that a pattem has been recorded with the actual value corresponding to the desired weight the pattem is to be given relative to other similar pattems Patterns that you don t want to hear very often in the style are given low weights Usually you will use weights in the range of 0 8 where 0 no pantern recorded 1 5 patter recorded 9 special weight that is really given a much higher weight internally by the program A patern with a Weight of 9 will always be played if not masked out by other options s and B refer to the 2 substyles available in the Band in a Box progr
386. u have put pushes into a song but doit want the pushes to play in the middle choruses The middle choruses are usually used for soloing so you may not want the pushes to play low Rests in First Chorus Defaut This is used if you have put rests into a song but dont want the rests o play in the first chorus Allow Rests in Middle Choruses Default This is used if you have put rests into a song but dort want the rests to play in the middle choruses The middle choruses are usually used for soloing so you may aot want ters m llow Rests in Last Chorus Default This is used if you have put rests into a song but dont want the rests to ply n the last chorus Defaut This determines whether Pedal Bass effect will be allowed in middle choruses Allow Embellishment of Chords Default The Jazz styles include embellishment of chords This means that if you type a CT chord he piano player may play a C13 ora C7H9 This makes the arrangement sound more authentic Tip W you are hearing TRU and Tat 13 amballanments on a C7 chord thats Gaahing wh the mele you should rename the chord C9 or C13 which wil ensure natural 9 and 13 embolishments Ta disable the embesehment for a ceran song uncheck this option There are very ew situations that you wouldn t want t on especially if you rama soma horde as Cl instead of C7 in stuatons where the melody clashes Wt the embellis
387. u want to use Select the Harmony that 2 Choose the menu item Melody Convert Harmony so Melody Track 3 Your harmony will now be written to the track and youl get a confirmation dialog The harmony may be removed from the track at any time even afer you ve saved and re loaded the song Thisis dene from the menu item Melody Remove Harmony or guitar Solo from Melody Track Printing Lead Sheet Style Printing Your crested songs can be printed out in the style ofa lead sheet style Most songs will fiton 1 page o your printout will ok similar to a standard lead shes You ean easily make and printout a custom fake book ofall of your tanes and you can casily transpose purs to print out for trumpet sax players cte The printout includes tile bar Composer style and copyright information Prints using a saleable True Type font and Supports all MAC compatible prater A tea shet usually contains the chords melody and lyrics ofa song on a single page if possible We have kept he concept of Band in a Box using 4 bars per lne onthe printout since Pop music is usually in 4 bar phrases This aligns these phrases on the begimning ofa new line In addition to a lead sheet style printout you can also print out any part of Band in a Box such as the Piano par or Guitar part to practice your sight reading or to leam the parts if you are leaming to play that instrument Printing a song is donc by pressing th
388. uding tags or endings Rec buton records MIDI from an extemal keyboard ar the Wizard to the Melody track pA TiS portrai he RestDums whieh are audio drums that ean replace the MIDI drums with a real drummer ReDres This opens the RealTracks Settings dialog RealTracks are audio instruments bcr than drums such s RealPedalStcl ReslAceusticGuitar lneatrets and RealSa The Melodist buton opens he Generate Chords andlor Melody dialog Bl ae you can soose dc ype or genre of Melodin you wah ove Melia generate a complete new song wath chand changes and melody aswell as E improvised slo and an dial song ie The Soloist button opens the Select Soloist Dialog where you can choose the Soloist you wish to have play over any given chord changes Sonit This button apens the Notation window where you can edit view and print MIDI notation notn p Use the Print button to launch the Print Options dialog and pint the currently selected track of notation gin Displays the notes being played on a vital guitar fretboard Select the track that you want to display Gur The Drum button launches an animated virtual Drum Kit window Play along or watch drums light up as they ae played Dum The Intro feature creates a chord progression that gets inserted as an introduction for the son The Audio Chord Wizard program Applications Band n a Bov Audio Chord Wizard autom
389. uitar o C Octave This allows he harmony o drop down or go up by a number of octaves This octave change will only happen in a certain range as chosen in the Low and High settings For example in the Shearing Quintet harmony we want the 2nd voice of the Piano part to drop down an octave when the melody not s higher than MIDI note 6 the Ab above middle C So when the melody is higher ban this the harmony will become a drop 2 voicing There is also an Overall Harmony Octave setting available by pressing the Mare button that changes the octave of the entire harmony O Double Octave Double This setting lets you double any voice Usually you want to do this by doubling an octave below Le octave 1 but you can set the octave from 2 to 2 The doubling NL always be on the same channel Ifyou wanta different instrument to double the Voice then use the Melody Doubling Voices For the Shearing Quintet harmony the only volce that needs a doubling like this is the Piano melody so well set this to 1 on mel he melody voice V Boost Velocity Boost This allows you to increase or decrease the velocity loudness of each voice to make the voice stand out more or les in the harmony Default For the Shearing Harmony we set the Melody toa boost of 10 and the vibes and guitar to a negative boost of 5 and 20 This makes the piano stand out and the vibes and guitar quieter Patches Chan A Acoustic Piano M
390. ums Lip This will put a held chord on all instruments except the piano Pushes Pushes in Styles Pushes also called anticipations are chords that are played before the bea For example in Jazz Swing the piano player ofen pushes a chord change by playing the chond an eighth note before the bit Styles can push any instrument so that the instrument plays before the chond begins This i very common in Jazz and other Pop Imus and pives the musica more natural sound You ned not e concerned with pushes that are in the styles as they happen automaticalty You need only o he aware that the styles can push the nstruments This makes styles sound much bee and more syncopated Pushes in Songs Chords can be pushed by an or 16 occur a 16 note hore the beat and all instruments including drums will play You can also specify that a chord change should happen before the beat To do this you can citer use keystrokes or the chond options dialog box Ta use keysmkes Type the caret symbol before the chond The caret symbol is located above the onthe keyboard Type a single caret to get a chord an eighth note before the bent ee C7 Type a double caret to get a chond a sixteenth note before the beat eg C7 In Jazz styles and other triplet feels the chord will be pushed by a triplet regardless i eris a single or double caret Shots Holds and Pushes in RealTracks Simply type in the chords as you no
391. using Songs Pause There are several ways to pause a Band in a Box song Press the Pause button Select Hold Pause from the Song menu Press the delete key Stopping Songs StoP To stop a Band in a Box song Press the Stop button or Select the Sip option from the Song menu or Press the ese key Chapter 6 Hand ina Bax owehde us Changing Volume Panning Reverb Chorus Bank To change the volume panning Fever choras or bank of pr 1 Select the part by clicking on the desired part to chang Goss aus Drar Ooo Oce Oira aea Den DT Then click in the box for the desired setting to affert 3 Clicking on the mumbor in the box will change the value by 1 To increase the setting click on the upper half of the number Click on the lower half of the number to decrease the setting by 1 A Clicking on the gray vertical bars t the right ofthe box will increase or decrease the setting by 5 except for Bank settings Hank numbers start at O and then go up by multiples of 8 16 24 32 ete until they reach 127 S The range of settings is from Oto 127 except for Pan which goes from 63 ard ict to 64 hard right with 0 in the center of dhe stereo fcd Another option is to right click or Control lick on the name of the setting to open a dialog box where you can directly type in a value Reverb Enter value between 0 and 127 licking on the piano keybo
392. ves per page 9 m eE GD Se SS Comparer Temo T Compose Comit E ietMegn 025 Music Font Size del 24 26 ght Margin 025 CORPS Setup Cose Came You should make sure to select the print range of first chorus to print only the first choris ofthe song Take a peek at your printer setup to ensure that you have the comet CSetup printer specified rini You will then get a printout of C Eh scaled to fit on one page and is done ead sheet style You can of course change the options Now get back t the Notation window As the song is playing ers display other instruments beside the Melody BMVOWA 2 Chaper Guided Tou of Bandi Box These buttons sand for Bass Drums Piano Guitar Strings Melody and Soloist The selected part Bass is highlighted in color E Get back to the Melody track by pressing the M button Cir Shift FS is the hot key that allows you to switch tracks using keystrokes oy turing the Clean function onoff Clean notation is an M Clean imcttigent mode that eliminates grace notes amd unusual notation producing a cleaner and mich mare readable notio This allows you to play in melodies using grace notes and normal playing without worrying that the notation won t display cleanly EN eera a i iboi Ta retums us to the familiar Band in a Box sereen Norn Play the Jukebox
393. want to save with a song and press the Save Song buton when you are ready You can also choose 1o Save current Melody and Soloist patches with every song Save Current Melody Harmony with song and Save Current Thru Harmony with song will save the curren selections and reload them the next time you open the song Save Soloist w song will save the Soloist track with the song Save Load Thru settings with songs saves the Thru patch volume reverb ete Normally you wouldnt save these settings with songs For this song only use this RealDrum style Iets you assign a specifie RealDrums style to your song Press the RD button to choose the RealDrums style For this song only force MIDI drums will always use MIDI drums not RealDrums with the song C aan Saving a MIDI file T E TT with the menu command Fite Save Sundard MIDI File or with the keystrokes Option S Save the file to disk r to the clipboard Choose which tracks get written to the MIDI File By muting trucks with Optiom Cliek on th track nume at the top af the screen you can decide which tracks get written to the MIDI fil Any track that 1s muted is excluded fiom the MIDI file Sce the Preferences dialog for MIDI file options For example if you don t want to create a MIDI file containing the first 2 bars of the 1 2 1 2 3 4 count in you can select this option and the MIDI file wil begin directly at bar 1 without the count in theres 2 Melody picku
394. which brings up the following dialog box ae Chapter 11 User Programmable Funcins Tana Haron OO Use Close Harmony 2 Ute Passing Chore lay w Volume Adjust of Eire Harmony No hamonyfeurationlessthan T me OK to make new harmony wth chord B e Use Close Harmony This only applies to 2 and 3 part harmonies then it will use only close harmonies mainly nds for 2 part harmonies it will use mostly Ands with some ths for 2 part harmonies set to 99 it will use mostly ts with some 3rds for 2 part harmonies Mseto 100 then it will use only wide harmonies e mainly 6th for 2 part harmonies set to between 2 and 98 it will vary between close and open harmonies for 2and 3 part harmonies Use Passing Chords Melody Delult 100 Band in a Box will sort out hen to use passing harmonies based on factors like the duration of the note the next note the chord tone he velocity previous notes and other factors You dott need to be aware of any of this You can visually see when the harmony is using a passing chord The harmony display is usually blue but when there is a passing chord i displays as RED you don t want passing chords set this value to 0 We usually lave it at 10 Lowest Harmony Note You can set a lowest note for the harmony to play When the melody is low harmonies begin to sound muddy so you can avoid the harmony being played below a certain Iseo Hsetto
395. wise youll have to keep reselecting the harmony when you lad in new songs Change Harmony w new chords Example Ifa harmony is played on bar 1 ona C chord and then the note is held as the ord changes to a Fm7 chord if this setting checked he harmony notes will change so hut they will be still be playing chord tones If they don t the harmony sounds dissonant Leave this setting checked unless you have a specifie reason to disable it The harmony is changed by moving the voices to the nearest chond tone Har Volume Adjust Raise or lower the overall volume of the Harmony with a range of 128 to 128 OK to Load Style w songs Leave this unchecked to audition the same style with several different songs Use MSB for Bank Roland Band in a Box sends General MIDI bank changes in two ways Most synths eig Roland Korg Kawai use the Controller 0 for the bank This is the MSB Most Significant Byte method Check this option if you are using one of these synths Some synths use Controller 32 for the bank eg Peavey This is the LSB Least Significant Byte method If you have one of these synths then uncheck the Use MSB for Bank Roland Tip your synin raquras bath MSS and LOR bank changes use tha F bution patches oT higher banks puse Play until MIDI note event or QWERTY key received lows playback to be started from another keyboard r the computer keyboard The Band in a Bon arrangement will be gen
396. write the exact chord names into the MIDI file So if the Chord Wizard sees these events will se them instead of interpreting the chords since they are likely to be completely accurate If you d prefer the Chord Wizard to ignore these chord events you set the OK to use PG Music Chord names from MIDI file to false Note Ti you set Tis TRUE ten the Chord Wizard wont be working warte interpreting chords since i rekes instead on the chord names Being present n the MIDI fi Em Caper 12 Wizarde Tatars and Uis C Write chord summary notes to Soloist Track The senting for Write Chord Summary Notes to Soloist Track is only used for diagnostic or special purposes IF et the Soloist track will contain a special track that has chord writen every 2 beats or whatever the setting for chord resolution i that contains every note found for the chord This shows you the type of logie that the Chord Wizard was basing its decisions on Ifyou encounter a song that gives incorrect results for the chords you can uy this setting and then examine the Soloist track to see the actual notes of the chords IM Include Continuous controllers and pitch bend IM Include Patch changes You can optionally include controllers pitch bend an patch changes Fom the MIDI fi The Reharmonist Generate Chords for a Melody Generate chords for a melody or an improved chard progression for a melody with he Reh
397. x Registration Form How to Register ES ES 254 oss 200 a m m m a ass a m Chapter 1 Welcome to Band in a Box Congratulations on your purchase of Band in a Box 2010 fr Macintosh he favorit of musicians students and songwriters everywhere Get ready to have fun What is Band in a Box Band in a Box is an intelligent automatic accompaniment program for your multimedia computer You can hear and play along to many song ideas and go dom nothing to something in a very short period af time With Band in a Box as your on demand backup band Band in a Box is so easy to use Just type in the chords for any song using standard chord symbols like C Fm7 ar C1369 choose the style you d like and Band in a Box does the rest automatically generating a complete prafessianal quality arrangement of piano bass drums guitar and Strings or horns in a wide variety af popular styles plus optional ive audio racks with RealDrums and RealTracks And that s not all Band in a Box is a powerful and creative musie composition tool for exploring and developing musical ideas with near instantaneous feedback Over the years many powerful and practical features have been added 10 Band in a Box earning it a reputation as the one musie program you can t do without In addition to its basie ability to think like a musician the musical intelligence of Band in a Box has grown to include improvisatio
398. y a blue horizontal line Notes below the Ble line have been identified as the bass part by the Audio Chord Wizard The note bars look like a MIDI Piano Roll but they are not exactly the same as a MIDI Piano Roll Audio Chord wizard detects the strongest frequencies found in each eighth note time slot and displays them in the Note Bars window Sometimes the displayed frequencies REALLY ARE instrument notes played in the audio file But they could be spurious information such as the accidental loudest frequency ofa drum beat A midrange frequency note bar might be showing the sum of harmonics from several instruments cach instruments harmonics contributing to the strength of that frequency The Notes Bars display information is real and useful but try not to assume that every displayed note bar is a real note in the audio Opening Files When the Audio Chord Wizard buton is pressed the program window wil Dm open and then launch the Open Wave File dialog fr selection of the audio fle to be analyzed There is a file named Frontier mda in the Band in a AGW Box Tutorias folder that you can use to try out the Audio Chord Wizard GD GED Grams ict acme Bich branden monizea MCU 21 Nov 0822 AW Becta anam peamact i Novat 207A Bi di sossa33sT 5 Nov 05 3 58PM 5 MAY 0A 256 PM When you select a file to open you will see a series of Progress messages The Audio Chord Wizard is then lau
399. y for the next chond You can insert up to two chords per bar in this fashion Chord Display Modes In addition to the Standard Notation window you c Roman Numeral notation Nas also enter or display chords in tion Sog notation or Fixed Do notation For example the chord Gim in the key of F would e displayed as I in Roman Numeral Noaton 2 in Nashville Notation and Re in Sligo In laly and other paris ot Europe chords ike C7 are always referred t0 by the Solfeggio name Do T far Cry regardless of the key signature These systems are very useful for learning or analyzing tunes because they are independent of the key signature a hs sening is made inthe Chard Display Type In hox nc Preferences dag perma mera T Wen a new mtn mode sles SS espe wl a he ngs cin Seana Shen Chek sehen mesa bot E Clogier Th Mala Sereen Style variations foc your arrangement are entered in the chordsheet by clicking on a bar number to set a part marker Each click toggles to he next available substyle part marker a by ete or removes the part marker Regular styles have two substyles and Bund in a Bax MultiStyles have four substyle variations a b c and d mma a You can add more substyles to an 7 individual song witha right click on any No change of suostvie bar number This opens the Substle 3 DAZCOOL Change Menu where you can define up vb VAZCOOU 1024 substyes fom
400. y it In this tutorial we will describe several ways t edit an existing style These include changing patches saved with style adding editing drum pattems to a style copying and pasting drum pattems recoding additional bass pattems adding strings to a style by importing strings ftom another style Lets edit the Light Rock Style which is called ZZLITROK Style Chapter 11 User Programmable Funcins L To select a style for editing from the main sereen C Gang unito EF Cle uris 1201 39 3 Mouse click over top of the style on the Title window This area on the main sereen indicates the style that is currently in memory If you want to edit the current style in this example itis ZZLITROK Style then choose either User Edit Existing User Style or press Option Y you want to edit a different style then Load a different style from the StylePicker or by selecting the Load Sivle From Disk option on the User menu or press 38 or select a Style from either the Sie menu or the Sie menu 2 The StyleMaker window is then opened and you will see the display ofthe style prepared for editing The StyleMaker shows you patterns that have been recorded for Drums and Bass constantly If you would like to see the pattems recorded for Piano Guitar or Strings then select the appropriate instrument bution to view hem The currently selected instrument fr Piano Bass Strings is indicate
401. y song in any folder The selected song loads and plays automatically in Band i Box Juke Box Play Opens the Juke Box Options dialog to select and play a jukebox list Previous Juke Song Next Juke Song Navigate hack and forth in a jukebox set Chapter 14 Reference ms Wizard Playalong Enables the Wizard feature for play along on the computer keyboard Wizard Uses Smart Notes Toggle this on so the Wizard will only play notes based on the chord key af the song Toggle smart notes Of unchecked to have the Wizard provide you access to the chromatic seale Freeze all Tracks Freeze tracks so that Band in a Box will not overwrite them with new arrangements Vn Freeze all Tracks Un iceze all frozen tracks Freeze a single track Freeze any track so that it will not be overwritten by Band in a Box You can use this menu command repeatedly to freeze individual tacks in a song Generate even if tracks are frozen Force generation ofa song that is frozen m Clap 14 Referense Styles Menu v Jazz Swing Country Triplet Feel Country Sixteenth Feel Bossa Nova Ethnic Blues Shuffle Blues Even waltz Pop Ballad Shuffle Rock Light Rock Medium Rock Heavy Rock Miami Sound Latin Milly Pop Funk Jazz Waltz Rhumba Cha Cha Bouncy 12 8 Irish Pop Ballad 12 8 Country 12 8 Old Reggae Use thi list fora quick pick Hom the Tst OF 24 original Bandi a Box styles You cither cun pick a musica
402. yle similar to In this example he Swing Tenor is ed This Melodist will generate intro chords melody harmony tye and solos using the group of setings preset wit this Melodist For example Swing Tenor uses Jazz Easy Style U EASY Sle anda Tenor Sax pateh and the Melody and Chord settings in the Melody Maker Scroll down the list and pick a Melodist that you d like to use Once you have chosen a Melodist examine the group of senings called Chords andor Melody seles MA Generate Chords A Generate Intro MiinsertBass Pedals E Generate Melody KI solo in Middle Ch T Allow Style Changes All Chords andor Melody M Auto Titles C Kilimo Kill Mel fcr Chords amp Mal Kill Pedal Kill Solo Form AABA 32 Bars Y Defaults Tempo 95 choruses 3 I AutoTempo A2 transpose Section Plus This section determines what aspects of the song are going to be generated Chapter e Automatic Musi Fetes Ifyou want to generate Chords Melody and an Intro make sur that these items are selected Ifyou like a Pedal Bass figure during the intro and at the end of sections eet the Insert Bass Pedals option Selecting Salo in Middle Ch will generate an improvisation in the middle choruses of the song Uy like Band in option The Allow Style Changes checkbox if set allows a Melodist to load in the style associated w
403. yles that use the currently highlighted RealTracks instrument Clicking ona style name will load the style into the current Band in a Box song Press Play to heur your current song played wih the ReslTracka style that you want to audition Defaults IDefonlis sets the dilog to default values Settings Settings launches the RealTracks Settings dialog Audition Audition and s buttons play a short MAA file demo of the currently selected RealTracks without affecting the currently loaded song in Band in Box The Audition buton plays a solo file and the FH button plays a file in context With a band Picking RealTracks To use the dialog ist select the track that you want to assign Then select the RealTracks that you want in the list below it amer CH Type Ted Tempo Genre 9 You can sor the list by clicking on any column heading As well as Name GM General MIDI instrument Type Rhythm or Soloist Fel Even or Swing Tempo Genre and Number there are mere columns with additional information about cach RealTrack NASet St Nt Artist T H The N A column shows NAA for Real Track that you either have not installed or haven t yet purchased if Show RealTracks that are N A is checked below Set is the number of the Real Tacks set that ineludes the instrument The S stereo column shows whether the instrument playback is stereo or mono

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Notice d`utilisation et de montage SPRAY  LaCie Core7    JVC GR-AXM1U Camcorder User Manual  Fujitsu Cloud Edition V3.1.0 Server User Manual  Major Science_Heat Block/日本語  Atlona AT-HD44M-SR Printer User Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file